WO2024041171A1 - Phase calibration method and communication apparatus - Google Patents

Phase calibration method and communication apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2024041171A1
WO2024041171A1 PCT/CN2023/102948 CN2023102948W WO2024041171A1 WO 2024041171 A1 WO2024041171 A1 WO 2024041171A1 CN 2023102948 W CN2023102948 W CN 2023102948W WO 2024041171 A1 WO2024041171 A1 WO 2024041171A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
terminal device
information
srs
terminal
resource configuration
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2023/102948
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
余健
许华
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2024041171A1 publication Critical patent/WO2024041171A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L25/00Baseband systems
    • H04L25/02Details ; arrangements for supplying electrical power along data transmission lines
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L27/00Modulated-carrier systems
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H04W72/0446Resources in time domain, e.g. slots or frames
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H04W72/0453Resources in frequency domain, e.g. a carrier in FDMA
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/20Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H04W72/23Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of wireless communications, and in particular to a phase calibration method and communication device.
  • uplink communication In a wireless communication system, sending information from a terminal device to a network device is called uplink (UP) communication.
  • UP uplink
  • a single terminal device is limited in uplink transmit power, and the transmission rate is usually low, which cannot meet high-rate business requirements.
  • the data to be transmitted can be aggregated and transmitted by multi-channel signals corresponding to multiple terminal devices, so that the aggregated and transmitted multi-channel signals form a co-directional superposition when reaching the network device to obtain power gain. , thereby increasing the uplink transmission rate.
  • the aggregated and transmitted multi-channel signals cannot form a co-directional superposition when reaching the network device, which in turn results in the inability to obtain power gain.
  • the phase calibration method and communication device provided by the embodiments of the present application can improve the coherence of aggregated and transmitted multi-channel signals when the phase changes and/or frequency offset changes between multiple terminal devices are inconsistent, so as to improve the coherence superposition of multi-channel signals. Power gain.
  • a phase calibration method is provided.
  • the method can be executed by a first terminal device, or can be executed by a component of the first terminal device, such as a processor, a chip, or a chip system of the first terminal device. It can also be It is implemented by a logic module or software that can realize all or part of the functions of the first terminal device.
  • the following description takes the method being executed by the first terminal device as an example.
  • the method includes: the first terminal device receives first indication information from the network device, and receives the first SRS from the second terminal device on the time-frequency resource indicated by the first SRS resource configuration information according to the first indication information; and
  • the first SRS performs measurements to obtain phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the first terminal equipment and the second terminal equipment.
  • the first indication information indicates that the first sounding reference signal SRS resource configuration information received by the first terminal equipment is used for phase calibration between the first terminal equipment and other terminal equipment, and the phase difference information and/or frequency offset information is used for compensation. The corresponding phase difference and/or frequency offset when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal.
  • the first indication information indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information received by the first terminal device is used for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices, so that the first terminal device can receive data from the second terminal device.
  • the first SRS of the terminal equipment and measuring the first SRS to obtain the phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the first terminal equipment and the second terminal equipment, through which the phase difference information and/or the frequency offset information can be Compensating for the phase difference caused by inconsistent phase changes and/or frequency offset changes between the first terminal device and the second terminal device when the first terminal device and the second terminal device transmit the first signal at the same time, thereby improving the performance of the first terminal device and the second terminal device to aggregate the coherence between the transmitted signals to improve the power gain of co-directional superposition of multi-channel signals.
  • the coherence of the aggregated and transmitted multi-channel signals can be improved to improve the co-directional superposition of the multi-channel signals. Power gain.
  • the corresponding phase difference when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal includes a difference between the first phase difference and the second phase difference.
  • the first phase difference is the phase difference between the first terminal device and the second terminal device at the first time
  • the second phase difference is the phase difference between the first terminal device and the second terminal device at the second time.
  • the first time is the channel state information CSI measurement time determined by the first terminal device.
  • the second moment is the moment when the first terminal device sends the first signal to the network device.
  • the corresponding frequency offset when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal includes a difference between the first frequency offset and the second frequency offset.
  • the first frequency offset is the frequency offset between the first terminal device and the second terminal device at the first time
  • the second frequency offset is the frequency offset between the first terminal device and the second terminal device at the second time.
  • the first time is the CSI measurement time determined by the first terminal device
  • the second time is the time when the first terminal device sends the first signal to the network device. time.
  • the first indication information includes first SRS resource configuration information.
  • the first SRS resource configuration information includes usage indication, usage indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information is used by the first terminal device to receive SRS; or usage indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information is used by the first terminal device and other terminal devices. phase calibration. That is to say, the first indication information may be information in which usage is configured as "receive" in the first SRS resource configuration information. This may implicitly indicate that the first SRS resource configuration information is used between the first terminal device and other terminal devices. phase calibration. Moreover, since the SRS resource configuration information itself is used by the terminal device to send SRS, and when the SRS resource configuration information is used for phase calibration, it can be implicitly expressed that the SRS resource configuration information is used by the terminal device to receive SRS.
  • the first indication information includes first SRS resource configuration information
  • the symbol type corresponding to the time domain resource information included in the first SRS resource configuration information is a downlink symbol. That is to say, when the symbol type corresponding to the time domain resource information included in the first SRS resource configuration information is a downlink symbol, it may indicate that the first SRS resource configuration information is used for receiving SRS. That is to say, when the symbol type corresponding to the time domain resource information included in the first SRS resource configuration information is a downlink symbol, it can indicate that the first SRS resource configuration information is used to receive SRS, and then implicitly indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information is used for receiving SRS. Phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices.
  • the CSI measurement time determined by the first terminal device is when the first terminal device receives The time of the channel state information reference signal CSI-RS from the network device.
  • the method further includes: the first terminal device receiving second indication information from the network device, the second indication information being used to instruct the first terminal device to send a message to the second terminal device.
  • the device sends a first precoding matrix, which is the precoding matrix corresponding to the first moment when the first terminal device determines to use a non-codebook transmission method to send the first signal; the first terminal device receives the signal from the second terminal
  • the first channel information of the device includes the channel matrix obtained by the second terminal device measuring the CSI-RS; the first terminal device obtains the first channel information and the first terminal device by measuring the CSI-RS.
  • the two channel information determines the first precoding matrix; the first terminal device sends the first precoding matrix to the second terminal device. That is to say, by sending the first channel information to the first terminal device, the second terminal device can share the channel matrix of the downlink channel between the second terminal device and the network device between the first terminal device and the second terminal device. Furthermore, the first terminal device sends the first precoding matrix to the second terminal device, so that the first terminal device and the second terminal device can share the first precoding matrix.
  • the CSI measurement time determined by the first terminal device is when the first terminal device transmits the first signal to the network.
  • the time when the device sends the second SRS, and the second SRS is used for CSI measurement of the uplink channel; or, the CSI measurement time determined by the first terminal device is the time when the second terminal device sends the third SRS to the network device.
  • the time when the second terminal device sends the third SRS to the network device is instructed by the network device to the first terminal device, and the third SRS is used for CSI measurement of the uplink channel.
  • the method before the first terminal device receives the first indication information from the network device, the method further includes: the first terminal device receives third indication information from the network device.
  • the third indication information indicates that the M pieces of SRS resource configuration information received by the first terminal device are candidate SRS resource configuration information for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices, and M is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • the first indication information is also used to indicate that the N pieces of SRS resource configuration information among the M pieces of SRS resource configuration information are the first SRS resource configuration information, and N is a positive integer less than or equal to M.
  • the first terminal device can obtain multiple SRS resources for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices according to the third indication information, and then the first terminal device can receive signals on multiple time-frequency resources. Multiple different SRSs are used for phase calibration, thereby improving the efficiency of phase calibration.
  • the method before the first terminal device receives the first indication information from the network device, the method further includes: the first terminal device sends capability information to the network device, the capability information It is used to indicate that the first terminal device has the ability to obtain phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • a phase calibration method is provided.
  • the method can be executed by a network device, or by a component of the network device, such as a processor, a chip, or a chip system of the network device. It can also be executed by a device that can realize all or part of the Logic module or software implementation of network device functions.
  • the following description takes the method being executed by a network device as an example.
  • the method includes: the network device obtains first indication information and sends the first indication information to the first terminal device.
  • the first instruction information instructs the first terminal device to connect
  • the received first sounding reference signal SRS resource configuration information is used for phase calibration between the first terminal equipment and other terminal equipment.
  • the first indication information indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information received by the first terminal device is used for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices, so that the first terminal device can receive data from the second terminal device.
  • the first SRS of the terminal equipment and measuring the first SRS to obtain the phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the first terminal equipment and the second terminal equipment, through which the phase difference information and/or the frequency offset information can be Compensating for the phase difference caused by inconsistent phase changes and/or frequency offset changes between the first terminal device and the second terminal device when the first terminal device and the second terminal device transmit the first signal at the same time, thereby improving the performance of the first terminal device and the second terminal device to aggregate the coherence between the transmitted signals to improve the power gain of co-directional superposition of multi-channel signals.
  • the coherence of the aggregated and transmitted multi-channel signals can be improved to improve the co-directional superposition of the multi-channel signals. Power gain.
  • the first indication information includes first SRS resource configuration information.
  • the first SRS resource configuration information includes usage indication, usage indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information is used by the first terminal device to receive SRS; or usage indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information is used by the first terminal device and other terminal devices. phase calibration. That is to say, the first indication information may be information in which usage is configured as "receive" in the first SRS resource configuration information. This may implicitly indicate that the first SRS resource configuration information is used between the first terminal device and other terminal devices. phase calibration. Moreover, since the SRS resource configuration information itself is used by the terminal device to send SRS, and when the SRS resource configuration information is used for phase calibration, it can be implicitly expressed that the SRS resource configuration information is used by the terminal device to receive SRS.
  • the first indication information includes first SRS resource configuration information
  • the symbol type corresponding to the time domain resource information included in the first SRS resource configuration information is a downlink symbol. That is to say, when the symbol type corresponding to the time domain resource information included in the first SRS resource configuration information is a downlink symbol, it may indicate that the first SRS resource configuration information is used for receiving SRS. That is to say, when the symbol type corresponding to the time domain resource information included in the first SRS resource configuration information is a downlink symbol, it can indicate that the first SRS resource configuration information is used to receive SRS, and then implicitly indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information is used for receiving SRS. Phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices.
  • the method further includes: the network device sends second indication information to the first terminal device, and the second indication information is used to instruct the first terminal device to send
  • the first precoding matrix is the precoding matrix corresponding to the first moment when the first terminal device determines to use a non-codebook transmission method to send the first signal.
  • the first moment is when the first terminal device receives data from the network.
  • the time of the device's channel state information reference signal CSI-RS That is to say, the network device may still be the first terminal device and send the first precoding matrix to the second terminal device, so that the first terminal device and the second terminal device can share the first precoding matrix.
  • the network device obtains the first indication information, which may include: the network device receives capability information from the first terminal device, the capability information is used to indicate that the first terminal device has the ability to obtain The capability of phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • the network device sends third indication information to the first terminal device.
  • the third indication information indicates that the M pieces of SRS resource configuration information received by the first terminal device are candidate SRS resource configuration information for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices, and M is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • the first indication information is also used to indicate that the N pieces of SRS resource configuration information among the M pieces of SRS resource configuration information are the first SRS resource configuration information, and N is a positive integer less than or equal to M. That is to say, the network device can provide the first terminal device with multiple SRS resources for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices through the third indication information, so that the first terminal device can perform phase calibration at multiple times. Multiple different SRSs are received on frequency resources for phase calibration, thereby improving the efficiency of phase calibration.
  • a communication device for implementing the various methods mentioned above.
  • the communication device may be the first terminal device in the first aspect, or a device including the first terminal device, or a device included in the first terminal device, such as a chip; or the communication device may be the second terminal device.
  • the communication device includes corresponding modules, units, or means (means) for implementing the above method.
  • the modules, units, or means can be implemented by hardware, software, or by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules or units corresponding to the above functions.
  • the communication device may include a processing module and a transceiver module.
  • the transceiver module which may also be called a transceiver unit, is used to implement the sending and/or receiving functions in any of the above aspects and any possible implementation manner thereof.
  • the transceiver module can be composed of a transceiver circuit, a transceiver, a transceiver or a communication interface.
  • This processing module can be used to implement any of the above aspects and its processing functionality in any possible implementation.
  • the transceiver module is configured to receive first indication information from the network device, where the first indication information is used to instruct the first terminal device to receive the first sounding reference signal SRS resource configuration information for the first terminal device to communicate with other devices. phase calibration between terminal devices; a transceiver module, further configured to receive the first SRS from the second terminal device on the time-frequency resource indicated by the first SRS resource configuration information according to the first indication information; a processing module, configured to An SRS performs measurements to obtain phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the first terminal equipment and the second terminal equipment. The phase difference information and/or frequency offset information are used to compensate the corresponding phase difference and/or frequency offset when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal.
  • the corresponding phase difference and/or frequency offset when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal include the difference between the first phase difference and the second phase difference, and the first phase difference is the first The phase difference between the terminal device and the second terminal device at the first time, and the second phase difference is the phase difference between the first terminal device and the second terminal device at the second time.
  • the first time is the channel state information CSI measurement time determined by the first terminal device, and the second time is the time when the first terminal device sends the first signal to the network device.
  • the corresponding frequency offset when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal includes the difference between the first frequency offset and the second frequency offset.
  • the first frequency offset is the frequency offset between the first terminal device and the second terminal device at the first time
  • the second frequency offset is the frequency offset between the first terminal device and the second terminal device at the second time.
  • the first time is the CSI measurement time determined by the first terminal device
  • the second time is the time when the first terminal device sends the first signal to the network device.
  • the first indication information includes first SRS resource configuration information
  • the first SRS resource configuration information includes usage indication.
  • usage indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information is used for the first terminal device to receive SRS; or usage indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information is used for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices.
  • the first indication information includes first SRS resource configuration information, and the symbol type corresponding to the time domain resource information included in the first SRS resource configuration information is a downlink symbol.
  • the CSI measurement time determined by the first terminal device is when the first terminal device receives the channel state information reference signal CSI- from the network device. RS moment.
  • the transceiver module is also configured to receive second indication information from the network device.
  • the second indication information is used to instruct the first terminal device to send the first precoding matrix to the second terminal device.
  • the first precoding matrix Determine for the first terminal device the precoding matrix corresponding to the first moment when the first signal is sent using a non-codebook transmission method;
  • the transceiver module is also used to receive the first channel information from the second terminal device, the first channel
  • the information includes a channel matrix obtained by measuring the CSI-RS by the second terminal device;
  • the processing module is also configured to determine the first precoding according to the first channel information and the second channel information obtained by measuring the CSI-RS by the first terminal device.
  • Matrix; transceiver module also used to send the first precoding matrix to the second terminal device.
  • the CSI measurement time determined by the first terminal device is the time when the first terminal device sends the second SRS to the network device, and the second SRS is sent by the first terminal device to the network device.
  • the SRS is used for CSI measurement of the uplink channel; or, the CSI measurement time determined by the first terminal device is the time when the second terminal device sends the third SRS to the network device.
  • the time when the second terminal device sends the third SRS to the network device is instructed by the network device to the first terminal device, and the third SRS is used for CSI measurement of the uplink channel.
  • the transceiver module is also configured to send capability information to the network device before receiving the first indication information from the network device.
  • the capability information is used to indicate that the first terminal device is equipped to obtain the first terminal device and the second terminal device. capability between phase difference information and/or frequency offset information.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to receive third indication information from the network device before receiving the first indication information from the network device.
  • the third indication information indicates that the M pieces of SRS resource configuration information received by the first terminal device are candidate SRS resource configuration information for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices, and M is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • the first indication information is also used to indicate that the N pieces of SRS resource configuration information among the M pieces of SRS resource configuration information are the first SRS resource configuration information, and N is a positive integer less than or equal to M.
  • the transceiver module described in the third aspect may include a receiving module and a sending module. This application does not specifically limit the specific implementation of the transceiver module.
  • the communication device described in the third aspect may further include a storage module that stores programs or instructions.
  • the processing module executes the program or instruction
  • the communication device described in the third aspect can perform the method described in the first aspect.
  • a fourth aspect provides a communication device for performing the method in the above second aspect or any possible implementation of the second aspect.
  • the communication device may be the network device in the above-mentioned second aspect, or a device including the above-mentioned network device, or a device included in the above-mentioned network device, such as a chip.
  • the communication device includes corresponding modules, units, or means (means) for implementing the above method.
  • the modules, units, or means can be implemented by hardware, software, or by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules or units corresponding to the above functions.
  • the communication device may include a processing module and a transceiver module.
  • the transceiver module which may also be called a transceiver unit, is used to implement the sending and/or receiving functions in the above second aspect and any possible implementation thereof.
  • the transceiver module can be composed of a transceiver circuit, a transceiver, a transceiver or a communication interface.
  • This processing module can be used to implement the processing functions in the above second aspect and any possible implementation manner thereof.
  • the processing module is configured to obtain first indication information, which indicates that the first sounding reference signal SRS resource configuration information received by the first terminal device is used for the phase between the first terminal device and other terminal devices.
  • Calibration; transceiver module configured to send first indication information to the first terminal device.
  • the first indication information includes first SRS resource configuration information
  • the first SRS resource configuration information includes usage indication.
  • usage indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information is used for the first terminal device to receive SRS; or usage indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information is used for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices.
  • the first indication information includes first SRS resource configuration information, and the symbol type corresponding to the time domain resource information included in the first SRS resource configuration information is a downlink symbol.
  • the transceiver module is also configured to send second indication information to the first terminal device.
  • the second indication information is used to instruct the first terminal device to send the first precoding matrix to the second terminal device.
  • the first precoding matrix The matrix is a precoding matrix corresponding to the first moment when the first terminal device determines to use a non-codebook transmission method to send the first signal.
  • the first moment is when the first terminal device receives the channel state information reference signal CSI- from the network device. RS moment.
  • the processing module is used to obtain the first indication information including: receiving capability information from the first terminal device through the transceiver module, and the capability information is used to indicate that the first terminal device is capable of obtaining the first terminal device and the second terminal device. phase difference information and/or frequency offset information; determine the first indication information based on the capability information.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to send third indication information to the first terminal device before sending the first indication information to the first terminal device.
  • the third indication information indicates that the M pieces of SRS resource configuration information received by the first terminal device are candidate SRS resource configuration information for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices, and M is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • the first indication information is also used to indicate that the N pieces of SRS resource configuration information among the M pieces of SRS resource configuration information are the first SRS resource configuration information, and N is a positive integer less than or equal to M.
  • the transceiver module described in the fourth aspect may include a receiving module and a sending module. This application does not specifically limit the specific implementation of the transceiver module.
  • the communication device described in the fourth aspect may further include a storage module that stores programs or instructions.
  • the processing module executes the program or instruction, the communication device described in the fourth aspect can perform the method described in the second aspect.
  • the transceiver module includes a sending module and a receiving module, respectively used to implement the sending and receiving functions in any of the above aspects and any possible implementation manner thereof.
  • a communication device including: a processor and a memory; the memory is used to store computer instructions, and when the processor executes the instructions, the communication device performs the method described in any of the above aspects.
  • the communication device may be the first terminal device in the first aspect, or a device including the first terminal device, or a device included in the first terminal device, such as a chip; or the communication device may be the second terminal device.
  • a sixth aspect provides a communication device, including: a processor and a communication interface; the communication interface is used to communicate with modules external to the communication device; the processor is used to execute computer programs or instructions to enable the communication device Perform any of the methods described above.
  • the communication device may be the first terminal device in the first aspect, or a device including the first terminal device, or a device included in the first terminal device, such as a chip; or the communication device may be the second terminal device. in aspect Network equipment, or devices including the above network equipment, or devices included in the above network equipment.
  • a communication device including: at least one processor; the processor is configured to execute a computer program or instructions stored in a memory, so that the communication device executes the method described in any of the above aspects.
  • the memory may be coupled to the processor, or may be independent of the processor.
  • the communication device may be the first terminal device in the first aspect, or a device including the first terminal device, or a device included in the first terminal device, such as a chip; or the communication device may be the second terminal device.
  • a computer-readable storage medium stores computer programs or instructions. When run on a communication device, the communication device can perform the method described in any of the above aspects. .
  • a ninth aspect provides a computer program product containing instructions that, when run on a communication device, enables the communication device to perform the method described in any of the above aspects.
  • a tenth aspect provides a communication device (for example, the communication device may be a chip or a chip system).
  • the communication device includes a processor for implementing the functions involved in any of the above aspects.
  • the communication device includes a memory for storing necessary program instructions and data.
  • the device when it is a system-on-a-chip, it may be composed of a chip or may include chips and other discrete components.
  • the communication device provided in any one of the third to tenth aspects is a chip
  • the above-mentioned sending action/function can be understood as output
  • the above-mentioned receiving action/function can be understood as input.
  • the technical effects brought by any one of the design methods in the third aspect to the tenth aspect can be referred to the technical effects brought by the different design methods in the above-mentioned first aspect or the second aspect, and will not be described again here.
  • An eleventh aspect provides a communication system, which includes the first terminal device described in the above aspect and the network device described in the above aspect.
  • Figure 1 is a schematic diagram of a MIMO system channel model provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 2 is a schematic flow chart of sending uplink signals based on codebook transmission provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • Figure 3 is a schematic diagram of a non-codebook transmission process provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 4 is a schematic diagram of a process for determining a precoding matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • Figure 5 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 6 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 7 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 8 is a schematic structural diagram of a base station provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 9 is a schematic flowchart 1 of a phase calibration method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 10 is a schematic diagram of the measurement time of aggregated transmission of a first terminal device and a second terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
  • Figure 11 is a schematic flow chart 2 of a phase calibration method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a first terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • MIMO technology refers to the technology that uses multiple antennas to send and receive signals in the field of wireless communications.
  • network equipment and terminal equipment use MIMO technology to obtain power gain, spatial diversity gain, spatial multiplexing gain, etc.
  • Spatial diversity can refer to introducing signal redundancy in space to achieve the purpose of diversity.
  • the terminal device transmits two data streams that are orthogonal to each other through two antennas, thereby obtaining diversity gain.
  • Spatial multiplexing can refer to sending multiple independent data streams on the same time-frequency resource for each antenna to achieve the purpose of improving spectrum efficiency without increasing spectrum resources.
  • the terminal device can map the upstream data layer (layer mapper) into two independent data streams and pass them through multiple The antennas transmit simultaneously, so that airspace resources on the same time-frequency resource can be reused.
  • the number of layers is equal to the number of independent data streams, which will be described uniformly here and will not be described again below.
  • the antenna port (antenna port)
  • Antenna ports define the channel on a certain symbol. Among them, the antenna port is a logical concept.
  • One antenna port can correspond to one transmitting antenna or multiple antennas.
  • Antenna ports can be distinguished by reference signals (RS) (also called pilots):
  • RS reference signals
  • the downlink and downlink reference signals are one by one.
  • Correspondence; in the uplink, the uplink and the uplink reference signal correspond one to one. If a reference signal is transmitted through multiple antennas, then the multiple antennas correspond to the same antenna port; if two different reference signals pass through the same Antenna transmission, then the antenna corresponds to two independent antenna ports.
  • the antenna port corresponding to the demodulation reference signal can be called a DMRS port
  • the antenna port corresponding to the downlink channel state information reference signal channel state information reference signal, CSI-RS
  • the antenna port corresponding to the uplink sounding reference signal SRS
  • CSI-RS is used for channel state information (CSI) measurement of downlink channels
  • SRS is used for CSI measurement of uplink channels.
  • the channel experienced by the signal sent through the antenna port can be estimated through the reference signal corresponding to the antenna port.
  • Table 1 exemplarily shows the corresponding relationship between some reference signals and antenna port index values in the new radio (new radio, NR) system. It can be understood that the antenna port index values in Table 1 are only exemplary and may also be other index values, which are not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • PDSCH DMRS can support 12 antenna ports. Among them, the number of layers used by the network device to send PDSCH is the same as the number of ports of PDSCH DMRS. In other words, the network equipment supports the transmission of up to 12 PDSCH DMRS symbol streams.
  • PDSCH is mainly used for the transmission of downlink data, and may also be used for the transmission of system messages.
  • the system message may include CSI-RS resource configuration information and SRS resource configuration information.
  • the CSI-RS resource configuration information is used by the terminal device to receive CSI-RS from the network device, and the SRS resource configuration information is used by the terminal device to send SRS to the network device.
  • PDCCH DMRS can support 1 antenna port.
  • PDCCH is used to transmit downlink control information (DCI).
  • the DCI includes the scheduling information of the PDSCH received by the terminal equipment and the uplink scheduling permission information obtained by the network equipment measuring the SRS.
  • the uplink scheduling grant information may include PUSCH resource allocation, transmission precoding matrix indicator (transmission precoding matrix indicator, TPMI), transmission layer number, SRS resource indicator (SRS resource indicator, SRI), or DMRS port indication information wait.
  • TPMI is used by the terminal device to send uplink signals using a code book transmission method.
  • TPMI corresponds to a precoding matrix in the codebook set.
  • SRI is used in transmission schemes where terminal equipment uses non-codebook transmission methods to send uplink signals. SRI can be associated to a non-quantized precoding matrix.
  • CSI-RS can support 32 antenna ports (including 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, 16, 24, and 32).
  • the network device sends CSI-RS to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device receives the CSI-RS from the network device.
  • the terminal device can perform channel estimation on the CSI-RS to obtain the CSI, and report the CSI to the network device through PUSCH or PUCCH.
  • both PUSCH DMRS and SRS can support 4 antenna ports (including 1, 2, or 4).
  • the terminal equipment can support the transmission of 4 independent SRS symbol streams or PUSCH DMRS symbol streams.
  • the network equipment has Nt transmitting antennas, and the terminal equipment has Nr receiving antennas.
  • X is a column vector containing Nt elements
  • Y is a column vector containing Nr elements
  • the channel matrix H is a matrix containing Nr ⁇ Nt elements
  • N is additive Gaussian noise.
  • the channel matrix H may be the matrix shown in formula (2).
  • h ij in the i-th row and j-th column of the channel matrix H can represent the channel gain from the j-th transmitting antenna to the i-th receiving antenna.
  • the transmitted signal can be preprocessed according to the channel information (eg, channel matrix H) obtained by CSI measurement.
  • channel information eg, channel matrix H
  • part or all of the interference between multiple independent symbol streams after layer mapping can be eliminated in advance at the network device to achieve link adaptation of data transmission, that is, using different data transmission methods according to different channel conditions.
  • the matrix used for precoding processing when network equipment or terminal equipment sends signals is the "precoding matrix".
  • the additive Gaussian noise N is ignored, after the network device adopts precoding processing, the relationship between the received signal Y and the transmitted signal X can be determined by formula (3).
  • Y HVX formula (3)
  • multiplying the channel matrix H by V on the right is equivalent to multiplying the data corresponding to the transmitted signal X by V on the left.
  • the channel matrix H can be precoded.
  • the precoding matrix V can be obtained by decomposing the channel matrix H and performing channel estimation.
  • the method of decomposing the channel matrix H may be singular value decomposition (SVD), or eigen value decomposition (EVD), or other matrix decomposition methods.
  • SVD singular value decomposition
  • ELD eigen value decomposition
  • the following takes SVD as an example to explain the process of obtaining the precoding matrix V through the channel matrix H.
  • formula (4) can be obtained by performing SVD decomposition on the channel matrix H.
  • H USV H formula (4)
  • the matrix U is a unitary matrix of Nr ⁇ Nr elements
  • the matrix V H is a unitary matrix of Nt ⁇ Nt elements
  • the matrix S is a diagonal matrix of Nr ⁇ Nt elements.
  • the column vector of the matrix U is the orthogonal eigenvector of the product HHT of the channel matrix H and its transpose matrix HT.
  • the column vectors of matrix V H are the orthogonal eigenvectors of HHT.
  • the matrix S may not be a square matrix.
  • the matrix S may be a matrix shown in formula (5).
  • the number of elements whose values corresponding to the elements on the diagonal of the matrix S are greater than or equal to the first threshold is the rank of the channel matrix H.
  • the first threshold may be 0, 0.1, or 0.2, etc.; or, the first threshold may also be the condition number corresponding to the S matrix used to measure the sensitivity of the matrix to changes. This is not the case in the embodiment of this application. Specific limitations.
  • the number of layers depends on the rank of the channel matrix H. For example, if the rank of the channel matrix H is 1, then the number of layers is 1; if the rank of the channel matrix H is 2, then the number of layers is 2. This is explained uniformly and will not be described again below.
  • matrix V H is the conjugate transpose matrix of the precoding matrix. That is to say, by performing SVD decomposition on the signal matrix H, not only the rank of the channel matrix H can be obtained, but also the precoding matrix V can be obtained through V H.
  • the multiple symbol streams (symbol streams corresponding to the DMRS ports) obtained through layer mapping can be spread to each antenna port through precoding (ie, left multiplication of the precoding matrix).
  • precoding ie, left multiplication of the precoding matrix
  • the number of antenna ports is 4, the number of layers is 2, and the number of symbols in each symbol stream is 1, and the description is given in combination with formula (7).
  • matrix L is a matrix corresponding to multiple symbol streams.
  • the number of row vectors of matrix L is used to represent the number of layers.
  • the number of row vectors (number of rows) of the precoding matrix V is equal to the number of antenna ports, and the number of column vectors (number of columns) of the precoding matrix V is equal to the number of layers (that is, the number of DMRS ports).
  • the column vectors of the precoding matrix V are precoding vectors, and each precoding vector corresponds to a symbol stream.
  • each symbol stream (l 1 or l 2 ) is spread to each antenna port by the corresponding precoding vector (for example, the vector [v 11 l 1 ,v 21 l 1 ,v 31 l 1 ,v 41 l 1 ]T means that the symbol stream l 1 is spread to each antenna port), and each antenna port carries the sum of multiple precoded symbol streams.
  • the vector [v 11 l 1 ,v 21 l 1 ,v 31 l 1 ,v 41 l 1 ]T means that the symbol stream l 1 is spread to each antenna port
  • each antenna port carries the sum of multiple precoded symbol streams.
  • each element in the precoding vector may represent the weight of the symbol stream corresponding to the precoding vector sent by each antenna port.
  • the signals sent by each antenna port are linearly superimposed, thereby forming a strong signal in a certain direction of space. area. That is, the precoding vector may indicate beam information for transmitting the symbol stream.
  • precoding vector may also be called “antenna weight vector”, “angle vector”, “digital beam (digital beam) vector”, “spatial domain beam basis vector”, or “spatial domain basis vector”. vector” etc.
  • precoding vector "antenna weight vector”, “angle vector”, “digital beam vector”, “spatial domain beam basis vector”, and “spatial domain basis vector” can be interchangeably expressed, and are explained here uniformly. No further details will be given below.
  • a beam can be understood as a spatial resource, which can refer to a transmit or receive precoding vector with energy transmission directivity.
  • the sending or receiving precoding vector can be identified by index information, and the index information can correspond to the resource identifier (identity, ID) of the configured terminal device.
  • the index information can correspond to the identifier or resource of the configured CSI-RS; or it can It is the identifier or resource of the corresponding configured SRS.
  • the index information may also be index information carried explicitly or implicitly by a signal or channel carried by a beam.
  • Energy transmission directivity can refer to precoding the signal to be sent through the precoding vector. The signal that has been processed by the precoding has a certain spatial directivity.
  • the signal that has been precoded by the precoding vector has Better receiving power, such as meeting the reception demodulation signal-to-noise ratio; energy transmission directivity can also refer to receiving the same signal sent from different spatial locations through the precoding vector with different receiving powers.
  • the same communication device such as terminal equipment or network equipment
  • different devices may also have different precoding vectors, that is, Corresponds to different beams.
  • a communication device may use one or more of multiple different precoding vectors at the same time, that is, it may form one beam or multiple beams at the same time.
  • a codebook is a set including multiple precoding matrices.
  • the plurality of precoding matrices may be predefined.
  • Codebooks can be divided into different types, such as Type I (type I) codebooks and Type II (type II) codebooks specified by the 3rd generation partnership project (3GPP) in technical specification (TS) 38.214 II) Codebook.
  • Type I codebooks can be divided into Type I single-panel codebooks and Type II multi-panel codebooks.
  • Type II codebooks can be divided into Type II single-panel codebooks and Type II multi-panel codebooks.
  • the specific design of the codebooks please refer to the relevant description of TS38.214 and will not be repeated here.
  • Terminal equipment can transmit uplink signals through MIMO technology to obtain multi-antenna processing gains.
  • the uplink transmission scheme of the NR system includes a transmission scheme that uses a codebook transmission method to send uplink signals, or a transmission scheme that uses a non-codebook transmission method to send uplink signals.
  • the precoding matrix used by the terminal equipment is taken from the fixed codebook.
  • the process of the NR system sending uplink signals based on codebook transmission includes the following steps:
  • the terminal device sends SRS to the network device. Accordingly, the network device receives the SRS from the terminal device.
  • the network device measures the SRS from the terminal device to obtain the uplink scheduling permission information, and sends the uplink scheduling permission information to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device receives the uplink scheduling permission information from the network device.
  • the uplink scheduling permission information may include information such as TPMI, transmission layer number, or SRI.
  • the terminal device sends an uplink signal to the network device according to the uplink scheduling permission information.
  • the network device receives the uplink signal from the terminal device.
  • the terminal device can determine the corresponding precoding matrix in the codebook based on TPMI, SRI, and the number of transmission layers, and then the terminal device can precode the uplink signal according to the precoding matrix.
  • the uplink scheduling permission information is explained by taking the network device configuring two SRS resources for the terminal device. Both SRS resources contain the same number of SRS ports. Among them, the network equipment selects the optimal uplink precoding matrix and the number of transmission layers by measuring the channels corresponding to the two SRS resources (for example, performing SVD decomposition on the SRS port), and converts the selected precoding matrix through the SRI in the DCI. The SRS resources corresponding to the matrix are indicated to the terminal equipment.
  • the terminal device may send SRS corresponding to multiple SRS resources using different beams (eg, analog beams).
  • the network device's selection of SRS resources is equivalent to the selection of the uplink transmission beam. It can be understood that when the network device configures an SRS resource for the terminal device, the precoding matrix selected by the network device corresponds to the SRS resource, and the uplink scheduling permission information sent by the network device to the terminal device in step 202 may not be Includes SRI.
  • the uplink signal may be carried by PUSCH.
  • the DMRS of PUSCH and the data of PSUCH are precoded using the same precoding matrix.
  • the terminal equipment can precode the PUSCH data according to formula (8).
  • [y 0 (i), y 1 (i),..., y v-1 (i)]T represents the matrix corresponding to the symbols of the PUSCH data
  • v represents the number of transmission layers indicated by the network device ( That is, the number of layers of PUSCH data)
  • i represents the i-th data symbol of PUSCH data
  • the precoding matrix V is the precoding matrix corresponding to TPMI.
  • the precoding matrix V is multiplied by [y 0 (i), y 1 (i),..., y v-1 (i)]T, which means precoding the PUSCH data.
  • Indicates the data mapped to port p n after precoding, n 0,1,...k-1.
  • the DMRS of PUSCH can also be precoded using the precoding method of formula (8), that is, the same precoding matrix is used for precoding, and the precoded DMRS symbol stream is mapped to the same antenna port.
  • the terminal equipment performs PUSCH and After the DMRS of PUSCH is precoded, it needs to be further processed according to the SRS precoding method.
  • the terminal equipment determines the uplink precoding matrix based on channel reciprocity (for example, the channel of a time division duplex (TDD) system has reciprocity). If reciprocity between uplink and downlink channels exists, the terminal device can estimate the uplink channel using downlink reference signals (such as CSI-RS), and use algorithms such as SVD on the estimated channel to obtain the uplink precoding matrix.
  • channel reciprocity for example, the channel of a time division duplex (TDD) system has reciprocity.
  • TDD time division duplex
  • step S201 the terminal device measures the CSI-RS from the network device to obtain an uplink precoding matrix, and the terminal device separately precodes the SRS according to multiple precoding vectors in the uplink precoding matrix. In other words, the terminal device sends the precoded SRS to the network device;
  • step S202 the uplink scheduling grant information does not include TPMI
  • step 203 the terminal device uses the precoding matrix corresponding to the SRI in the uplink scheduling grant information to determine the precoding matrix for transmitting the uplink signal.
  • the non-codebook transmission process schematic diagram shown in FIG. 3 is used as an example to illustrate how the terminal device determines the precoding matrix for transmitting the signal.
  • the terminal device can precode the four SRS resources respectively. sent later.
  • the network device receives the SRS sent from the terminal device.
  • four SRS resources correspond to four precoding vectors one-to-one.
  • SRS resource #0 corresponds to precoding vector #0
  • SRS resource #1 corresponds to precoding vector #1
  • SRS resource #2 corresponds to precoding vector #2.
  • the precoding vector #3 corresponding to SRS resource #3. If the network device measures the SRS sent by the terminal device and selects SRS resource #0 and SRS resource #1, then the SRI in the uplink scheduling permission information sent by the network device indicates SRS resource #0 and SRS resource #1, and then the terminal device It may be determined according to the SRS indication that the precoding matrix for transmitting the uplink signal includes precoding vector #0 and precoding vector #1.
  • the following takes the NR system as an example to introduce the contents included in the SRS resource configuration information.
  • the SRS resource configuration information may include one or more SRS resource sets, or one or more SRS resources.
  • An SRS resource set may include one or more SRS resources.
  • An SRS resource can include one or more of the following:
  • usage indication In the NR system, the usage indication can be configured as “beam management (beammanagement)", “codebook (codebook)”, “noncodebook (noncodebook)”, or “antenna switching (antenna switching)” )”; among them, “beam management” is used for uplink beam management, “codebook” is used for uplink channel information acquisition of codebook transmission schemes, “non-codebook” is used for uplink channel information acquisition of non-codebook transmission schemes, “ “Antenna switching” is used to obtain downlink channel information based on SRS antenna switching;
  • beam management is used for uplink beam management
  • codebook is used for uplink channel information acquisition of codebook transmission schemes
  • non-codebook is used for uplink channel information acquisition of non-codebook transmission schemes
  • “Antenna switching” is used to obtain downlink channel information based on SRS antenna switching;
  • one SRS resource can be configured with 1, 2 or 4 antenna ports;
  • Time domain position In the NR system, the time domain position includes the index and starting position of the occupied orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbol.
  • the OFDM symbol index can indicate the number of OFDM symbols occupied by the SRS resource.
  • One SRS resource can be configured with 1, 2, 4, 8 or 12 OFDM symbols, and the starting position can be given by the field startPosition;
  • SRS resources can be divided into periodic (periodic), semi-persistent (semi-persistent) or aperiodic (aperiodic) types; among them, for semi-persistent or periodic SRS resource.
  • An SRS resource can include the period and timeslot offset index (timeslot offset) specified for the terminal device;
  • Occupied resource block (resource element, RB) index In the NR system, one SRS resource can occupy 4-272 RBs.
  • Multi-terminal device cooperative transmission is a communication technology that focuses on cooperative transmission of multiple terminal devices in a group of terminal devices.
  • multi-terminal equipment cooperative transmission can be used to improve system throughput, expand coverage and increase capacity, and can also improve communication reliability and reduce communication delay.
  • Multi-terminal device cooperative transmission can contribute to V2X and other scenarios as well as enhanced mobile broadband (eMBB) and ultra-reliable low latency communication (ultra-reliable low latency). communication, URLLC) and other scenarios.
  • eMBB enhanced mobile broadband
  • URLLC ultra-reliable low latency communication
  • multiple terminal devices in a group of terminal devices can communicate with each other through side link (SL) technology and/or short-range communication technology (such as Bluetooth, Wireless Fidelity (SL)). wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi), or near field communication (near field communication (NFC), etc.) to interact.
  • the group of terminal devices can be divided into source user equipment (source user equipment, SUE), and other terminal devices can be called cooperative user equipment (cooperative user equipment, CUE).
  • the SUE can send the collaboration data to be sent and the sending time to one or more CUEs through the SL, and then the SUE and one or more CUEs can send the collaboration data at the same time, thereby realizing collaborative transmission.
  • the cooperation data sent simultaneously by the SUE and the CUE may be the same; or, when the SUE and the CUE cooperate in transmission, they transmit the same transport block (TB).
  • uplink transmission may be based on TB as the basic unit for data transmission, and the TB may refer to data before encoding, that is, the original data to be transmitted by each terminal device.
  • Coherent superposition can refer to the co-directional superposition of multiple signals, which increases the power of the signal received by the device, thereby obtaining power gain.
  • strong coherence indicates that the signal power after the superposition of multiple signals is strong
  • weak coherence indicates that the signal power after the superposition of multiple signals is weak.
  • the phase difference may refer to the phase difference between signals sent by the terminal device.
  • the phase difference in the embodiment of the present application may refer to the phase difference between terminal devices.
  • the phase difference can be used to indicate the strength of coherence.
  • strong coherence means that the phase difference between signal #1 and signal #2 is near an integer multiple of 2 ⁇ .
  • the phase difference between signal #1 and signal #2 minus an integer multiple of 2 ⁇ is within a first range.
  • the first range may be [-10°, 10°], [-20°, 20°], or (-40°, 40°), etc., the embodiments of the present application do not specifically limit this.
  • weak coherence means that the phase difference between signal #1 and signal #2 is near an odd multiple of ⁇ , such as the phase difference between signal #1 and signal #2 minus an integer multiple of 2 ⁇ . The value is outside the first range. It can be understood that the closer the phase difference between signal #1 and signal #2 is to an odd multiple of ⁇ , the weaker the coherence between signal #1 and signal #2. When it is an odd multiple of ⁇ , the coherence between signal #1 and signal #2 is the weakest, and signal #1 and signal #2 cancel each other after being superimposed in the same direction. Not only can no power gain be obtained, but also signal # The power reduction after superposition of 1 and signal #2.
  • Frequency offset can refer to the difference in frequency between signals sent by end devices.
  • the frequency offset in the embodiment of the present application may refer to the frequency difference between terminal devices.
  • frequency offset will cause a phase difference between the two signals, and this phase difference is the accumulation of frequency offset over time. That is to say, the phase difference between the two signals includes the phase difference caused by the frequency offset between the two signals.
  • the phase difference between the terminal devices not only includes the phase difference caused by the frequency offset between the terminal devices, but also includes non-uniform phase differences due to other factors (such as random initial phase, channel delay, synchronization error, etc.) The phase difference caused by ideal factors).
  • the precoding matrix can change the state of the signal (such as amplitude, frequency, or phase, etc.), so the phase difference and/or frequency offset between terminal devices can be compensated through the precoding matrix. .
  • the precoding matrix compensates the phase difference between the terminal devices, it is equivalent to compensating the frequency offset between the terminal devices at the same time; if the precoding matrix only compensates for the phase difference caused by the frequency offset between the terminal devices , then the precoding matrix only compensates for the frequency offset between terminal devices, but does not compensate for the phase difference between terminal devices.
  • the terminal equipment can compensate for the frequency offset by using a precoding matrix to compensate the phase difference caused by the frequency offset between the terminal equipment.
  • Power consistency may mean that the transmission power of the signal transmitted by the terminal device at different times remains the same or the variation of the transmission power is less than or equal to the first threshold.
  • the first threshold may be 1dB, 2dB, or 3dB, which is not specifically limited in the embodiments of this application.
  • Phase continuity may mean that the phase change amount of the signal sent by the terminal device at different times is less than or equal to the second threshold.
  • the second threshold may be 10°, 20°, or 40°, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the first threshold and the second threshold may be pre-configured by the terminal device; or the first threshold and the second threshold may be agreed upon by the agreement; or the first threshold and the second threshold may be It is indicated by the network device, and the embodiment of this application does not specifically limit this.
  • the aggregate transmission can be divided into non-coherent joint transmission according to whether the phase difference and/or frequency offset between signals sent by multiple terminal devices is compensated during the uplink transmission process.
  • transmission, NCJT and coherent joint transmission (coherent joint transmission, CJT).
  • NCJT and CJT are introduced below.
  • NCJT can mean that in aggregated transmission, the signal sent by each terminal device does not need to achieve the effect of coherent superposition (ie, co-directional superposition) when it reaches the network device.
  • the network device determines the precoding matrix corresponding to each terminal device based on the CSI obtained from the CSI measurement of each terminal device. That is to say, in NCJT, the precoding matrix determined by the network device is determined based on the CSI information of the terminal device itself, without considering the CSI information of other terminal devices. Therefore, the precoding matrix determined by the network device does not compensate for the CSI information between terminal devices. phase difference.
  • terminal device #1 and terminal device #2 For example, taking the aggregate transmission of two terminal devices (terminal device #1 and terminal device #2) shown in Figure 4 as an example to illustrate that the precoding matrix determined by NCJT does not compensate for the phase difference between the terminal devices.
  • CSI measurement is performed between the network device and terminal device #1 to obtain the CSI of terminal device #1 at the CSI measurement time. Then the network device determines precoding matrix #1 based on the CSI and sends it to terminal device #1. 1 indicates the precoding matrix #1.
  • CSI measurement is performed between the network device and the terminal device #2 to obtain the precoding matrix #2 corresponding to the terminal device #2, and the precoding matrix #2 is indicated to the terminal device #2.
  • precoding matrix #1 and precoding matrix #2 do not compensate the terminal Phase difference between device #1 and terminal device #2.
  • the data before or after channel coding transmitted by each terminal device may be different; or, each terminal device transmits a different transmission block TB; or, each terminal device transmits a different transmission block TB;
  • the same TB is transmitted, but the redundancy version (RV) transmitted by each terminal device can be different.
  • RV redundancy version
  • TB includes basic data and multiple segments of redundant data after channel coding.
  • the basic data and multiple segments of redundant data are stored in the cache area in sequence.
  • RV is used to indicate the location of the terminal device to read the data in the cache area. That is, RV can be used to indicate the encoded data to be transmitted by each terminal device.
  • CJT can refer to the need for the signal sent by each terminal device to achieve coherent superposition (i.e., co-directional superposition) effect when it reaches the network device in aggregate transmission.
  • the network device jointly determines the precoding matrix corresponding to each terminal device based on the CSI obtained from the CSI measurement of each terminal device. That is to say, the precoding matrix determined in CJT is a precoding matrix determined comprehensively after combining the CSI information of each terminal device. Therefore, the precoding matrix determined in CJT compensates for the phase difference between multiple terminal devices.
  • the precoding matrix determined by the CJT compensates for the phase difference between the terminal devices.
  • the network device may jointly determine the precoding matrix #3 of the terminal device #1 and the precoding matrix #4 of the terminal device #2 based on the channel matrix #1 of the terminal device #1 and the channel matrix #2 of the terminal device #2, and Indicate precoding matrix #3 to terminal device #1, and precoding matrix #4 to terminal device #2, thereby ensuring the coherence between the signal sent by terminal device #1 and the signal sent by terminal device #2 to improve The power gain of multi-channel signals superimposed in the same direction.
  • channel matrix #1 is obtained by performing CSI measurements on the uplink channel between the network device and terminal device #1
  • channel matrix #2 is obtained by performing CSI measurements on the uplink channel between the network device and terminal device #2.
  • the channel is obtained by performing CSI measurements.
  • the CSI measurement time corresponding to channel matrix #1 is the same as the CSI measurement time corresponding to channel matrix #2 or the difference between them is less than the third threshold.
  • the third threshold may be 0.2ms, 0.3ms, or 1ms, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • CSI not only includes the channel matrix, but may also include interference information, etc. That is, the precoding matrix may be determined based on the channel matrix and/or interference information, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the third threshold may be pre-configured; or it may be agreed upon in the agreement.
  • the examples do not specifically limit this.
  • the data before channel coding transmitted by each terminal device may be the same; or the TB transmitted by each terminal device may be the same; or the RV of each terminal device may be the same. That is to say, in CJT, the collaboration data sent by each terminal device can be the same.
  • the signals sent by each terminal device in multiple terminal devices can be aggregated together for data transmission.
  • the aggregated and transmitted multi-channel signals form a co-directional superposition to obtain power gain. To achieve the effect of increasing the uplink transmission rate.
  • phase and/or frequency offset of the terminal equipment itself changes at different times, even if the phase difference and/or frequency offset between the multi-channel signals at the CSI measurement time is compensated through the precoding matrix during the aggregate transmission of multiple terminal equipment.
  • Frequency offset but when the phase changes and/or frequency offset changes between multiple terminal devices are inconsistent, the phase difference and/or frequency offset between the multi-channel signals at the time of transmission cannot meet the coherence requirements of co-directional superposition, which will As a result, power gain cannot be obtained when multiple terminal devices aggregate transmission.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a phase calibration method that can improve the coherence of aggregated and transmitted multi-channel signals when the phase changes and/or frequency offset changes between multiple terminal devices are inconsistent, so as to improve the co-directional superposition of multi-channel signals. power gain.
  • At least one of the following or similar expressions thereof refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of a single item (items) or a plurality of items (items).
  • at least one of a, b, or c can mean: a, b, c, a-b, a-c, b-c, or a-b-c, where a, b, c can be single or multiple .
  • words such as “first” and “second” are used to distinguish identical or similar items with basically the same functions and effects.
  • words such as “first” and “second” do not limit the number and execution order, and words such as “first” and “second” do not limit the number and execution order.
  • words such as “exemplary” or “for example” are used to represent examples, illustrations or explanations. Any embodiment or design described as “exemplary” or “such as” in the embodiments of the present application is not to be construed as preferred or advantageous over other embodiments or designs. Rather, the use of words such as “exemplary” or “such as” is intended to present related concepts in a concrete manner that is easier to understand.
  • instruction may include direct instruction and indirect instruction, and may also include explicit instruction and implicit instruction.
  • the information indicated by certain information (such as the following first sounding reference signal SRS resource configuration information indicating that the first terminal equipment receives the SRS is used by the first terminal equipment to receive the SRS) is called information to be indicated. In the specific implementation process, it is treated as There are many ways to indicate information. For example, but not limited to, the information to be indicated can be directly indicated, such as the information to be indicated itself or the index of the information to be indicated, etc. The information to be indicated may also be indirectly indicated by indicating other information, where there is an association relationship between the other information and the information to be indicated.
  • the indication of specific information can also be achieved by means of a pre-agreed (for example, protocol stipulated) arrangement order of each piece of information, thereby reducing the indication overhead to a certain extent.
  • orthogonal frequency-division multiple access OFDMA
  • single carrier frequency division multiple access single carrier FDMA
  • SC-FDMA single carrier frequency division multiple access
  • the term "system” is interchangeable with "network”.
  • the OFDMA system can implement wireless technologies such as evolved universal terrestrial radio access (E-UTRA) and ultra mobile broadband (UMB).
  • E-UTRA is an evolved version of Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS).
  • UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunications System
  • 3GPP's long term evolution (LTE) and various versions based on LTE evolution are new versions using E-UTRA.
  • 5G communication system is the next generation communication system under research.
  • the 5G communication system includes a non-standalone (NSA) 5G mobile communication system, a standalone (SA) 5G mobile communication system, or NSA's 5G mobile communication system and SA's 5G mobile communication system.
  • NSA non-standalone
  • SA standalone
  • 5G mobile communication system or SA's 5G mobile communication system and SA's 5G mobile communication system.
  • the communication system can also be adapted to future-oriented communication technologies, all of which are applicable to the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of this application.
  • the above-mentioned communication systems applicable to the present application are only examples.
  • the communication systems applicable to the present application are not limited to these and will be explained uniformly here, and will not be described in detail below.
  • the communication system includes one or more network devices 50 (Figure 5 takes the communication system including one network device 50 as an example), and each A plurality of terminal devices 60 are connected to the network device 50 . Among them, transmission among multiple terminal devices 60 can be aggregated.
  • the network device obtains the first indication information and sends the first indication information to the first terminal device.
  • the first indication information indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information received by the first terminal device is used for the first Phase calibration between end equipment and other end equipment.
  • the first terminal device receives the first indication information from the network device, receives the first SRS from the second terminal device on the time-frequency resource indicated by the first SRS resource configuration information according to the first indication information, and configures the first SRS for the first terminal device.
  • An SRS performs measurements to obtain phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the first terminal equipment and the second terminal equipment.
  • the phase difference information and/or frequency offset information are used to compensate the corresponding phase difference and/or frequency offset when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal.
  • the first indication information indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information received by the first terminal device is used for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices, so that the first terminal device can receive data from the second terminal device.
  • the first SRS of the terminal equipment and measuring the first SRS to obtain the phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the first terminal equipment and the second terminal equipment, through which the phase difference information and/or the frequency offset information can be Compensating for the phase difference caused by inconsistent phase changes and/or frequency offset changes between the first terminal device and the second terminal device when the first terminal device and the second terminal device transmit the first signal at the same time, thereby improving the performance of the first terminal device and the second terminal device to aggregate the coherence between the transmitted signals to improve the power gain of co-directional superposition of multi-channel signals.
  • the coherence of the aggregated and transmitted multi-channel signals can be improved to improve the co-directional superposition of the multi-channel signals. Power gain.
  • the terminal device 60 in the embodiment of the present application may be a device used to implement wireless communication functions, such as a terminal or a chip that can be used in a terminal.
  • the terminal can be a user equipment (UE), access terminal, terminal unit, terminal station, mobile station, mobile station, in a 5G network or a future evolved public land mobile network (PLMN).
  • UE user equipment
  • PLMN public land mobile network
  • the access terminal may be a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (WLL) station, a personal digital assistant (PDA), or a device with wireless communications Functional handheld devices, computing devices or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, vehicle-mounted devices or wearable devices, virtual reality (VR) terminal devices, augmented reality (AR) terminal devices, industrial control (industrial) Wireless terminals in control, wireless terminals in self-driving, wireless terminals in remote medical, wireless terminals in smart grid, wireless terminals in transportation safety Terminals, wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, etc.
  • the terminal device can be mobile or fixed.
  • the network device 50 in the embodiment of the present application may be a device that communicates with the terminal device 60 .
  • the network device 50 may include a transmission and reception point (TRP), a base station, a remote radio unit (RRU) of a detached base station, or a baseband unit (BBU) (also known as a digital Unit (digital unit, DU)), broadband network service gateway (broadband network gateway, BNG), aggregation switch, non-3GPP access equipment, relay station or access point, etc.
  • TRP transmission and reception point
  • RRU remote radio unit
  • BBU baseband unit
  • BNG broadband network service gateway
  • aggregation switch non-3GPP access equipment, relay station or access point, etc.
  • Figure 5 takes the network device as a base station as an example for illustration, which will be explained uniformly and will not be described again below.
  • the base station in the embodiment of the present application may be a base transceiver station (BTS) in a global system for mobile communication (GSM) or a code division multiple access (code division multiple access, CDMA) network.
  • BTS base transceiver station
  • GSM global system for mobile communication
  • CDMA code division multiple access
  • NB NodeB
  • WCDMA wideband code division multiple access
  • eNB or eNodeB evolutional NodeB
  • cloud radio access network cloud radio access network, CRAN
  • the wireless controller or the base station in the 5G communication system, or the base station in the future evolution network, etc. are not specifically limited here.
  • both the network device 50 and the terminal device 60 may be configured with multiple antennas to support MIMO technology.
  • the network device 50 and the terminal device 60 can support single-user MIMO (single-user MIMO, SU-MIMO) technology can also support multi-user MIMO (multi-user MIMO, MU-MIMO).
  • SU-MIMO single-user MIMO
  • MU-MIMO multi-user MIMO
  • MU-MIMO technology can be implemented based on space division multiple access (space division multiple access, SDMA) technology. Due to the configuration of multiple antennas, the network device 50 and the terminal device 60 can also flexibly support Single Input Single Output (SISO) technology, Single Input Multiple Output (SIMO) and Multiple Input Single Output (SIMO) technology.
  • SISO Single Input Single Output
  • SIMO Single Input Multiple Output
  • SIMO Multiple Input Single Output
  • multiple Input Single Output (MISO) technology to achieve various diversity (such as but not limited to transmit diversity and receive diversity) and multiplexing technologies
  • the diversity technology may include but is not limited to transmit diversity (TD) technology and receive diversity (receive diversity, RD) technology
  • the multiplexing technology can be spatial multiplexing (spatial multiplexing) technology.
  • the various above-mentioned technologies may also include a variety of implementation solutions.
  • transmit diversity technologies may include but are not limited to: space-time transmit diversity (STTD), space-frequency transmit diversity (SFTD). , time switched transmit diversity (TSTD), frequency switch transmit diversity (FSTD), orthogonal transmit diversity (OTD), cyclic delay diversity (CDD), etc.
  • STTD space-time transmit diversity
  • SFTD space-frequency transmit diversity
  • TSTD time switched transmit diversity
  • FSTD frequency switch transmit diversity
  • OTD orthogonal transmit diversity
  • CDD cyclic delay diversity
  • the current LTE standard adopts transmit diversity methods such as space time block coding (STBC), space frequency block coding (space frequency block coding (SFBC)) and CDD.
  • STBC space time block coding
  • SFBC space frequency block coding
  • CDD CDD
  • the network device 50 and/or the terminal device 60 in the embodiment of the present application have the function of processing baseband signals, for example, in the downlink direction, they may have coding, rate matching, scrambling, One or more functions in modulation and layer mapping; in the uplink direction, it can have decoding, rate de-matching, de-scrambling, and de-modulation ), one or more functions in channel estimation/equalization.
  • the network device 50 and/or the terminal device 60 in the embodiment of the present application have the processing function of processing intermediate frequency signals and/or radio frequency signals, and providing partial baseband signals.
  • they may have resource mapping (resource element) in the downlink direction. mapping), digital beam forming (DBF), inverse fast fourier transformation (IFFT) and cyclic prefix addition (cyclic prefix addition), analog beam forming (ABF) , one or more functions in analog to digital conversion; in the uplink direction, it can have fast fourier transformation (FFT) and cyclic prefix removal (cyclic prefix removal), analog beamforming , one or more functions in analog-to-digital conversion, digital beamforming, and resource element de-mapping.
  • resource mapping resource mapping
  • DBF digital beam forming
  • IFFT inverse fast fourier transformation
  • cyclic prefix addition cyclic prefix addition
  • analog beam forming in the uplink direction, it can have fast fourier transformation (FFT) and cyclic prefix removal (cyclic prefix removal), analog beamforming
  • the network device 50 and the terminal device 60 in the embodiment of the present application can also be called a communication device, which can be a general device or a special device, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the relevant functions of the terminal device 50 or the network device 60 in the embodiment of the present application may be implemented by one device, may be implemented by multiple devices together, or may be implemented by one or more functional modules within one device. , the embodiments of this application do not specifically limit this. It can be understood that the above functions can be either network elements in hardware devices, software functions running on dedicated hardware, or a combination of hardware and software, or instantiated on a platform (for example, a cloud platform) Virtualization capabilities.
  • FIG. 6 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 600 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 600 includes one or more processors 601, communication lines 602, and at least one communication interface (FIG. 6 is only an example of including a communication interface 604 and a processor 601 for illustration).
  • Optional may also include memory 603.
  • the processor 601 can be a general central processing unit (CPU), a microprocessor, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or one or more processors used to control the execution of the program of the present application. integrated circuit.
  • CPU central processing unit
  • ASIC application-specific integrated circuit
  • Communication line 602 may include a path for connecting between different components.
  • the communication interface 604 may be a transceiver module used to communicate with other devices or communication networks, such as Ethernet, RAN, wireless local area networks (WLAN), etc.
  • the transceiver module may be a device such as a transceiver or a transceiver.
  • the communication interface 604 may also be a transceiver circuit located within the processor 601 to implement signal input and signal output of the processor.
  • the memory 603 may be a device with a storage function. For example, it can be read-only memory (ROM) or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, random access memory (random access memory, RAM) or other types of things that can store information and instructions. Dynamic storage devices can also be electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), compact disc read-only memory (CD-ROM) or other optical disk storage, optical disc storage ( Including compressed optical discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.), magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices, or can be used to carry or store desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and can be stored by a computer. any other medium, but not limited to this.
  • the memory may exist independently and be connected to the processor through a communication line 602 . Memory can also be integrated with the processor.
  • the memory 603 is used to store computer execution instructions for executing the solution of the present application, and is controlled by the processor 601 for execution.
  • the processor 601 is configured to execute computer execution instructions stored in the memory 603, thereby implementing the phase calibration method provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the processor 601 may also perform functions related to the processing of the phase calibration method provided in the following embodiments of the present application, and the communication interface 604 is responsible for communicating with other devices or communication networks.
  • the communication interface 604 is responsible for communicating with other devices or communication networks.
  • the memory 603 in the embodiment of the present application can also be used to store information or parameters described in the following embodiments, such as first SRS resource configuration information, first indication information, codebook, and phase difference information. /or frequency offset information.
  • the phase difference information and/or frequency offset information includes phase differences and/or frequency offsets between multiple terminal devices. For example, taking a plurality of terminal devices including a first terminal device and a second terminal device, the phase difference information and/or frequency offset information includes the phase difference and/or frequency between the first terminal device and the second terminal device. Partial. Taking multiple terminal devices including a first terminal device, a second terminal device, and a third terminal device as an example, the phase difference information includes the phase difference and/or frequency between the first terminal device, the second terminal device, and the third terminal device. Partial.
  • the computer-executed instructions in the embodiments of the present application may also be called application codes, which are not specifically limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the processor 601 may include one or more CPUs, such as CPU0 and CPU1 in FIG. 6 .
  • the communication device 600 may include multiple processors, such as the processor 601 and the processor 608 in FIG. 6 .
  • processors may be a single-CPU processor or a multi-CPU processor.
  • a processor here may refer to one or more devices, circuits, and/or processing cores for processing data (eg, computer program instructions).
  • the communication device 600 may also include an output device 605 and an input device 606.
  • Output device 605 communicates with processor 601 and can display information in a variety of ways.
  • the above-mentioned communication device 600 may be a general-purpose device or a special-purpose device.
  • the communication device 600 may be a desktop computer, a portable computer, a network server, a personal digital assistant (PDA), a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a wireless terminal device, an embedded device, or a device with a similar structure as shown in FIG. 6 .
  • PDA personal digital assistant
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the type of communication device 600.
  • FIG. 7 illustrates a specific structural form of the terminal device 60 provided by the embodiment of the present application. .
  • the functions of the processor 601 in Figure 6 can be implemented by the processor 710 in Figure 7 .
  • the function of communication interface 604 in Figure 6 can be implemented through antenna 1, antenna 2, mobile communication module 750, wireless communication module 760, etc. in Figure 7.
  • antenna 1 and antenna 2 are used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals.
  • Each antenna in terminal device 60 may be used to cover a single or multiple communication frequency bands. Different antennas can also be reused to improve antenna utilization. For example: Antenna 1 can be reused as a diversity antenna for a wireless LAN. In other embodiments, antennas may be used in conjunction with tuning switches.
  • the mobile communication module 750 can provide wireless communication solutions including 2G/3G/4G/5G applied on the terminal device 60 .
  • the mobile communication module 750 may include at least one filter, switch, power amplifier, low noise amplifier (LNA), etc.
  • the mobile communication module 750 can receive electromagnetic waves from the antenna 1, perform filtering, amplification and other processing on the received electromagnetic waves, and transmit them to the modem processor for demodulation.
  • the mobile communication module 750 can also amplify the signal modulated by the modem processor and convert it into electromagnetic waves through the antenna 1 for radiation.
  • at least part of mobile communications module 750 Sub-functional modules may be provided in the processor 710.
  • at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 750 and at least part of the modules of the processor 710 may be provided in the same device.
  • the wireless communication module 760 may be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module.
  • the wireless communication module 760 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna 2 , frequency modulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signals, and sends the processed signals to the processor 710 .
  • the wireless communication module 760 can also receive the signal to be sent from the processor 710, frequency modulate it, amplify it, and convert it into electromagnetic waves through the antenna 2 for radiation.
  • the antenna 1 of the terminal device 60 is coupled to the mobile communication module 750, and the antenna 2 is coupled to the wireless communication module 760, so that the terminal device 60 can communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication technology.
  • the function of the memory 603 in Figure 6 can be implemented through the internal memory 721 in Figure 7 or an external memory (such as a Micro SD card) connected to the external memory interface 720.
  • an external memory such as a Micro SD card
  • Display 794 includes a display panel.
  • the functionality of input device 606 in FIG. 6 may be implemented through a mouse, keyboard, touch screen device, or sensor module 780 in FIG. 7 .
  • the terminal device 60 may also include an audio module 770, a camera 793, an indicator 792, a motor 791, a button 790, a SIM card interface 795, a USB interface 730, a charging management module 740,
  • the power management module 741 and the battery 742 are not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the structure shown in FIG. 7 does not constitute a specific limitation on the terminal device 60.
  • the terminal device 60 may include more or less components than shown in the figures, or combine some components, or split some components, or arrange different components.
  • the components illustrated may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
  • Figure 6 shows the communication device 600 as the network device 50 in Figure 5 and the network device 50 as a base station as an example.
  • Figure 8 shows the base station provided by the embodiment of the present application. A specific structural form of 80.
  • the base station 80 includes one or more radio frequency units (such as RRU801) and one or more BBU802.
  • the RRU 801 may be called a transceiver unit, a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, a transceiver, etc., and may include at least one antenna system (ie, antenna) 811 and a radio frequency unit 812.
  • the RRU801 is mainly used for transmitting and receiving radio frequency signals and converting radio frequency signals and baseband signals.
  • the function of the communication interface 604 in Figure 6 can be implemented through the RRU 801 in Figure 8 .
  • the BBU802 is the control center of network equipment and can also be called a processing unit. It is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions, such as channel coding, multiplexing, modulation, spread spectrum, etc.
  • the BBU 802 may be composed of one or more single boards. Multiple single boards may jointly support a wireless access network (such as an LTE network) with a single access indication, or may respectively support wireless access networks of different access standards. Access network (such as LTE network, 5G network or other networks).
  • the BBU 802 also includes a memory 821 and a processor 822.
  • the memory 821 is used to store necessary instructions and data.
  • the processor 822 is used to control the network device to perform necessary actions.
  • the memory 821 and processor 822 may serve one or more single boards. In other words, the memory and processor can be set independently on each board. It is also possible for multiple boards to share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits can also be installed on each board.
  • the function of the processor 601 in Figure 6 can be implemented by the processor 822 in Figure 8
  • the function of the memory 603 in Figure 6 can be implemented by the memory 821 in Figure 8 .
  • the RRU 801 and the BBU 802 in Figure 8 may be physically installed together or physically separated, for example, a distributed base station, which is not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the network device 50 in the embodiment of the present application may support one or more of the following: spatial multiplexing, SU-MIMO, coding, rate matching, scrambling, modulation, layer mapping, precoding, resource mapping, IFFT , DBF, or ABF and other functions.
  • the terminal device 60 in this application may support one or more of the following functions: decoding, rate dematching, descrambling, demodulation, or channel estimation/equalization.
  • phase calibration method provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described below with reference to FIG. 9 .
  • a phase calibration method provided by an embodiment of the present application includes the following steps:
  • the network device obtains the first instruction information.
  • the first indication information indicates the first SRS received by the first terminal device
  • the resource configuration information is used for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices.
  • the phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices may refer to: in the case of coherent aggregation transmission between the first terminal device and other terminal devices, the first terminal device compensates the first terminal device for transmitting signals simultaneously with other terminal devices. corresponding phase difference and/or frequency offset.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device perform aggregated transmission
  • the second terminal device is another terminal device.
  • the phase calibration between the first terminal device and the second terminal device may refer to the first terminal device compensating the corresponding phase difference and/or frequency offset when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send signals simultaneously.
  • the aggregation transmission between the first terminal device and the second terminal device may be aggregation transmission between the first terminal device and the second terminal device using CJT.
  • CJT for details, please refer to the introduction about CJT in the preamble of the specific embodiments, here. No longer.
  • the network device obtains the first indication information (step S901), which may include: the first terminal device sends capability information to the network device, and the capability information is used to indicate that the first terminal device is capable of obtaining the first terminal device.
  • the network device receives the capability information from the first terminal device, and determines the first indication information based on the capability information. That is to say, if the first terminal device has the ability to obtain phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the first terminal device and other terminal devices, the network device determines the first indication information based on the capability information of the first terminal device.
  • the network device gives up obtaining the first indication information. In this way, the network device can determine whether to send the first indication information to the first terminal device according to the capability information of the first terminal device, so as to avoid invalid signaling interactions caused by sending the first indication information that exceeds its capabilities to the first terminal device. , thereby improving the efficiency of phase calibration.
  • the capability information may be carried in the signaling of radio resource control (RRC) capability reporting.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • information elements for phase calibration capabilities can be added to the signaling reported by the RRC capability.
  • the capability information may be information on aggregated coherent transmission capabilities of the terminal devices. That is to say, when the first terminal device sends a message to the network device that the terminal device has the ability to aggregate coherent transmission, by default the first terminal device has the ability to obtain the phase difference information and/or frequency between the first terminal device and the second terminal device. The ability to bias information.
  • the capability information may be coherence time window size information.
  • the coherence time window may indicate that the terminal device can ensure power consistency and/or phase continuity within the time window, thereby enabling aggregated coherent transmission. That is to say, when the first terminal device sends information about the coherence time window size to the network device, by default the first terminal device has the ability to obtain the phase difference information and/or frequency offset between the first terminal device and the second terminal device. information capabilities.
  • the network device may obtain the first indication information when it is determined that the first terminal device and the second terminal device perform aggregated transmission. That is to say, when the first terminal device performs aggregate transmission, the protocol stipulates that the first terminal device has the ability to obtain the phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the first terminal device and other terminal devices, and then the network The device can determine the first indication information without the need for the first terminal device to send capability information.
  • the network device may obtain the first indication information when it is determined that the first terminal device and the second terminal device perform coherent aggregation.
  • coherent aggregated transmission may refer to CJT. That is to say, when the first terminal device performs CJT, the protocol stipulates that the first terminal device has the ability to specifically obtain the phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the first terminal device and other terminal devices, and then the network device The first indication information can be determined without the first terminal device sending capability information.
  • the network device sends the first instruction information to the first terminal device.
  • the first terminal device receives the first indication information from the network device.
  • the first indication information may include first SRS resource configuration information, which is used to instruct the first terminal device to receive SRS; or, the first SRS resource configuration information is used. To indicate phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device when the first terminal device and the second terminal device perform aggregated transmission, after the first terminal device receives the first SRS resource configuration information for receiving SRS, it can configure the configuration information according to the first SRS resource.
  • the configuration information receives the first SRS from the second terminal device, and measures the first SRS to obtain phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the first terminal device and the second terminal device. That is to say, in this embodiment of the present application, the first SRS resource configuration information used by the first terminal device to receive SRS may implicitly indicate that the first SRS resource configuration information is used for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices. .
  • the first SRS resource configuration information includes usage, where the usage indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information is used by the first terminal device to receive SRS.
  • the usage can be a new usage in the SRS resource configuration information. type. For example, when usage in the first SRS resource configuration information is configured as "send", the first SRS resource configuration information is used to send SRS. In the case where usage in the first SRS resource configuration information is configured as "receive”, the first SRS resource configuration information is used to receive SRS. That is to say, the first indication information may be information in which usage is configured as "receive" in the first SRS resource configuration information. This may implicitly indicate that the first SRS resource configuration information is used between the first terminal device and other terminal devices. phase calibration.
  • the usage indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information is used for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices. That is to say, since the SRS resource configuration information itself is used by the terminal device to send SRS, and when the SRS resource configuration information is used for phase calibration, it can implicitly indicate that the SRS resource configuration information is used by the terminal device to receive SRS.
  • the symbol type corresponding to the time domain resource information included in the first SRS resource configuration information is a downlink symbol. Since an OFDM symbol may include three types: downlink symbols, uplink symbols and flexible symbols, uplink symbols can only be used for uplink transmission, and downlink symbols can only be used for downlink transmission. That is to say, when the symbol type corresponding to the time domain resource information included in the first SRS resource configuration information is a downlink symbol, it can indicate that the first SRS resource configuration information is used to receive SRS, and then implicitly indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information is used for receiving SRS. Phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices.
  • the network device may send the first SRS resource configuration information to the first terminal device through a system message or RRC signaling.
  • the first terminal device may receive the first SRS resource configuration information from the network device through a system message or RRC signaling.
  • the first indication information may be used to activate the first terminal device to receive SRS on the time-frequency resource indicated by the first SRS resource configuration information.
  • the symbol type corresponding to the time domain resource information included in the first SRS resource configuration information may be a flexible symbol, and the first indication information may indicate that the flexible symbol is a downlink symbol, thereby activating the first terminal device to use the first SRS resource.
  • the first indication information instructs the first terminal device to receive SRS on the time-frequency resource indicated by the first SRS resource configuration information, and may implicitly indicate that the first SRS resource configuration information is used between the first terminal device and other terminal devices. phase calibration.
  • the signaling carrying the first indication information may include first RRC signaling, or first media access control (media access control, MAC) layer signaling, or first DCI signaling,
  • first RRC signaling or first media access control (media access control, MAC) layer signaling
  • MAC media access control
  • the first RRC signaling, the first MAC layer signaling, or the first DCI signaling may not include the first SRS resource configuration information.
  • the first indication information and the first SRS resource configuration information may be transmitted separately.
  • the first indication information can be sent together as a whole, or can be divided into multiple sub-information and sent separately, and the sending period and/or sending timing of these sub-information can be the same or different.
  • the specific sending method is not limited in this application.
  • the sending period and/or sending timing of these sub-information may be predefined, for example, based on a protocol, or may be configured by the network device by sending configuration information to the terminal device.
  • the first indication information may be sent through one message or through multiple messages, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • L1 signaling is also called first layer (layer1, L1) signaling, which can usually be represented by the physical layer
  • the control part of the frame is carried.
  • a typical example of L1 signaling is the DCI carried in the PDCCH defined in the LTE standard.
  • L1 signaling may also be carried by the data portion of the physical layer frame. It is not difficult to see that the sending cycle or signaling cycle of L1 signaling is usually the cycle of the physical layer frame. Therefore, this signaling is usually used to implement some dynamic control to transmit some frequently changing information. For example, it can be transmitted through the physical layer. The signaling transmits the first signaling in the embodiment of this application.
  • MAC layer signaling belongs to layer 2 (layer 2, L2) signaling, which can usually be carried by, for example but not limited to, a frame header of a layer 2 frame.
  • the above frame header may also carry information such as, but not limited to, source address and destination address.
  • layer 2 frames usually contain a frame body.
  • L2 signaling may also be carried by the frame body of the Layer 2 frame.
  • second-layer signaling are the signaling carried in the frame control (frame control) field in the frame header of the MAC frame in the 802.11 series of standards, or the MAC control entity (MAC-CE) defined in some communication protocols. ).
  • Layer 2 frames can usually carry the data portion of the physical layer frame.
  • RRC signaling belongs to the third layer (layer 3) signaling, which is usually some control messages.
  • L3 signaling can usually be carried in the frame body of the second layer frame. This paragraph only describes the principle description of physical layer signaling, MAC layer signaling, RRC signaling, layer 1 signaling, layer 2 signaling and layer 3 signaling. The specific details of the three signaling can be With reference to existing technology, I won’t go into details here.
  • the first SRS resource configuration information includes the time-frequency domain location of the SRS.
  • the time-frequency domain location of the SRS may be the time-frequency domain location of the SRS sent by other terminal devices to the network device.
  • the time-frequency domain location of the SRS in the first SRS resource configuration information may be the location of the first SRS sent by the second terminal device to the network device. time-frequency domain position. That is to say, the first terminal device can determine the time-frequency domain position of the first SRS sent by the second terminal device to the network device according to the time-frequency domain position of the SRS in the first SRS resource configuration information.
  • the network device may send the SRS resource configuration information about the first SRS to the second terminal device through a system message or RRC signaling.
  • the second terminal device may receive SRS resource configuration information about the first SRS from the network device through a system message or RRC signaling.
  • the SRS resource configuration information about the first SRS may include one or more SRS resource sets.
  • An SRS resource set may include one or more SRS resources.
  • One or more SRS resources are used by the second terminal device to send one or more SRS.
  • the one or more SRSs may include a first SRS.
  • the second terminal device may send the first SRS according to the SRS resource configuration information about the first SRS from the network device.
  • the network device may send the SRS resource configuration information about the first SRS to the second terminal device before or after sending the first indication information to the first terminal device (step S902).
  • This application implements The example does not specifically limit this.
  • the second terminal device sends the first SRS.
  • the first terminal device receives the first SRS from the second terminal device on the time-frequency resource indicated by the first SRS resource configuration information according to the first indication information.
  • the second terminal device may also send the first SRS to the network device.
  • the network device receives the first SRS from the second terminal device.
  • the network device may perform CSI measurement based on the first SRS to obtain the CSI corresponding to the moment when the second terminal device sends the first SRS.
  • the first terminal device measures the first SRS to obtain phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • the phase difference information and/or frequency offset information are used to compensate the corresponding phase difference and/or frequency offset when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal.
  • the first signal is a signal used to simultaneously send cooperation data when the first terminal device and the second terminal device perform coherent aggregation transmission.
  • the data or TB carried by the first signal sent by the first terminal device may be the same as the data or TB carried by the first signal sent by the second terminal device.
  • the relevant descriptions in “Cooperative Transmission” will not be repeated here.
  • the first terminal device may send collaboration data to the second terminal device.
  • the second terminal device receives the collaboration data from the first terminal device.
  • the first terminal device may be called SUE, and the second terminal device may be called CUE.
  • the second terminal device sends collaboration data to the first terminal device.
  • the first terminal device receives collaboration data from the second terminal device.
  • the first terminal device may be called CUE
  • the second terminal device may be called SUE.
  • coherent aggregation transmission can be divided into two methods according to whether the precoding matrix at the CSI measurement time compensates for the phase difference and/or frequency offset.
  • the "first moment” and the "second moment” involved in coherent aggregation transmission are first introduced.
  • the first time is the CSI measurement time determined by the first terminal device
  • the second time is the time when the first terminal device sends the first signal to the network device.
  • the CSI measurement time may refer to the time when the reference signal for CSI measurement is sent.
  • the reference signal may be an SRS used for uplink channel measurement in a codebook transmission mode, or may be a CSI-RS used for downlink channel measurement in a non-codebook transmission mode.
  • the first terminal device may determine according to the usage in the SRS resource configuration information to use the codebook transmission method to send the first signal, or to use the non-codebook transmission method to send the first signal.
  • the usage in the SRS configuration information is configured as "codebook"
  • the SRS resource configuration is used to obtain the uplink channel information of the codebook transmission scheme.
  • the SRS resource configuration information is used to obtain uplink channel information for the non-codebook transmission scheme; or, A terminal device may also determine whether to use the codebook transmission mode to send the first signal through the high-level parameter txconfig, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • coherent aggregation transmission can be performed in the following two ways.
  • Coherent aggregation transmission method 1 The precoding matrix determined at the first moment has compensated for the phase difference and/or frequency offset between the first terminal device and the second terminal device at the first moment (for example, the precoding matrix determined jointly in CJT matrix), compensate the phase difference and/or frequency offset between the first terminal device and the second terminal device between the second time and the first time.
  • the corresponding phase difference when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal includes the difference between the first phase difference and the second phase difference.
  • the first phase difference is the phase difference between the first terminal device and the second terminal device at the first time
  • the second phase difference is the phase difference between the first terminal device and the second terminal device at the second time. That is to say, the first terminal device uses the phase difference information and/or the frequency offset information to compensate the difference between the first phase difference and the second phase difference when the first terminal device sends the first signal.
  • the first terminal device has compensated for the first phase difference when sending the first signal using the precoding matrix determined at the first moment.
  • the second phase difference is different from the first phase difference, and the first terminal device needs to compensate the difference between the first phase difference and the second phase difference according to the phase difference information and/or the frequency offset information. For example, assume that the first phase difference is 10° at the first moment and the second phase difference is 30° at the second moment. Since the precoding matrix determined at the first moment has compensated for the phase difference of 10°, therefore The first terminal equipment also needs to compensate for the phase difference of 20°.
  • the corresponding frequency offset when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal includes a difference between the first frequency offset and the second frequency offset.
  • the first frequency offset is the frequency offset between the first terminal device and the second terminal device at the first time
  • the second frequency offset is the frequency offset between the first terminal device and the second terminal device at the second time.
  • the second frequency offset is different from the first frequency offset
  • the first terminal device needs to compensate the first frequency offset and the second frequency offset according to the frequency offset information.
  • the difference between deviations For example, assume that the phase difference caused by the first frequency offset is 10° at the first moment, and the phase difference caused by the second frequency offset at the second moment is 30°. Since the precoding matrix determined at the first moment has To compensate for the phase difference of 10°, the first terminal device also needs to compensate for the phase difference of 20°.
  • Coherent aggregation transmission method 2 When the precoding matrix determined at the first moment does not compensate for the phase difference and/or frequency offset between the first terminal device and the second terminal device at the first moment, compensate the first terminal device and the second terminal device. The phase difference and/or frequency offset between the second terminal devices at the second moment.
  • the corresponding phase difference when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal includes a second phase difference.
  • the first terminal device does not compensate for the first phase difference when sending the first signal using the precoding matrix determined at the first moment, and the first terminal device only needs to calculate the signal according to the phase difference information and/or Or the frequency offset information compensates for the second phase difference.
  • the first phase difference is 10° at the first moment and the second phase difference is 30° at the second moment. Since the precoding matrix determined at the first moment does not compensate for the phase difference of 10°, the second phase difference is 10°. A terminal device needs to compensate for a phase difference of 30°.
  • “moment” corresponds to the time domain resource of the signal, or corresponds to the first symbol or the last symbol in the time domain resource of the signal.
  • the first moment may be the first symbol corresponding to the time domain resource of the SRS sent by the terminal device for CSI measurement; or, in the non-codebook transmission mode, the first moment may be It is the first symbol corresponding to the time domain resource of the CSI-RS sent by the network device.
  • the second moment may be the first symbol of the time domain resource that transmits the first signal.
  • the first moment is related to CSI measurement, and CSI measurement can be divided into measurement of SRS in codebook transmission mode and measurement of CSI-RS in non-codebook transmission mode, the following is based on the transmission time of SRS and the transmission of CSI-RS.
  • the first moment is related to CSI measurement, and CSI measurement can be divided into measurement of SRS in codebook transmission mode and measurement of CSI-RS in non-codebook transmission mode, the following is based on the transmission time of SRS and the transmission of CSI-RS.
  • the first moment is related to CSI measurement, and CSI measurement can be divided into measurement of SRS in codebook transmission mode and measurement of CSI-RS in non-codebook transmission mode, the following is based on the transmission time of SRS and the transmission of CSI-RS.
  • the first moment is related to CSI measurement, and CSI measurement can be divided into measurement of SRS in codebook transmission mode and measurement of CSI-RS in non-codebook transmission mode, the following is based on the transmission time of SRS and the transmission of
  • the CSI measurement time determined by the first terminal device is when the first terminal device sends the second SRS to the network device.
  • the second SRS is used for CSI measurement of the uplink channel.
  • the CSI measurement time determined by the first terminal device is when the second terminal device sends the third SRS to the network device. time, wherein the time when the second terminal device sends the third SRS to the network device is indicated to the first terminal device by the network device, and the third SRS is used for CSI measurement of the uplink channel.
  • the time at which the first terminal device sends the second SRS may be earlier than the time at which the second terminal device sends the third SRS.
  • the time at which the first terminal device sends the second SRS may be later than the time at which the second terminal device sends the third SRS.
  • the first terminal device may select the maximum value or the minimum value between the two as the CSI measurement time, The embodiments of the present application do not specifically limit this.
  • the first time is when the first terminal device sends At the time of the second SRS, the second SRS is used for CSI measurement of the uplink channel; or, the first time is the time when the second terminal device sends the third SRS, and the third SRS is used for CSI measurement of the uplink channel.
  • the time when the second terminal device sends the third SRS may be before or after the time when the second terminal device sends the first SRS; or the third SRS may be the first SRS; or the first terminal device sends the second SRS.
  • the time of the SRS may be before or after the time when the second terminal device sends the first SRS, which is not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the second terminal device may send one or more SRSs to the network device before or after sending the first SRS to the network device; or, the second terminal device may send the first SRS to the network device.
  • the SRS has not been sent to the network device before, and the embodiment of this application does not specifically limit this.
  • the third SRS may be the first SRS. That is to say, the CSI measurement time determined by the first terminal device is the time when the third SRS is sent.
  • the CSI measurement time determined by the first terminal device is when the first terminal device receives the CSI from the network device. -RS moment. That is to say, in the case where the first terminal device determines to use non-codebook transmission to send the first signal, the first time is the time when the first terminal device receives the CSI-RS from the network device.
  • the time when the first terminal device receives the CSI-RS from the network device may be before or after the second terminal device sends the first SRS, which is not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • phase difference information The phase difference information, frequency offset information, and calculation method used in the implementation of this application are introduced below.
  • the phase difference information between the first terminal device and the second terminal device includes the phase difference between the first terminal device and the second terminal device obtained by the first terminal device measuring the first SRS.
  • the phase difference includes the phase difference caused by the frequency offset between the first terminal device and the second terminal and the phase difference caused by other factors.
  • Frequency Offset in the preamble of the specific implementation. Description will not be repeated here.
  • the frequency offset information between the first terminal device and the second terminal device includes the frequency offset between the first terminal device and the second terminal device obtained by the first terminal device measuring the first SRS. .
  • the second terminal device may send the first SRS at multiple times.
  • the first terminal device can receive the first SRS from the second terminal device at multiple times, and measure the first SRS at the multiple times to obtain the relationship between the first terminal device and the second terminal device corresponding to different times. phase difference and/or frequency offset between them.
  • the phase difference information between the first terminal device and the second terminal device may include the phase difference between the first terminal device and the second terminal device corresponding to different sending times of the first SRS.
  • the frequency offset information between the first terminal device and the second terminal device includes the frequency offset between the first terminal device and the second terminal device corresponding to different sending times of the first SRS.
  • the phase difference information between includes the phase difference between the first terminal device and the second terminal device corresponding to the third moment, which is ⁇ c_s (t3), and the phase difference between the first terminal device and the second terminal device corresponding to the fourth moment.
  • the difference is ⁇ c_s (t4), and the frequency offset between the first terminal device and the second terminal device between the third time and the fourth time is ⁇ f c_s .
  • t3 represents the third moment
  • t4 represents the fourth moment.
  • ⁇ f c_s , ⁇ c_s (t 3 ), and ⁇ c_s (t 4 ) can be obtained in the following manner.
  • the specific methods are as follows:
  • the first terminal device uses channel estimation (such as SVD) based on receiving the first SRS from the second terminal device at times t3 and t4 .
  • the total phase ⁇ c_s (t 3 ) at time t 3 and the total phase ⁇ c_s (t 4 ) at time t 4 are obtained.
  • ⁇ c_s (t 3 ) can be expressed by formula (9)
  • ⁇ c_s (t 4 ) can be expressed by formula (10)
  • ⁇ c_s (t 3 ) and ⁇ c_s (t 4 ) are known quantities.
  • ⁇ f c_s can be obtained by subtracting formula (9) and formula (10) simultaneously, and ⁇ f c_s can be calculated from formula (11).
  • ⁇ f c_s ( ⁇ c_s (t 4 )- ⁇ c_s (t 3 ))/(2 ⁇ (t 4 -t 3 )))
  • ⁇ c_s (t 3 ) can be calculated.
  • ⁇ c_s (t 4 ) can be calculated according to formula (12).
  • ⁇ c_s (t 4 ) 2 ⁇ ( ⁇ f c_s ⁇ (t 4 -t 3 ))+ ⁇ c_s (t 3 )
  • 2 ⁇ ( ⁇ f c_s ⁇ (t 4 -t 3 )) represents the corresponding phase between the fourth time and the third time caused by the frequency offset between the first terminal device and the second terminal device. Difference.
  • the fourth moment may be earlier than the second moment, and the first moment may be earlier than the third moment.
  • the third moment may be equal to the first moment; or the first moment and the fourth moment may be the same; or the first moment may be after the fourth moment, which is not specifically limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the first terminal device may determine the phase difference between the first terminal device and the second terminal device corresponding to the two different times based on the first SRS received at two different times. and/or frequency offset, and based on the phase difference and/or frequency offset between the first terminal equipment and the second terminal equipment corresponding to the two different times, it is estimated that the first terminal equipment and the second terminal equipment send the first signal corresponding phase difference.
  • the following describes the method in which the first terminal device estimates the corresponding phase difference when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal in conjunction with the third moment and the fourth moment shown in FIG. 10 .
  • the first terminal device can estimate the corresponding phase difference when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal according to formula (13).
  • ⁇ c_s (t 2 ) 2 ⁇ ( ⁇ f c_s ⁇ (t 2 -t 4 ))+ ⁇ c_s (t 4 )
  • t 2 represents the second time
  • ⁇ c_s (t 2 ) represents the corresponding phase difference when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal
  • 2 ⁇ ( ⁇ f c_s ⁇ (t 2 +t 4 )) represents the corresponding phase difference between the second time and the fourth time caused by the frequency offset between the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • ⁇ c_s (t 4 ) can be determined by formula (12).
  • Formula (14) can be obtained from formula (13) and formula (12).
  • formula (14) can be used in coherent aggregation transmission mode 2 to compensate for the corresponding phase difference when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal.
  • t 1 represents the first time
  • 2 ⁇ ( ⁇ f c_s ⁇ (t 2 -t 1 )) represents the relationship between the first terminal device and the second terminal device corresponding to the second time and the first time. The phase difference caused by the frequency offset between.
  • the first time represented by t 1 is the time when the SRS is sent (for example, the first The second SRS sent by the terminal device, or the third SRS sent by the second terminal device).
  • the first time indicated by t 1 is the time when the network device sends the CSI-RS.
  • ⁇ c_s (t 2 ) in Formula (14) or Formula (15) can be calculated through the phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the first terminal device and the second terminal device, that is, the first terminal device can be compensated.
  • the corresponding phase difference and/or frequency offset when a terminal device and a second terminal device send the first signal.
  • the first indication information indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information received by the first terminal device is used for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices, so that the first terminal device can receive data from the second terminal device.
  • the first SRS of the terminal equipment and measuring the first SRS to obtain the phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the first terminal equipment and the second terminal equipment, through which the phase difference information and/or the frequency offset information can be Compensating for the phase difference caused by inconsistent phase changes and/or frequency offset changes between the first terminal device and the second terminal device when the first terminal device and the second terminal device transmit the first signal at the same time, thereby improving the performance of the first terminal device and the second terminal device to aggregate the coherence between the transmitted signals to improve the power gain of co-directional superposition of multi-channel signals.
  • the coherence of the aggregated and transmitted multi-channel signals can be improved to improve the co-directional superposition of the multi-channel signals. Power gain.
  • the actions of the network device in the above steps S901 to S904 can be executed by the processor 601 in the communication device 600 shown in FIG. 6 by calling the application code stored in the memory 603 to instruct the network device to execute.
  • the action of the first terminal device can be executed by the processor 601 in the communication device 600 shown in FIG. 6 by calling the application code stored in the memory 603 to instruct the first terminal device.
  • the network device before the network device sends the first indication information to the first terminal device (step S902), it also includes:
  • the network device sends third indication information to the first terminal device.
  • the first terminal device receives the third indication information from the network device.
  • the third indication information indicates that the M pieces of SRS resource configuration information received by the first terminal device are candidate SRS resource configuration information for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices, and M is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • the first indication information is also used to indicate that the N pieces of SRS resource configuration information among the M pieces of SRS resource configuration information are the first SRS resource configuration information, and N is a positive integer less than or equal to M. That is to say, the first terminal device can obtain multiple SRS resources for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices according to the third indication information, and then the first terminal device can receive signals on multiple time-frequency resources. Multiple different SRSs are used for phase calibration, thereby improving the efficiency of phase calibration.
  • the SRS resource configuration information for which the M pieces of SRS resource configuration information are candidates may mean that the first terminal device receives the triggering signaling of one or more SRS resource configuration information among the M pieces of SRS resource configuration information. , the first terminal device performs phase calibration according to the one or more SRS resource configuration information. That is to say, the first indication information can be used to trigger N pieces of SRS resource configuration information among the M pieces of SRS resource configuration information, so that the first terminal device performs phase calibration according to the N pieces of SRS resource configuration information.
  • the third indication information may be high-layer signaling, such as RRC signaling.
  • the third indication information may include the M pieces of SRS resource configuration information; or the third indication information may include index information of the M pieces of SRS resource configuration information.
  • the first indication information may be MAC layer signaling or DCI signaling, which is not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • step S904 after the first terminal device measures the first SRS to obtain phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the first terminal device and the second terminal device (step S904), include:
  • the first terminal device compensates the corresponding phase difference and/or frequency offset when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal according to the phase difference information and/or the frequency offset information, and sends the compensated first signal to the network device.
  • the second terminal device sends the first signal to the network device.
  • the network device receives the compensated first signal from the first terminal device and receives the first signal from the second terminal device.
  • the first terminal device compensates the first signal according to the phase difference information and/or the frequency offset information.
  • the compensated first signal A signal can be expressed as e -j ⁇ Vx 1 or e j ⁇ Vx 1 .
  • the precoding matrix is indicated by the network device, and the precoding matrix is the precoding matrix corresponding to the first moment.
  • the implementation of the network device indicating the precoding matrix may include: when the first terminal device uses the codebook transmission mode to send the first signal, the network device indicates the precoding matrix through TPMI; or, when the first terminal device is not codebook When the first signal is sent in the transmission mode, the network device indicates the precoding matrix through the SRI.
  • the network device indicates the precoding matrix through the SRI.
  • the second terminal device when the first terminal device compensates the corresponding phase difference and/or frequency offset when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal according to the phase difference information and/or the frequency offset information, the second terminal device There is no need to compensate the first signal.
  • the precoding matrix corresponding to the first moment may refer to the precoding matrix determined by the network device based on the CSI measurement based on the SRS sent by the terminal device.
  • the precoding moment corresponding to the first moment The matrix may refer to a precoding matrix determined by CSI measurement performed by the terminal device based on the CSI-RS sent by the network device.
  • phase calibration method provided by the embodiment of the present application can be applied to the following four scenarios.
  • the first terminal device needs to send the SRS for channel measurement to the network device before receiving the first SRS (step S903), or between step S903 and the first terminal device sending the compensated first signal.
  • the network device may perform channel measurement based on the SRSs sent by the first terminal device and the second terminal device respectively, jointly determine the precoding matrices corresponding to the first terminal device and the second terminal device at the first time, and provide the information to the first terminal device.
  • the terminal device sends uplink scheduling permission information.
  • the network device indicates the precoding matrix corresponding to the first terminal device through the TPMI in the uplink scheduling grant information, and then the first terminal device can send the compensated first signal.
  • Scenario 2 Using codebook transmission and coherent aggregation transmission method 2
  • Scenario 2 is similar to scenario 1.
  • the network device performs channel measurement based on the SRS sent by the first terminal device and the second terminal device respectively, and independently determines the corresponding SRS of the first terminal device and the second terminal device at the first moment.
  • precoding matrix wherein, the precoding matrix corresponding to the first terminal device and the precoding matrix corresponding to the second terminal device are independently determined, and the first phase difference and/or the first frequency offset caused by the first terminal device and the second terminal device are not compensated. phase difference.
  • Scenario 3 Using non-codebook transmission and coherent aggregation transmission method 2
  • the network device needs to send CSI-RS to the first terminal device and the second terminal device respectively.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device respectively receive the CSI-RS from the network device, and according to the non-codebook transmission process, respectively send the SRS precoded by the precoding matrix to the network device to obtain their corresponding precoding.
  • Vector for details, please refer to the relevant description of "7.2. Non-codebook transmission" in the preamble of the specific implementation.
  • the network device may send the CSI-RS to the first terminal device and the second terminal device before step S903, or between step S903 and the first terminal device sending the compensated first signal.
  • Scenario 4 Using non-codebook transmission and coherent aggregation transmission method 1
  • Scenario 4 is similar to scenario 3, except that the first terminal device and the second terminal device need to share channel information to jointly determine the precoding matrix.
  • phase calibration method provided by the embodiment of the present application further includes the following steps after step S904:
  • Step S905 The network device sends third instruction information to the second terminal device.
  • the second terminal device receives the third indication information from the network device.
  • the third instruction information is used to instruct the second terminal device to send the first channel information to the first terminal device.
  • the first channel information includes a channel matrix obtained by measuring CSI-RS by the second terminal device.
  • the first channel matrix is a channel matrix of a downlink channel between the second terminal device and the network device.
  • the second terminal device may receive the CSI-RS from the network device and measure the CSI-RS to obtain the first channel information.
  • the first channel information includes a first channel matrix obtained by measuring CSI-RS by the second terminal device.
  • the second terminal device can receive the CSI-RS from the network device through the CSI-RS resource configuration information configured by high-layer signaling.
  • the third indication information includes first resource configuration information for transmitting information between the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • the resource configuration information includes time-frequency resources, modulation mode, code rate, or RV.
  • the third indication information also includes second resource configuration information, and the second resource configuration information is used to instruct the second terminal device to send the first channel information to the first terminal device at a granularity.
  • the granularity of the first channel information refers to the granularity of frequency domain resources corresponding to the channel matrix obtained by measuring the CSI-RS by the second terminal device.
  • the granularity of frequency domain resources can be configured as broadband (ie, the entire bandwidth), subbands, and subcarriers. It can be understood that when the granularity of the frequency domain resources corresponding to the channel matrix is configured as wideband, the first channel information includes a channel matrix corresponding to the entire bandwidth.
  • the first channel information may include the channel matrix corresponding to each subband in the entire bandwidth.
  • the first channel information may include the channel matrix corresponding to each subcarrier in the entire bandwidth.
  • the network device sends the second instruction information to the first terminal device.
  • the first terminal device receives the message from the network device Second instruction information for the device.
  • the second instruction information is used to instruct the first terminal device to send the first precoding matrix to the second terminal device.
  • the first precoding matrix is a precoding matrix corresponding to the first moment when the first terminal device determines to use a non-codebook transmission method to send the first signal.
  • the second indication information may also include third resource configuration information and fourth resource configuration information.
  • the third resource configuration information is similar to the first resource configuration information and is used for transmission resource configuration between the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • the fourth resource configuration information is similar to the second resource configuration information and is used to indicate the granularity of the frequency domain resources corresponding to the channel matrix.
  • step S905 may be executed first, and then step S906 may be executed; step S906 may be executed first, and then step S905 may be executed; or step S905 may be executed first, and then step S905 may be executed.
  • step S905 and step S906 are executed at the same time, and this is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the second terminal device sends the first channel information to the first terminal device according to the third instruction information.
  • the first terminal device receives the first channel information from the second terminal device. That is to say, by sending the first channel information to the first terminal device, the second terminal device can share the channel matrix of the downlink channel between the second terminal device and the network device between the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • the first terminal device determines the first precoding matrix according to the first channel information and the second channel information obtained by measuring the CSI-RS by the first terminal device.
  • the first terminal device may receive the CSI-RS from the network device, and measure the CSI-RS to obtain the second channel information.
  • the second channel information may include a second channel matrix, and the second channel matrix is a channel matrix of a downlink channel between the first terminal device and the network device.
  • the first terminal device may combine the first channel matrix and the second channel matrix to jointly determine the first precoding matrix in a CJT manner.
  • the first precoding matrix includes a precoding matrix corresponding to the first terminal device and a precoding matrix corresponding to the second terminal device.
  • a terminal device determines the first precoding matrix according to the first channel information and the second channel information obtained by measuring the CSI-RS by the first terminal device (step S908), including: the first terminal device determines the first precoding matrix according to the phase difference information and/or frequency The bias information, the first channel information and the second channel information determine the first precoding matrix. That is to say, when determining the first precoding matrix, the first terminal device may compensate the phase difference information and/or frequency offset information obtained in step S903 in the first precoding matrix.
  • the first terminal device compensates the phase difference information and/or frequency offset information on the second channel matrix, and based on the first channel matrix in the first channel information and the compensated second The channel matrix determines the compensated first precoding matrix.
  • the first terminal device determines the first precoding matrix according to the first channel information and the second channel information, and compensates the first terminal device in the first precoding matrix with the phase difference information and/or frequency offset information. on the corresponding precoding matrix.
  • the first precoding matrix includes a precoding matrix V 1 corresponding to the first terminal device and a precoding matrix V 2 corresponding to the second terminal device.
  • the first terminal device sends the first precoding matrix to the second terminal device according to the second instruction information.
  • the second terminal device receives the first precoding matrix from the first terminal device. That is to say, the first terminal device sends the first precoding matrix to the second terminal device, so that the first terminal device and the second terminal device can share the first precoding matrix.
  • the SRS can be precoded according to the corresponding precoding matrix, and the precoded SRS can be sent to the network device, and then the network The device indicates the corresponding precoding vectors of the first terminal device and the second terminal device by sending respective corresponding SRIs to the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • the relevant instructions for "non-codebook transmission" will not be repeated here.
  • steps S905 to S909 may also be executed before step S903.
  • step S909 it also includes:
  • the first terminal device precodes the first signal according to the precoding matrix corresponding to the first terminal device in the first precoding matrix, and according to the phase difference information between the first terminal device and the second terminal device and/or The frequency offset information is applied to the first signal compensation, and sends the precoded and compensated first signal to the network device.
  • the network device receives the precoded and compensated first signal from the first terminal device.
  • the first terminal device may not need to perform phase compensation according to the phase difference between the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • the first signal is compensated by the information and/or the frequency offset information.
  • the second terminal device precodes the first signal according to the precoding matrix corresponding to the second terminal device in the first precoding matrix, and sends the precoded first signal to the network device.
  • the network device receives the first signal from the second terminal device.
  • the first terminal device can receive the first SRS resource configuration information from the second terminal device.
  • the coherence of the aggregated and transmitted multi-channel signals can be improved to improve the co-directional superposition of the multi-channel signals. Power gain.
  • the actions of the network device in the above steps S901 to S911 can be executed by the processor 601 in the communication device 600 shown in FIG. 6 by calling the application code stored in the memory 603 to instruct the network device to execute.
  • the action of the first terminal device can be executed by the processor 601 in the communication device 600 shown in FIG. 6 by calling the application code stored in the memory 603 to instruct the first terminal device.
  • the above solution only takes the aggregation transmission of the first terminal device and the second terminal device as an example to illustrate the phase calibration method of the present application.
  • the above solution is also applicable to the scenario where three or more terminal devices perform aggregation transmission.
  • the first terminal device receives indication information from the network device, and the indication information indicates the third terminal device received by the first terminal device.
  • An SRS resource configuration information is used for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices; and the second terminal device receives indication information from the network device, the indication information is used to indicate the second SRS resource received by the second terminal device.
  • the configuration information is used for phase calibration between the second terminal equipment and other terminal equipment; and the third terminal equipment receives indication information from the network equipment, the indication information indicates that the third SRS resource configuration information received by the third terminal equipment is used for the third Phase calibration between the terminal equipment and other terminal equipment, and then the first terminal equipment, the second terminal equipment, or the third terminal equipment respectively receive their respective SRS, and measure and obtain the relationship between the first terminal equipment, the second terminal equipment, and the third terminal equipment.
  • phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the first terminal equipment, the second terminal equipment and the third terminal equipment are used to compensate the phase between the first terminal equipment, the second terminal equipment and the third terminal equipment. difference and/or frequency offset.
  • the methods and/or steps implemented by the network device can also be implemented by components (such as chips or circuits) that can be used in the network device; the methods and/or steps implemented by the terminal device, It can also be implemented by components (such as chips or circuits) that can be used in terminal devices.
  • embodiments of the present application also provide a communication device, which is used to implement the above various methods.
  • the communication device may be the terminal device in the above method embodiment, or a device including the above terminal device, or a component that can be used in the terminal device; or the communication device may be a network device in the above method embodiment, or include the above It can be understood that the device of a network device, or a component that can be used in a network device, is that in order to implement the above functions, the communication device includes corresponding hardware structures and/or software modules that perform each function.
  • Embodiments of the present application can divide the communication device into functional modules according to the above method embodiments.
  • each functional module can be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions can be integrated into one processing module.
  • the above integration The modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or software function modules. It should be understood that the division of modules in the embodiment of the present application is schematic and is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • FIG. 12 shows a schematic structural diagram of the first terminal device 120.
  • the first terminal device 120 includes a transceiver module 1201 and a processing module 1202.
  • the transceiver module 1201 which may also be called a transceiver unit, is used to implement the transceiver function.
  • it may be a transceiver circuit, a transceiver, a transceiver, or a communication interface.
  • the transceiver module 1201 is used to receive first indication information from the network device.
  • the first indication information is used to instruct the first terminal device to receive the first SRS resource configuration information for use between the first terminal device and other terminal devices.
  • phase calibration is used to instruct the first terminal device to receive the first SRS resource configuration information for use between the first terminal device and other terminal devices.
  • phase calibration is used to instruct the first terminal device to receive the first SRS resource configuration information for use between the first terminal device and other terminal devices.
  • phase calibration the transceiver module 1201 is also configured to receive the first SRS from the second terminal device on the time-frequency resource indicated by the first SRS resource configuration information according to the first indication information
  • the processing module 1202 is configured to perform the first SRS Measurement is performed to obtain phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • the phase difference information and/or frequency offset information are used to compensate the corresponding phase difference and/or frequency offset when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal.
  • the corresponding phase difference and/or frequency offset when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal include the difference between the first phase difference and the second phase difference
  • the first phase difference is The phase difference between the first terminal device and the second terminal device at the first time
  • the second phase difference is the phase difference between the first terminal device and the second terminal device at the second time.
  • the first time is the CSI measurement time determined by the first terminal device
  • the second time is the time when the first terminal device sends the first signal to the network device.
  • the corresponding frequency offset when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal includes a difference between the first frequency offset and the second frequency offset.
  • the first frequency offset is the frequency offset between the first terminal device and the second terminal device at the first time
  • the second frequency offset is the frequency offset between the first terminal device and the second terminal device at the second time.
  • the first time is the CSI measurement time determined by the first terminal device
  • the second time is the time when the first terminal device sends the first signal to the network device.
  • the first indication information includes first SRS resource configuration information, and the first SRS resource configuration information includes usage.
  • usage indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information is used for the first terminal device to receive SRS; or usage indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information is used for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices.
  • the first indication information includes first SRS resource configuration information, and the symbol type corresponding to the time domain resource information included in the first SRS resource configuration information is a downlink symbol.
  • the CSI measurement time determined by the first terminal device is the time when the first terminal device receives the CSI-RS from the network device.
  • the transceiver module 1201 is also configured to receive second indication information from the network device.
  • the second indication information is used to instruct the first terminal device to send the first precoding matrix to the second terminal device.
  • the first The precoding matrix is the precoding matrix corresponding to the first moment when the first terminal device determines to use a non-codebook transmission method to send the first signal;
  • the transceiver module 1201 is also used to receive the first channel information from the second terminal device,
  • the first channel information includes a channel matrix obtained by measuring the CSI-RS by the second terminal device;
  • the processing module 1202 is also used to obtain the second channel information based on the first channel information and the first terminal device by measuring the CSI-RS. Determine the first precoding matrix;
  • the transceiving module 1201 is also used to send the first precoding matrix to the second terminal device.
  • the CSI measurement time determined by the first terminal device is the time when the first terminal device sends the second SRS to the network device.
  • the second SRS is used for CSI measurement of the uplink channel; or, the CSI measurement time determined by the first terminal device is the time when the second terminal device sends the third SRS to the network device.
  • the time when the second terminal device sends the third SRS to the network device is instructed by the network device to the first terminal device, and the third SRS is used for CSI measurement of the uplink channel.
  • the transceiver module 1201 is also configured to send capability information to the network device before receiving the first indication information from the network device.
  • the capability information is used to indicate that the first terminal device is capable of obtaining the first terminal device and the third terminal device. Capability of phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between two terminal devices.
  • the transceiving module 1201 is also configured to receive third indication information from the network device before receiving the first indication information from the network device.
  • the third indication information indicates that the M pieces of SRS resource configuration information received by the first terminal device are candidate SRS resource configuration information for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices, and M is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • the first indication information is also used to indicate that the N pieces of SRS resource configuration information among the M pieces of SRS resource configuration information are the first SRS resource configuration information, and N is a positive integer less than or equal to M.
  • the first terminal device 120 is presented in the form of dividing various functional modules in an integrated manner.
  • a “module” here may refer to a specific ASIC, circuit, processor and memory that executes one or more software or firmware programs, integrated logic circuits, and/or other devices that may provide the above functions.
  • the first terminal device 120 may take the form of the communication device 600 shown in FIG. 6 .
  • the processor 601 in the communication device 600 shown in FIG. 6 can cause the communication device 600 to execute the phase calibration method in the above method embodiment by calling the computer execution instructions stored in the memory 603.
  • the functions/implementation processes of the transceiver module 1201 and the processing module 1202 in Figure 12 can be implemented by the processor 601 in the communication device 600 shown in Figure 6 calling the computer execution instructions stored in the memory 603.
  • the function/implementation process of the processing module 1202 in Figure 12 can be realized by the processor 601 in the communication device 600 shown in Figure 6 calling the computer execution instructions stored in the memory 603.
  • the function of the transceiver module 1201 in Figure 12 /The implementation process can be implemented through the communication interface 604 in the communication device 600 shown in FIG. 6 .
  • the first terminal device 120 provided by the embodiment of the present application can perform the above-mentioned phase calibration method, the technical effect it can obtain can be referred to the above-mentioned method embodiment, which will not be described again here.
  • FIG. 13 shows a schematic structural diagram of a network device 130.
  • the network device 130 includes a transceiver module 1301 and a processing module 1302.
  • the transceiver module 1301 which may also be called a transceiver unit, is used to implement the transceiver function.
  • it may be a transceiver circuit, a transceiver, a transceiver, or a communication interface.
  • the processing module 1302 is used to obtain the first indication information, which indicates that the first SRS source configuration information received by the first terminal device is used for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices; the transceiver module 1301, used to send first indication information to the first terminal device.
  • the first indication information includes first SRS resource configuration information, and the first SRS resource configuration information includes usage.
  • usage indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information is used for the first terminal device to receive SRS; or usage indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information is used for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices.
  • the first indication information includes first SRS resource configuration information, and the symbol type corresponding to the time domain resource information included in the first SRS resource configuration information is a downlink symbol.
  • the transceiver module 1301 is also configured to send second indication information to the first terminal device.
  • the second indication information is used to instruct the first terminal device to send the first precoding matrix to the second terminal device.
  • a precoding matrix is a precoding matrix corresponding to the first time when the first terminal device determines to use a non-codebook transmission method to send the first signal.
  • the first time is when the first terminal device receives the CSI-RS from the network device. time.
  • the processing module 1302 is used to obtain the first indication information including: receiving capability information from the first terminal device through the transceiver module 1301.
  • the capability information is used to indicate that the first terminal device is capable of obtaining the first terminal device and the first terminal device.
  • the capability of the phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the two terminal devices; the first indication information is determined based on the capability information.
  • the transceiving module 1301 is also configured to send third indication information to the first terminal device before sending the first indication information to the first terminal device.
  • the third indication information indicates that the M pieces of SRS resource configuration information received by the first terminal device are candidate SRS resource configuration information for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices, and M is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • the first indication information is also used to indicate that the N pieces of SRS resource configuration information among the M pieces of SRS resource configuration information are the first SRS resource configuration information, and N is a positive integer less than or equal to M.
  • the network device 130 is presented in the form of dividing various functional modules in an integrated manner.
  • a “module” here may refer to a specific ASIC, circuit, processor and memory that executes one or more software or firmware programs, integrated logic circuits, and/or other devices that may provide the above functions.
  • the network device 130 may take the form of the communication device 600 shown in FIG. 6 .
  • the processor 601 in the communication device 600 shown in FIG. 6 can cause the communication device 600 to execute the phase calibration method in the above method embodiment by calling the computer execution instructions stored in the memory 603.
  • the functions/implementation processes of the transceiver module 1301 and the processing module 1302 in Figure 13 can be implemented by the processor 601 in the communication device 600 shown in Figure 6 calling the computer execution instructions stored in the memory 603.
  • the function/implementation process of the processing module 1302 in Figure 13 can be used to call the memory 603 through the processor 601 in the communication device 600 shown in Figure 6
  • the function/implementation process of the transceiver module 1301 in Figure 13 can be implemented through the communication interface 604 in the communication device 600 shown in Figure 6 .
  • the network device 130 provided in this embodiment can perform the above-mentioned phase calibration method, the technical effects it can obtain can be referred to the above-mentioned method embodiments, which will not be described again here.
  • the above modules or units may be implemented in software, hardware, or a combination of both.
  • the software exists in the form of computer program instructions and is stored in the memory.
  • the processor can be used to execute the program instructions and implement the above method flow.
  • the processor can be built into an SoC (System on a Chip) or ASIC, or it can be an independent semiconductor chip.
  • the processor can further include necessary hardware accelerators, such as field programmable gate array (FPGA), PLD (programmable logic device) , or a logic circuit that implements dedicated logic operations.
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • PLD programmable logic device
  • the hardware can be a CPU, a microprocessor, a digital signal processing (DSP) chip, a microcontroller unit (MCU), an artificial intelligence processor, an ASIC, Any one or any combination of SoC, FPGA, PLD, dedicated digital circuits, hardware accelerators or non-integrated discrete devices, which can run the necessary software or not rely on software to perform the above method flow.
  • DSP digital signal processing
  • MCU microcontroller unit
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device (for example, the communication device may be a chip or a chip system).
  • the communication device includes a processor and is used to implement the method in any of the above method embodiments.
  • the communication device further includes a memory.
  • the memory is used to store necessary program instructions and data.
  • the processor can call the program code stored in the memory to instruct the communication device to execute the method in any of the above method embodiments.
  • the memory may not be in the communication device.
  • the communication device is a chip system, it may be composed of a chip or may include a chip and other discrete devices, which is not specifically limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • Computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, e.g., computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server or data center via a wired (e.g.
  • Coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless means to transmit to another website, computer, server or data center.
  • Computer-readable storage media can be any available media that can be accessed by a computer or include one or more data storage devices such as servers and data centers that can be integrated with the media. Available media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disk, hard disk, tape), optical media (eg, DVD), or semiconductor media (eg, solid state disk (SSD)), etc.

Abstract

Embodiments of the present application provide a phase calibration method and a communication apparatus, capable of improving, when phase changes and/or frequency offset changes among a plurality of terminal devices are inconsistent, the coherence of a plurality of signals transmitted by aggregation, so as to improve the power gain of codirectional superposition of the plurality of signals. The method comprises: a first terminal device receives first indication information from a network device, receives, according to the first indication information, a first sounding reference signal (SRS) from a second terminal device on a time-frequency resource indicated by first SRS resource configuration information, and measures the first SRS to obtain phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the first terminal device and the second terminal device. The first indication information indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information received by the first terminal device is used for phase calibration between the first terminal device and another terminal device, and the phase difference information and/or the frequency offset information are/is used for compensating for a corresponding phase difference and/or frequency offset when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send a first signal.

Description

相位校准方法及通信装置Phase calibration method and communication device
本申请要求于2022年08月24日提交国家知识产权局、申请号为202211021005.3、申请名称为“相位校准方法及通信装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims priority to the Chinese patent application filed with the State Intellectual Property Office on August 24, 2022, with application number 202211021005.3 and the application name "Phase Calibration Method and Communication Device", the entire content of which is incorporated into this application by reference. .
技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及无线通信领域,尤其涉及相位校准方法及通信装置。The present application relates to the field of wireless communications, and in particular to a phase calibration method and communication device.
背景技术Background technique
在无线通信系统中,终端设备向网络设备发送信息称为上行(uplink,UP)通信。其中,在上行通信中,单个终端设备受限上行发射功率,传输速率通常较低,无法满足高速率业务需求。In a wireless communication system, sending information from a terminal device to a network device is called uplink (UP) communication. Among them, in uplink communication, a single terminal device is limited in uplink transmit power, and the transmission rate is usually low, which cannot meet high-rate business requirements.
目前,通过多终端设备协作传输,可以将待传输的数据由多个终端设备对应的多路信号进行聚合传输,使得该聚合传输的多路信号在到达网络设备时形成同向叠加以获得功率增益,进而提升上行传输速率。然而,在一些场景下,聚合传输的多路信号在达到网络设备时无法形成同向叠加,进而会导致无法获得功率增益。Currently, through cooperative transmission by multiple terminal devices, the data to be transmitted can be aggregated and transmitted by multi-channel signals corresponding to multiple terminal devices, so that the aggregated and transmitted multi-channel signals form a co-directional superposition when reaching the network device to obtain power gain. , thereby increasing the uplink transmission rate. However, in some scenarios, the aggregated and transmitted multi-channel signals cannot form a co-directional superposition when reaching the network device, which in turn results in the inability to obtain power gain.
发明内容Contents of the invention
本申请实施例提供的相位校准方法及通信装置,可以在多个终端设备之间相位变化和/或频偏变化不一致时提高聚合传输的多路信号的相干性以提升多路信号同向叠加的功率增益。The phase calibration method and communication device provided by the embodiments of the present application can improve the coherence of aggregated and transmitted multi-channel signals when the phase changes and/or frequency offset changes between multiple terminal devices are inconsistent, so as to improve the coherence superposition of multi-channel signals. Power gain.
为达到上述目的,本申请的实施例采用如下技术方案:In order to achieve the above objectives, the embodiments of the present application adopt the following technical solutions:
第一方面,提供一种相位校准方法,该方法可以由第一终端设备执行,也可以由第一终端设备的部件,例如第一终端设备的处理器、芯片、或芯片系统等执行,还可以由能实现全部或部分第一终端设备功能的逻辑模块或软件实现。以下以该方法由第一终端设备执行为例进行说明。该方法包括:第一终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息,并根据第一指示信息在第一SRS资源配置信息指示的时频资源上接收来自第二终端设备的第一SRS,以及对第一SRS进行测量获得第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的相位差信息和/或频偏信息。其中,第一指示信息指示第一终端设备接收的第一探测参考信号SRS资源配置信息用于第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准,相位差信息和/或频偏信息用于补偿第一终端设备与第二终端设备发送第一信号时对应的相位差和/或频偏。由于本申请实施例中,第一指示信息指示第一终端设备接收的第一SRS资源配置信息用于第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准,使得第一终端设备可以接收来自第二终端设备的第一SRS,并对该第一SRS进行测量获得第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的相位差信息和/或频偏信息,通过该相位差信息和/或频偏信息可以补偿第一终端设备与第二终端设备同时发送第一信号时由于第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的相位变化和/或频偏变化不一致造成的相位差,进而可以提高第一终端设备和第二终端设备聚合传输的信号之间的相干性,以提升多路信号同向叠加的功率增益。因此,基于本申请实施例提供的相位校准方法,可以在多个终端设备之间相位变化和/或频偏变化不一致时提高聚合传输的多路信号的相干性以提升多路信号同向叠加的功率增益。In a first aspect, a phase calibration method is provided. The method can be executed by a first terminal device, or can be executed by a component of the first terminal device, such as a processor, a chip, or a chip system of the first terminal device. It can also be It is implemented by a logic module or software that can realize all or part of the functions of the first terminal device. The following description takes the method being executed by the first terminal device as an example. The method includes: the first terminal device receives first indication information from the network device, and receives the first SRS from the second terminal device on the time-frequency resource indicated by the first SRS resource configuration information according to the first indication information; and The first SRS performs measurements to obtain phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the first terminal equipment and the second terminal equipment. Wherein, the first indication information indicates that the first sounding reference signal SRS resource configuration information received by the first terminal equipment is used for phase calibration between the first terminal equipment and other terminal equipment, and the phase difference information and/or frequency offset information is used for compensation. The corresponding phase difference and/or frequency offset when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal. In this embodiment of the present application, the first indication information indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information received by the first terminal device is used for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices, so that the first terminal device can receive data from the second terminal device. The first SRS of the terminal equipment, and measuring the first SRS to obtain the phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the first terminal equipment and the second terminal equipment, through which the phase difference information and/or the frequency offset information can be Compensating for the phase difference caused by inconsistent phase changes and/or frequency offset changes between the first terminal device and the second terminal device when the first terminal device and the second terminal device transmit the first signal at the same time, thereby improving the performance of the first terminal device and the second terminal device to aggregate the coherence between the transmitted signals to improve the power gain of co-directional superposition of multi-channel signals. Therefore, based on the phase calibration method provided by the embodiments of the present application, when the phase changes and/or frequency offset changes among multiple terminal devices are inconsistent, the coherence of the aggregated and transmitted multi-channel signals can be improved to improve the co-directional superposition of the multi-channel signals. Power gain.
结合上述第一方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,第一终端设备与第二终端设备发送第一信号时对应的相位差包括第一相位差与第二相位差之间的差值。其中,第一相位差为第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间在第一时刻的相位差,第二相位差为第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间在第二时刻的相位差。第一时刻为第一终端设备确定的信道状态信息CSI测量时刻。第二时刻为第一终端设备向网络设备发送第一信号的时刻。In conjunction with the above first aspect, in a possible implementation, the corresponding phase difference when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal includes a difference between the first phase difference and the second phase difference. The first phase difference is the phase difference between the first terminal device and the second terminal device at the first time, and the second phase difference is the phase difference between the first terminal device and the second terminal device at the second time. The first time is the channel state information CSI measurement time determined by the first terminal device. The second moment is the moment when the first terminal device sends the first signal to the network device.
结合上述第一方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,第一终端设备与第二终端设备发送第一信号时对应的频偏包括第一频偏与第二频偏之间的差值。其中,第一频偏为第一终端设备与第二终端设备在第一时刻的频偏,第二频偏为第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间在第二时刻的频偏。第一时刻为第一终端设备确定的CSI测量时刻,第二时刻为第一终端设备向网络设备发送第一信号的 时刻。In conjunction with the above first aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the corresponding frequency offset when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal includes a difference between the first frequency offset and the second frequency offset. The first frequency offset is the frequency offset between the first terminal device and the second terminal device at the first time, and the second frequency offset is the frequency offset between the first terminal device and the second terminal device at the second time. The first time is the CSI measurement time determined by the first terminal device, and the second time is the time when the first terminal device sends the first signal to the network device. time.
结合上述第一方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,第一指示信息包括第一SRS资源配置信息。其中,第一SRS资源配置信息包括用途指示usage,usage指示第一SRS资源配置信息用于第一终端设备接收SRS;或者,usage指示第一SRS资源配置信息用于第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准。也就是说,第一指示信息可以是第一SRS资源配置信息中usage被配置为“接收”的信息,这样可以隐式地指示第一SRS资源配置信息用于第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准。而且,由于SRS资源配置信息本身用于终端设备发送SRS,而在SRS资源配置信息用于相位校准的情况下,可以隐式的表示该SRS资源配置信息用于终端设备接收SRS。In conjunction with the above first aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the first indication information includes first SRS resource configuration information. Wherein, the first SRS resource configuration information includes usage indication, usage indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information is used by the first terminal device to receive SRS; or usage indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information is used by the first terminal device and other terminal devices. phase calibration. That is to say, the first indication information may be information in which usage is configured as "receive" in the first SRS resource configuration information. This may implicitly indicate that the first SRS resource configuration information is used between the first terminal device and other terminal devices. phase calibration. Moreover, since the SRS resource configuration information itself is used by the terminal device to send SRS, and when the SRS resource configuration information is used for phase calibration, it can be implicitly expressed that the SRS resource configuration information is used by the terminal device to receive SRS.
结合上述第一方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,第一指示信息包括第一SRS资源配置信息,该第一SRS资源配置信息包括的时域资源信息对应的符号类型为下行符号。也就是说,第一SRS资源配置信息包括的时域资源信息对应的符号类型为下行符号时,可以表示第一SRS资源配置信息用于接收SRS。也就是说,第一SRS资源配置信息包括的时域资源信息对应的符号类型为下行符号时,可以表示第一SRS资源配置信息用于接收SRS,进而隐式地指示第一SRS资源配置信息用于第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准。In conjunction with the above first aspect, in a possible implementation, the first indication information includes first SRS resource configuration information, and the symbol type corresponding to the time domain resource information included in the first SRS resource configuration information is a downlink symbol. That is to say, when the symbol type corresponding to the time domain resource information included in the first SRS resource configuration information is a downlink symbol, it may indicate that the first SRS resource configuration information is used for receiving SRS. That is to say, when the symbol type corresponding to the time domain resource information included in the first SRS resource configuration information is a downlink symbol, it can indicate that the first SRS resource configuration information is used to receive SRS, and then implicitly indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information is used for receiving SRS. Phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices.
结合上述第一方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,在第一终端设备确定使用非码本传输方式发送第一信号的情况下,第一终端设备确定的CSI测量时刻为第一终端设备接收来自网络设备的信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS的时刻。In conjunction with the above first aspect, in a possible implementation, when the first terminal device determines to use the non-codebook transmission method to send the first signal, the CSI measurement time determined by the first terminal device is when the first terminal device receives The time of the channel state information reference signal CSI-RS from the network device.
结合上述第一方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:第一终端设备接收来自网络设备的第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于指示第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送第一预编码矩阵,第一预编码矩阵为第一终端设备确定使用非码本传输方式发送第一信号的情况下第一时刻对应的预编码矩阵;第一终端设备接收来自第二终端设备的第一信道信息,第一信道信息包括第二终端设备对CSI-RS进行测量获得的信道矩阵;第一终端设备根据第一信道信息以及第一终端设备对CSI-RS进行测量获得的第二信道信息确定第一预编码矩阵;第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送第一预编码矩阵。也就是说,第二终端设备通过向第一终端设备发送第一信道信息,可以使得第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间共享第二终端设备与网络设备之间的下行信道的信道矩阵。而且,第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送第一预编码矩阵,可以使得第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间共享第一预编码矩阵。In conjunction with the above first aspect, in a possible implementation, the method further includes: the first terminal device receiving second indication information from the network device, the second indication information being used to instruct the first terminal device to send a message to the second terminal device. The device sends a first precoding matrix, which is the precoding matrix corresponding to the first moment when the first terminal device determines to use a non-codebook transmission method to send the first signal; the first terminal device receives the signal from the second terminal The first channel information of the device, the first channel information includes the channel matrix obtained by the second terminal device measuring the CSI-RS; the first terminal device obtains the first channel information and the first terminal device by measuring the CSI-RS. The two channel information determines the first precoding matrix; the first terminal device sends the first precoding matrix to the second terminal device. That is to say, by sending the first channel information to the first terminal device, the second terminal device can share the channel matrix of the downlink channel between the second terminal device and the network device between the first terminal device and the second terminal device. Furthermore, the first terminal device sends the first precoding matrix to the second terminal device, so that the first terminal device and the second terminal device can share the first precoding matrix.
结合上述第一方法,在一种可能的实现方式中,在第一终端设备确定使用码本传输方式发送第一信号的情况下,第一终端设备确定的CSI测量时刻为第一终端设备向网络设备发送第二SRS的时刻,第二SRS用于上行信道的CSI测量;或者,第一终端设备确定的CSI测量时刻为第二终端设备向网络设备发送第三SRS的时刻。其中,第二终端设备向网络设备发送第三SRS的时刻是由网络设备指示给第一终端设备的,第三SRS用于上行信道的CSI测量。Combined with the above first method, in a possible implementation, when the first terminal device determines to use the codebook transmission method to send the first signal, the CSI measurement time determined by the first terminal device is when the first terminal device transmits the first signal to the network. The time when the device sends the second SRS, and the second SRS is used for CSI measurement of the uplink channel; or, the CSI measurement time determined by the first terminal device is the time when the second terminal device sends the third SRS to the network device. Wherein, the time when the second terminal device sends the third SRS to the network device is instructed by the network device to the first terminal device, and the third SRS is used for CSI measurement of the uplink channel.
结合上述第一方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,在第一终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息之前,该方法还包括:第一终端设备接收来自网络设备的第三指示信息。其中,第三指示信息指示第一终端设备接收的M个SRS资源配置信息为候选的用于第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准的SRS资源配置信息,M为大于1的正整数。第一指示信息还用于指示M个SRS资源配置信息中的N个SRS资源配置信息为第一SRS资源配置信息,N为小于或等于M的正整数。也就是说,第一终端设备根据第三指示信息可以获取多个用于第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准的SRS资源,进而第一终端设备可以在多个时频资源上接收多个不同的SRS进行相位校准,从而提高相位校准的效率。In conjunction with the above first aspect, in a possible implementation, before the first terminal device receives the first indication information from the network device, the method further includes: the first terminal device receives third indication information from the network device. The third indication information indicates that the M pieces of SRS resource configuration information received by the first terminal device are candidate SRS resource configuration information for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices, and M is a positive integer greater than 1. . The first indication information is also used to indicate that the N pieces of SRS resource configuration information among the M pieces of SRS resource configuration information are the first SRS resource configuration information, and N is a positive integer less than or equal to M. That is to say, the first terminal device can obtain multiple SRS resources for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices according to the third indication information, and then the first terminal device can receive signals on multiple time-frequency resources. Multiple different SRSs are used for phase calibration, thereby improving the efficiency of phase calibration.
结合上述第一方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,在第一终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息之前,该方法还包括:第一终端设备向网络设备发送能力信息,该能力信息用于指示第一终端设备具备获得第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的相位差信息和/或频偏信息的能力。In conjunction with the above first aspect, in a possible implementation, before the first terminal device receives the first indication information from the network device, the method further includes: the first terminal device sends capability information to the network device, the capability information It is used to indicate that the first terminal device has the ability to obtain phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
第二方面,提供一种相位校准方法,该方法可以由网络设备执行,也可以由网络设备的部件,例如网络设备的处理器、芯片、或芯片系统等执行,还可以由能实现全部或部分网络设备功能的逻辑模块或软件实现。以下以该方法由网络设备执行为例进行说明。该方法包括:网络设备获取第一指示信息,并向第一终端设备发送第一指示信息。其中,第一指示信息指示第一终端设备接 收的第一探测参考信号SRS资源配置信息用于第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准。由于本申请实施例中,第一指示信息指示第一终端设备接收的第一SRS资源配置信息用于第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准,使得第一终端设备可以接收来自第二终端设备的第一SRS,并对该第一SRS进行测量获得第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的相位差信息和/或频偏信息,通过该相位差信息和/或频偏信息可以补偿第一终端设备与第二终端设备同时发送第一信号时由于第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的相位变化和/或频偏变化不一致造成的相位差,进而可以提高第一终端设备和第二终端设备聚合传输的信号之间的相干性,以提升多路信号同向叠加的功率增益。因此,基于本申请实施例提供的相位校准方法,可以在多个终端设备之间相位变化和/或频偏变化不一致时提高聚合传输的多路信号的相干性以提升多路信号同向叠加的功率增益。In the second aspect, a phase calibration method is provided. The method can be executed by a network device, or by a component of the network device, such as a processor, a chip, or a chip system of the network device. It can also be executed by a device that can realize all or part of the Logic module or software implementation of network device functions. The following description takes the method being executed by a network device as an example. The method includes: the network device obtains first indication information and sends the first indication information to the first terminal device. Wherein, the first instruction information instructs the first terminal device to connect The received first sounding reference signal SRS resource configuration information is used for phase calibration between the first terminal equipment and other terminal equipment. In this embodiment of the present application, the first indication information indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information received by the first terminal device is used for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices, so that the first terminal device can receive data from the second terminal device. The first SRS of the terminal equipment, and measuring the first SRS to obtain the phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the first terminal equipment and the second terminal equipment, through which the phase difference information and/or the frequency offset information can be Compensating for the phase difference caused by inconsistent phase changes and/or frequency offset changes between the first terminal device and the second terminal device when the first terminal device and the second terminal device transmit the first signal at the same time, thereby improving the performance of the first terminal device and the second terminal device to aggregate the coherence between the transmitted signals to improve the power gain of co-directional superposition of multi-channel signals. Therefore, based on the phase calibration method provided by the embodiments of the present application, when the phase changes and/or frequency offset changes among multiple terminal devices are inconsistent, the coherence of the aggregated and transmitted multi-channel signals can be improved to improve the co-directional superposition of the multi-channel signals. Power gain.
结合上述第二方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,第一指示信息包括第一SRS资源配置信息。其中,第一SRS资源配置信息包括用途指示usage,usage指示第一SRS资源配置信息用于第一终端设备接收SRS;或者,usage指示第一SRS资源配置信息用于第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准。也就是说,第一指示信息可以是第一SRS资源配置信息中usage被配置为“接收”的信息,这样可以隐式地指示第一SRS资源配置信息用于第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准。而且,由于SRS资源配置信息本身用于终端设备发送SRS,而在SRS资源配置信息用于相位校准的情况下,可以隐式的表示该SRS资源配置信息用于终端设备接收SRS。Combined with the above second aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the first indication information includes first SRS resource configuration information. Wherein, the first SRS resource configuration information includes usage indication, usage indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information is used by the first terminal device to receive SRS; or usage indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information is used by the first terminal device and other terminal devices. phase calibration. That is to say, the first indication information may be information in which usage is configured as "receive" in the first SRS resource configuration information. This may implicitly indicate that the first SRS resource configuration information is used between the first terminal device and other terminal devices. phase calibration. Moreover, since the SRS resource configuration information itself is used by the terminal device to send SRS, and when the SRS resource configuration information is used for phase calibration, it can be implicitly expressed that the SRS resource configuration information is used by the terminal device to receive SRS.
结合上述第二方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,第一指示信息包括第一SRS资源配置信息,该第一SRS资源配置信息包括的时域资源信息对应的符号类型为下行符号。也就是说,第一SRS资源配置信息包括的时域资源信息对应的符号类型为下行符号时,可以表示第一SRS资源配置信息用于接收SRS。也就是说,第一SRS资源配置信息包括的时域资源信息对应的符号类型为下行符号时,可以表示第一SRS资源配置信息用于接收SRS,进而隐式地指示第一SRS资源配置信息用于第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准。In conjunction with the above second aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the first indication information includes first SRS resource configuration information, and the symbol type corresponding to the time domain resource information included in the first SRS resource configuration information is a downlink symbol. That is to say, when the symbol type corresponding to the time domain resource information included in the first SRS resource configuration information is a downlink symbol, it may indicate that the first SRS resource configuration information is used for receiving SRS. That is to say, when the symbol type corresponding to the time domain resource information included in the first SRS resource configuration information is a downlink symbol, it can indicate that the first SRS resource configuration information is used to receive SRS, and then implicitly indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information is used for receiving SRS. Phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices.
结合上述第二方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:网络设备向第一终端设备发送第二指示信息,第二指示信息用于指示第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送第一预编码矩阵,第一预编码矩阵为第一终端设备确定使用非码本传输方式发送第一信号的情况下第一时刻对应的预编码矩阵,第一时刻为第一终端设备接收来自网络设备的信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS的时刻。也就是说,网络设备可以还是第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送第一预编码矩阵,使得第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间可以共享第一预编码矩阵。In conjunction with the above second aspect, in a possible implementation, the method further includes: the network device sends second indication information to the first terminal device, and the second indication information is used to instruct the first terminal device to send The first precoding matrix is the precoding matrix corresponding to the first moment when the first terminal device determines to use a non-codebook transmission method to send the first signal. The first moment is when the first terminal device receives data from the network. The time of the device's channel state information reference signal CSI-RS. That is to say, the network device may still be the first terminal device and send the first precoding matrix to the second terminal device, so that the first terminal device and the second terminal device can share the first precoding matrix.
结合上述第二方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,网络设备获取第一指示信息,可以包括:网络设备接收来自第一终端设备的能力信息,该能力信息用于指示第一终端设备具备获得第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的相位差信息和/或频偏信息的能力。In conjunction with the above second aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the network device obtains the first indication information, which may include: the network device receives capability information from the first terminal device, the capability information is used to indicate that the first terminal device has the ability to obtain The capability of phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
结合上述第二方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,在网络设备向第一终端设备发送第三指示信息。其中,第三指示信息指示第一终端设备接收的M个SRS资源配置信息为候选的用于第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准的SRS资源配置信息,M为大于1的正整数。第一指示信息还用于指示M个SRS资源配置信息中的N个SRS资源配置信息为第一SRS资源配置信息,N为小于或等于M的正整数。也就是说,网络设备可以通过该第三指示信息为第一终端设备提供多个用于第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准的SRS资源,进而第一终端设备可以在多个时频资源上接收多个不同的SRS进行相位校准,从而提高相位校准的效率。In conjunction with the above second aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the network device sends third indication information to the first terminal device. The third indication information indicates that the M pieces of SRS resource configuration information received by the first terminal device are candidate SRS resource configuration information for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices, and M is a positive integer greater than 1. . The first indication information is also used to indicate that the N pieces of SRS resource configuration information among the M pieces of SRS resource configuration information are the first SRS resource configuration information, and N is a positive integer less than or equal to M. That is to say, the network device can provide the first terminal device with multiple SRS resources for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices through the third indication information, so that the first terminal device can perform phase calibration at multiple times. Multiple different SRSs are received on frequency resources for phase calibration, thereby improving the efficiency of phase calibration.
第三方面,提供了一种通信装置用于实现上述各种方法。该通信装置可以为上述第一方面中的第一终端设备,或者包含上述第一终端设备的装置,或者上述第一终端设备中包含的装置,比如芯片;或者,该通信装置可以为上述第二方面中的网络设备,或者包含上述网络设备的装置,或者上述网络设备中包含的装置。所述通信装置包括实现上述方法相应的模块、单元、或手段(means),该模块、单元、或means可以通过硬件实现,软件实现,或者通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。该硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块或单元。In a third aspect, a communication device is provided for implementing the various methods mentioned above. The communication device may be the first terminal device in the first aspect, or a device including the first terminal device, or a device included in the first terminal device, such as a chip; or the communication device may be the second terminal device. The network device in the aspect, or the device including the above network device, or the device included in the above network device. The communication device includes corresponding modules, units, or means (means) for implementing the above method. The modules, units, or means can be implemented by hardware, software, or by hardware executing corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more modules or units corresponding to the above functions.
在一些可能的设计中,该通信装置可以包括处理模块和收发模块。该收发模块,也可以称为收发单元,用以实现上述任一方面及其任意可能的实现方式中的发送和/或接收功能。该收发模块可以由收发电路,收发机,收发器或者通信接口构成。该处理模块,可以用于实现上述任一方面 及其任意可能的实现方式中的处理功能。In some possible designs, the communication device may include a processing module and a transceiver module. The transceiver module, which may also be called a transceiver unit, is used to implement the sending and/or receiving functions in any of the above aspects and any possible implementation manner thereof. The transceiver module can be composed of a transceiver circuit, a transceiver, a transceiver or a communication interface. This processing module can be used to implement any of the above aspects and its processing functionality in any possible implementation.
示例性的,收发模块,用于接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示第一终端设备接收的第一探测参考信号SRS资源配置信息用于第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准;收发模块,还用于根据第一指示信息在第一SRS资源配置信息指示的时频资源上接收来自第二终端设备的第一SRS;处理模块,用于对第一SRS进行测量获得第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的相位差信息和/或频偏信息。其中,相位差信息和/或频偏信息用于补偿第一终端设备与第二终端设备发送第一信号时对应的相位差和/或频偏。Exemplarily, the transceiver module is configured to receive first indication information from the network device, where the first indication information is used to instruct the first terminal device to receive the first sounding reference signal SRS resource configuration information for the first terminal device to communicate with other devices. phase calibration between terminal devices; a transceiver module, further configured to receive the first SRS from the second terminal device on the time-frequency resource indicated by the first SRS resource configuration information according to the first indication information; a processing module, configured to An SRS performs measurements to obtain phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the first terminal equipment and the second terminal equipment. The phase difference information and/or frequency offset information are used to compensate the corresponding phase difference and/or frequency offset when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal.
示例性的,第一终端设备与第二终端设备发送第一信号时对应的相位差和/或频偏包括第一相位差与第二相位差之间的差值,第一相位差为第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间在第一时刻的相位差,第二相位差为第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间在第二时刻的相位差。其中,第一时刻为第一终端设备确定的信道状态信息CSI测量时刻,第二时刻为第一终端设备向网络设备发送第一信号的时刻。Exemplarily, the corresponding phase difference and/or frequency offset when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal include the difference between the first phase difference and the second phase difference, and the first phase difference is the first The phase difference between the terminal device and the second terminal device at the first time, and the second phase difference is the phase difference between the first terminal device and the second terminal device at the second time. The first time is the channel state information CSI measurement time determined by the first terminal device, and the second time is the time when the first terminal device sends the first signal to the network device.
示例性的,第一终端设备与第二终端设备发送第一信号时对应的频偏包括第一频偏与第二频偏之间的差值。其中,第一频偏为第一终端设备与第二终端设备在第一时刻的频偏,第二频偏为第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间在第二时刻的频偏。第一时刻为第一终端设备确定的CSI测量时刻,第二时刻为第一终端设备向网络设备发送第一信号的时刻。Exemplarily, the corresponding frequency offset when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal includes the difference between the first frequency offset and the second frequency offset. The first frequency offset is the frequency offset between the first terminal device and the second terminal device at the first time, and the second frequency offset is the frequency offset between the first terminal device and the second terminal device at the second time. The first time is the CSI measurement time determined by the first terminal device, and the second time is the time when the first terminal device sends the first signal to the network device.
示例性的,第一指示信息包括第一SRS资源配置信息,该第一SRS资源配置信息包括用途指示usage。其中,usage指示第一SRS资源配置信息用于第一终端设备接收SRS;或者,usage指示第一SRS资源配置信息用于第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准。Exemplarily, the first indication information includes first SRS resource configuration information, and the first SRS resource configuration information includes usage indication. Wherein, usage indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information is used for the first terminal device to receive SRS; or usage indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information is used for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices.
示例性的,第一指示信息包括第一SRS资源配置信息,该第一SRS资源配置信息包括的时域资源信息对应的符号类型为下行符号。Exemplarily, the first indication information includes first SRS resource configuration information, and the symbol type corresponding to the time domain resource information included in the first SRS resource configuration information is a downlink symbol.
示例性的,在第一终端设备确定使用非码本传输方式发送第一信号的情况下,第一终端设备确定的CSI测量时刻为第一终端设备接收来自网络设备的信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS的时刻。For example, when the first terminal device determines to use a non-codebook transmission method to send the first signal, the CSI measurement time determined by the first terminal device is when the first terminal device receives the channel state information reference signal CSI- from the network device. RS moment.
示例性的,收发模块,还用于接收来自网络设备的第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于指示第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送第一预编码矩阵,该第一预编码矩阵为第一终端设备确定使用非码本传输方式发送第一信号的情况下第一时刻对应的预编码矩阵;收发模块,还用于接收来自第二终端设备的第一信道信息,该第一信道信息包括第二终端设备对CSI-RS进行测量获得的信道矩阵;处理模块,还用于根据第一信道信息以及第一终端设备对CSI-RS进行测量获得的第二信道信息确定第一预编码矩阵;收发模块,还用于向第二终端设备发送第一预编码矩阵。Exemplarily, the transceiver module is also configured to receive second indication information from the network device. The second indication information is used to instruct the first terminal device to send the first precoding matrix to the second terminal device. The first precoding matrix Determine for the first terminal device the precoding matrix corresponding to the first moment when the first signal is sent using a non-codebook transmission method; the transceiver module is also used to receive the first channel information from the second terminal device, the first channel The information includes a channel matrix obtained by measuring the CSI-RS by the second terminal device; the processing module is also configured to determine the first precoding according to the first channel information and the second channel information obtained by measuring the CSI-RS by the first terminal device. Matrix; transceiver module, also used to send the first precoding matrix to the second terminal device.
示例性的,在第一终端设备确定使用码本传输方式发送第一信号的情况下,第一终端设备确定的CSI测量时刻为第一终端设备向网络设备发送第二SRS的时刻,该第二SRS用于上行信道的CSI测量;或者,第一终端设备确定的CSI测量时刻为第二终端设备向网络设备发送第三SRS的时刻。其中,第二终端设备向网络设备发送第三SRS的时刻是由网络设备指示给第一终端设备的,该第三SRS用于上行信道的CSI测量。For example, when the first terminal device determines to use the codebook transmission method to send the first signal, the CSI measurement time determined by the first terminal device is the time when the first terminal device sends the second SRS to the network device, and the second SRS is sent by the first terminal device to the network device. The SRS is used for CSI measurement of the uplink channel; or, the CSI measurement time determined by the first terminal device is the time when the second terminal device sends the third SRS to the network device. Wherein, the time when the second terminal device sends the third SRS to the network device is instructed by the network device to the first terminal device, and the third SRS is used for CSI measurement of the uplink channel.
示例性的,收发模块,还用于在接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息之前,向网络设备发送能力信息,该能力信息用于指示第一终端设备具备获得第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的相位差信息和/或频偏信息的能力。Exemplarily, the transceiver module is also configured to send capability information to the network device before receiving the first indication information from the network device. The capability information is used to indicate that the first terminal device is equipped to obtain the first terminal device and the second terminal device. capability between phase difference information and/or frequency offset information.
示例性的,收发模块,还用于在接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息之前,接收来自网络设备的第三指示信息。其中,第三指示信息指示第一终端设备接收的M个SRS资源配置信息为候选的用于第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准的SRS资源配置信息,M为大于1的正整数。第一指示信息还用于指示M个SRS资源配置信息中的N个SRS资源配置信息为第一SRS资源配置信息,N为小于或等于M的正整数。Exemplarily, the transceiver module is further configured to receive third indication information from the network device before receiving the first indication information from the network device. The third indication information indicates that the M pieces of SRS resource configuration information received by the first terminal device are candidate SRS resource configuration information for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices, and M is a positive integer greater than 1. . The first indication information is also used to indicate that the N pieces of SRS resource configuration information among the M pieces of SRS resource configuration information are the first SRS resource configuration information, and N is a positive integer less than or equal to M.
可选地,第三方面所述的收发模块可以包括接收模块和发送模块。本申请对于收发模块的具体实现方式,不做具体限定。Optionally, the transceiver module described in the third aspect may include a receiving module and a sending module. This application does not specifically limit the specific implementation of the transceiver module.
可选地,第三方面所述的通信装置还可以包括存储模块,该存储模块存储有程序或指令。当处理模块执行该程序或指令时,使得第三方面所述的通信装置可以执行第一方面所述的方法。Optionally, the communication device described in the third aspect may further include a storage module that stores programs or instructions. When the processing module executes the program or instruction, the communication device described in the third aspect can perform the method described in the first aspect.
此外,第三方面所述的通信装置的技术效果可以参考第一方面中任一种可能的实现方式所述 的通信方法的技术效果,此处不再赘述。In addition, the technical effects of the communication device described in the third aspect can be described with reference to any possible implementation manner in the first aspect. The technical effects of the communication method will not be repeated here.
第四方面,提供了一种通信装置用于执行上述第二方面或第二方面的任一可能的实现方式中的方法。该通信装置可以为上述第二方面中的网络设备,或者包含上述网络设备的装置,或者上述网络设备中包含的装置,比如芯片。所述通信装置包括实现上述方法相应的模块、单元、或手段(means),该模块、单元、或means可以通过硬件实现,软件实现,或者通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。该硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块或单元。A fourth aspect provides a communication device for performing the method in the above second aspect or any possible implementation of the second aspect. The communication device may be the network device in the above-mentioned second aspect, or a device including the above-mentioned network device, or a device included in the above-mentioned network device, such as a chip. The communication device includes corresponding modules, units, or means (means) for implementing the above method. The modules, units, or means can be implemented by hardware, software, or by hardware executing corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more modules or units corresponding to the above functions.
结合上述第四方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,该通信装置可以包括处理模块和收发模块。该收发模块,也可以称为收发单元,用以实现上述第二方面及其任意可能的实现方式中的发送和/或接收功能。该收发模块可以由收发电路,收发机,收发器或者通信接口构成。该处理模块,可以用于实现上述第二方面及其任意可能的实现方式中的处理功能。In conjunction with the above fourth aspect, in a possible implementation, the communication device may include a processing module and a transceiver module. The transceiver module, which may also be called a transceiver unit, is used to implement the sending and/or receiving functions in the above second aspect and any possible implementation thereof. The transceiver module can be composed of a transceiver circuit, a transceiver, a transceiver or a communication interface. This processing module can be used to implement the processing functions in the above second aspect and any possible implementation manner thereof.
示例性的,处理模块,用于获取第一指示信息,该第一指示信息指示第一终端设备接收的第一探测参考信号SRS资源配置信息用于第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准;收发模块,用于向第一终端设备发送第一指示信息。Exemplarily, the processing module is configured to obtain first indication information, which indicates that the first sounding reference signal SRS resource configuration information received by the first terminal device is used for the phase between the first terminal device and other terminal devices. Calibration; transceiver module, configured to send first indication information to the first terminal device.
示例性的,第一指示信息包括第一SRS资源配置信息,该第一SRS资源配置信息包括用途指示usage。其中,usage指示第一SRS资源配置信息用于第一终端设备接收SRS;或者,usage指示第一SRS资源配置信息用于第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准。Exemplarily, the first indication information includes first SRS resource configuration information, and the first SRS resource configuration information includes usage indication. Wherein, usage indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information is used for the first terminal device to receive SRS; or usage indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information is used for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices.
示例性的,第一指示信息包括第一SRS资源配置信息,该第一SRS资源配置信息包括的时域资源信息对应的符号类型为下行符号。Exemplarily, the first indication information includes first SRS resource configuration information, and the symbol type corresponding to the time domain resource information included in the first SRS resource configuration information is a downlink symbol.
示例性的,收发模块,还用于向第一终端设备发送第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于指示第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送第一预编码矩阵,该第一预编码矩阵为第一终端设备确定使用非码本传输方式发送第一信号的情况下第一时刻对应的预编码矩阵,该第一时刻为第一终端设备接收来自网络设备的信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS的时刻。Exemplarily, the transceiver module is also configured to send second indication information to the first terminal device. The second indication information is used to instruct the first terminal device to send the first precoding matrix to the second terminal device. The first precoding matrix The matrix is a precoding matrix corresponding to the first moment when the first terminal device determines to use a non-codebook transmission method to send the first signal. The first moment is when the first terminal device receives the channel state information reference signal CSI- from the network device. RS moment.
示例性的,处理模块用于获取第一指示信息包括:通过收发模块接收来自第一终端设备的能力信息,该能力信息用于指示第一终端设备具备获得第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的相位差信息和/或频偏信息的能力;根据该能力信息确定第一指示信息。Exemplarily, the processing module is used to obtain the first indication information including: receiving capability information from the first terminal device through the transceiver module, and the capability information is used to indicate that the first terminal device is capable of obtaining the first terminal device and the second terminal device. phase difference information and/or frequency offset information; determine the first indication information based on the capability information.
示例性的,收发模块,还用于在向第一终端设备发送第一指示信息之前,向第一终端设备发送第三指示信息。其中,第三指示信息指示第一终端设备接收的M个SRS资源配置信息为候选的用于第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准的SRS资源配置信息,M为大于1的正整数。第一指示信息还用于指示M个SRS资源配置信息中的N个SRS资源配置信息为第一SRS资源配置信息,N为小于或等于M的正整数。Exemplarily, the transceiver module is further configured to send third indication information to the first terminal device before sending the first indication information to the first terminal device. The third indication information indicates that the M pieces of SRS resource configuration information received by the first terminal device are candidate SRS resource configuration information for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices, and M is a positive integer greater than 1. . The first indication information is also used to indicate that the N pieces of SRS resource configuration information among the M pieces of SRS resource configuration information are the first SRS resource configuration information, and N is a positive integer less than or equal to M.
可选地,第四方面所述的收发模块可以包括接收模块和发送模块。本申请对于收发模块的具体实现方式,不做具体限定。Optionally, the transceiver module described in the fourth aspect may include a receiving module and a sending module. This application does not specifically limit the specific implementation of the transceiver module.
可选地,第四方面所述的通信装置还可以包括存储模块,该存储模块存储有程序或指令。当处理模块执行该程序或指令时,使得第四方面所述的通信装置可以执行第二方面所述的方法。Optionally, the communication device described in the fourth aspect may further include a storage module that stores programs or instructions. When the processing module executes the program or instruction, the communication device described in the fourth aspect can perform the method described in the second aspect.
此外,第四方面所述的通信装置的技术效果可以参考第二方面中任一种可能的实现方式所述的通信方法的技术效果,此处不再赘述。In addition, the technical effects of the communication device described in the fourth aspect can be referred to the technical effects of the communication method described in any possible implementation manner in the second aspect, which will not be described again here.
在一些可能的设计中,收发模块包括发送模块和接收模块,分别用于实现上述任一方面及其任意可能的实现方式中的发送和接收功能。In some possible designs, the transceiver module includes a sending module and a receiving module, respectively used to implement the sending and receiving functions in any of the above aspects and any possible implementation manner thereof.
第五方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括:处理器和存储器;该存储器用于存储计算机指令,当该处理器执行该指令时,以使该通信装置执行上述任一方面所述的方法。该通信装置可以为上述第一方面中的第一终端设备,或者包含上述第一终端设备的装置,或者上述第一终端设备中包含的装置,比如芯片;或者,该通信装置可以为上述第二方面中的网络设备,或者包含上述网络设备的装置,或者上述网络设备中包含的装置。In a fifth aspect, a communication device is provided, including: a processor and a memory; the memory is used to store computer instructions, and when the processor executes the instructions, the communication device performs the method described in any of the above aspects. The communication device may be the first terminal device in the first aspect, or a device including the first terminal device, or a device included in the first terminal device, such as a chip; or the communication device may be the second terminal device. The network device in the aspect, or the device including the above network device, or the device included in the above network device.
第六方面,提供一种通信装置,包括:处理器和通信接口;该通信接口,用于与该通信装置之外的模块通信;所述处理器用于执行计算机程序或指令,以使该通信装置执行上述任一方面所述的方法。该通信装置可以为上述第一方面中的第一终端设备,或者包含上述第一终端设备的装置,或者上述第一终端设备中包含的装置,比如芯片;或者,该通信装置可以为上述第二方面中 的网络设备,或者包含上述网络设备的装置,或者上述网络设备中包含的装置。A sixth aspect provides a communication device, including: a processor and a communication interface; the communication interface is used to communicate with modules external to the communication device; the processor is used to execute computer programs or instructions to enable the communication device Perform any of the methods described above. The communication device may be the first terminal device in the first aspect, or a device including the first terminal device, or a device included in the first terminal device, such as a chip; or the communication device may be the second terminal device. in aspect Network equipment, or devices including the above network equipment, or devices included in the above network equipment.
第七方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括:至少一个处理器;所述处理器用于执行存储器中存储的计算机程序或指令,以使该通信装置执行上述任一方面所述的方法。该存储器可以与处理器耦合,或者,也可以独立于该处理器。该通信装置可以为上述第一方面中的第一终端设备,或者包含上述第一终端设备的装置,或者上述第一终端设备中包含的装置,比如芯片;或者,该通信装置可以为上述第二方面中的网络设备,或者包含上述网络设备的装置,或者上述网络设备中包含的装置,比如芯片。In a seventh aspect, a communication device is provided, including: at least one processor; the processor is configured to execute a computer program or instructions stored in a memory, so that the communication device executes the method described in any of the above aspects. The memory may be coupled to the processor, or may be independent of the processor. The communication device may be the first terminal device in the first aspect, or a device including the first terminal device, or a device included in the first terminal device, such as a chip; or the communication device may be the second terminal device. The network device in the aspect, or the device including the above network device, or the device included in the above network device, such as a chip.
第八方面,提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机程序或指令,当其在通信装置上运行时,使得通信装置可以执行上述任一方面所述的方法。In an eighth aspect, a computer-readable storage medium is provided. The computer-readable storage medium stores computer programs or instructions. When run on a communication device, the communication device can perform the method described in any of the above aspects. .
第九方面,提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,当其在通信装置上运行时,使得该通信装置可以执行上述任一方面所述的方法。A ninth aspect provides a computer program product containing instructions that, when run on a communication device, enables the communication device to perform the method described in any of the above aspects.
第十方面,提供了一种通信装置(例如,该通信装置可以是芯片或芯片系统),该通信装置包括处理器,用于实现上述任一方面中所涉及的功能。A tenth aspect provides a communication device (for example, the communication device may be a chip or a chip system). The communication device includes a processor for implementing the functions involved in any of the above aspects.
在一些可能的设计中,该通信装置包括存储器,该存储器,用于保存必要的程序指令和数据。In some possible designs, the communication device includes a memory for storing necessary program instructions and data.
在一些可能的设计中,该装置是芯片系统时,可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。In some possible designs, when the device is a system-on-a-chip, it may be composed of a chip or may include chips and other discrete components.
可以理解的是,第三方面至第十方面中任一方面提供的通信装置是芯片时,上述的发送动作/功能可以理解为输出,上述的接收动作/功能可以理解为输入。It can be understood that when the communication device provided in any one of the third to tenth aspects is a chip, the above-mentioned sending action/function can be understood as output, and the above-mentioned receiving action/function can be understood as input.
其中,第三方面至第十面中任一种设计方式所带来的技术效果可参见上述第一方面或第二方面中不同设计方式所带来的技术效果,在此不再赘述。Among them, the technical effects brought by any one of the design methods in the third aspect to the tenth aspect can be referred to the technical effects brought by the different design methods in the above-mentioned first aspect or the second aspect, and will not be described again here.
第十一方面,提供一种通信系统,该通信系统包括上述方面所述的第一终端设备和上述方面所述的网络设备。An eleventh aspect provides a communication system, which includes the first terminal device described in the above aspect and the network device described in the above aspect.
附图说明Description of drawings
图1为本申请实施例提供的一种MIMO系统信道模型示意图;Figure 1 is a schematic diagram of a MIMO system channel model provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图2为本申请实施例提供的一种基于码本传输发送上行信号的流程示意图;Figure 2 is a schematic flow chart of sending uplink signals based on codebook transmission provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图3为本申请实施例提供的一种非码本传输过程示意图;Figure 3 is a schematic diagram of a non-codebook transmission process provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图4为本申请实施例提供的一种确定预编码矩阵的过程示意图;Figure 4 is a schematic diagram of a process for determining a precoding matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图5为本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统的结构示意图;Figure 5 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图6为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图;Figure 6 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图7为本申请实施例提供的一种终端设备的结构示意图;Figure 7 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图8为本申请实施例提供的一种基站的结构示意图;Figure 8 is a schematic structural diagram of a base station provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图9为本申请实施例提供的一种相位校准方法流程示意图一;Figure 9 is a schematic flowchart 1 of a phase calibration method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图10为本申请实施例提供的一种第一终端设备与第二终端设备聚合传输的测量时刻示意图;Figure 10 is a schematic diagram of the measurement time of aggregated transmission of a first terminal device and a second terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图11为本申请实施例提供的一种相位校准方法流程示意图二;Figure 11 is a schematic flow chart 2 of a phase calibration method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图12为本申请实施例提供的一种第一终端设备的结构示意图;Figure 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a first terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图13为本申请实施例提供的一种网络设备的结构示意图。Figure 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
为方便理解本申请实施例提供的技术方案,首先给出本申请相关技术的简要介绍。简要介绍如下:In order to facilitate understanding of the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application, a brief introduction to the relevant technologies of the present application is first given. A brief introduction is as follows:
第一,多输入多输出(multiple input multiple output,MIMO)技术First, multiple input multiple output (MIMO) technology
MIMO技术是指在无线通信领域使用多天线发送和接收信号的技术。其中,网络设备和终端设备使用MIMO技术可以获得功率增益、空间分集(spatial diversity)增益、以及空间复用(spatial multiplexing)增益等。空间分集可以是指在空间中引入信号冗余以达到分集的目的。例如,终端设备通过两根天线发送彼此正交的两个数据流,从而获得分集增益。空间复用可以是指在每根天线在同一时频资源上发送多个独立的数据流,以达到在不增加频谱资源的情况下提高频谱效率的目的。例如,终端设备可以将上行数据层映射(layer mapper)为两个独立的数据流,并通过多根 天线同时发送,从而同一时频资源上的空域资源可以复用。MIMO technology refers to the technology that uses multiple antennas to send and receive signals in the field of wireless communications. Among them, network equipment and terminal equipment use MIMO technology to obtain power gain, spatial diversity gain, spatial multiplexing gain, etc. Spatial diversity can refer to introducing signal redundancy in space to achieve the purpose of diversity. For example, the terminal device transmits two data streams that are orthogonal to each other through two antennas, thereby obtaining diversity gain. Spatial multiplexing can refer to sending multiple independent data streams on the same time-frequency resource for each antenna to achieve the purpose of improving spectrum efficiency without increasing spectrum resources. For example, the terminal device can map the upstream data layer (layer mapper) into two independent data streams and pass them through multiple The antennas transmit simultaneously, so that airspace resources on the same time-frequency resource can be reused.
可以理解,本申请实施例中,层数等于独立的数据流的流数,在此统一说明,以下不再赘述。It can be understood that in the embodiment of the present application, the number of layers is equal to the number of independent data streams, which will be described uniformly here and will not be described again below.
第二,天线端口(antenna port)Second, the antenna port (antenna port)
天线端口定义了在某个符号上的信道。其中,天线端口是逻辑上的概念,一个天线端口可以对应一个发射天线,也可以对应多根天线。天线端口可以通过参考信号(reference signal,RS)(也可以称之为导频)区分:在下行链路(网络设备向终端设备发送信号的链路)中,下行链路和下行参考信号一一对应;在上行链路中,上行链路和上行参考信号一一对应,如果通过多根天线来传输一个参考信号,那么该多根天线对应同一天线端口;如果两个不同的参考信号通过同一根天线传输,那么该天线对应两个独立的天线端口。Antenna ports define the channel on a certain symbol. Among them, the antenna port is a logical concept. One antenna port can correspond to one transmitting antenna or multiple antennas. Antenna ports can be distinguished by reference signals (RS) (also called pilots): In the downlink (the link where the network device sends signals to the terminal device), the downlink and downlink reference signals are one by one. Correspondence; in the uplink, the uplink and the uplink reference signal correspond one to one. If a reference signal is transmitted through multiple antennas, then the multiple antennas correspond to the same antenna port; if two different reference signals pass through the same Antenna transmission, then the antenna corresponds to two independent antenna ports.
示例性的,对应解调参考信号(de-modulation reference signal,DMRS)的天线端口可以称之为DMRS端口,对应下行的信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information reference signal,CSI-RS)的天线端口可以称为CSI-RS端口,对应上行的探测参考信号(sounding reference signal,SRS)的天线端口可以称为SRS端口。其中,CSI-RS用于下行信道的信道状态信息(channel state information,CSI)测量,SRS用于上行信道的CSI测量。For example, the antenna port corresponding to the demodulation reference signal (de-modulation reference signal, DMRS) can be called a DMRS port, and the antenna port corresponding to the downlink channel state information reference signal (channel state information reference signal, CSI-RS) It can be called a CSI-RS port, and the antenna port corresponding to the uplink sounding reference signal (SRS) can be called an SRS port. Among them, CSI-RS is used for channel state information (CSI) measurement of downlink channels, and SRS is used for CSI measurement of uplink channels.
可选地,本申请实施例中,通过天线端口发送的信号所经历的信道,可以通过天线端口对应的参考信号来估计。其中,表一示例性地示出了新无线(new radio,NR)系统中部分参考信号与天线端口索引值的对应关系。可以理解,表一中天线端口索引值仅是示例性的,还可以是其他的索引值,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, the channel experienced by the signal sent through the antenna port can be estimated through the reference signal corresponding to the antenna port. Among them, Table 1 exemplarily shows the corresponding relationship between some reference signals and antenna port index values in the new radio (new radio, NR) system. It can be understood that the antenna port index values in Table 1 are only exemplary and may also be other index values, which are not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
表一
Table I
参见表一,NR系统中,PDSCH DMRS可以支持12个天线端口。其中,网络设备发送PDSCH的层数与PDSCH DMRS的端口数相同。也就是说,网络设备最多支持传输12个PDSCH DMRS符号流。See Table 1. In the NR system, PDSCH DMRS can support 12 antenna ports. Among them, the number of layers used by the network device to send PDSCH is the same as the number of ports of PDSCH DMRS. In other words, the network equipment supports the transmission of up to 12 PDSCH DMRS symbol streams.
可选地,本申请实施例中,PDSCH主要用于下行数据的传输,也可以用于系统消息的传输。示例性的,系统消息可以包括CSI-RS资源配置信息以及SRS资源配置信息。CSI-RS资源配置信息用于终端设备接收来自网络设备的CSI-RS,SRS资源配置信息用于终端设备向网络设备发送SRS。Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, PDSCH is mainly used for the transmission of downlink data, and may also be used for the transmission of system messages. For example, the system message may include CSI-RS resource configuration information and SRS resource configuration information. The CSI-RS resource configuration information is used by the terminal device to receive CSI-RS from the network device, and the SRS resource configuration information is used by the terminal device to send SRS to the network device.
再次参见表一,NR系统中,PDCCH DMRS可以支持1个天线端口。其中,PDCCH用于传输下行控制信息(downlink control information,DCI)。其中,DCI包括终端设备接收PDSCH的调度信息以及网络设备测量SRS得到的上行调度许可信息。示例性的,上行调度许可信息可以包括PUSCH的资源分配、传输预编码矩阵指示(transmission precoding matrix indicator,TPMI)、传输的层数、SRS资源指示(SRS resource indicator,SRI)、或者DMRS端口指示信息等。Referring to Table 1 again, in the NR system, PDCCH DMRS can support 1 antenna port. Among them, PDCCH is used to transmit downlink control information (DCI). The DCI includes the scheduling information of the PDSCH received by the terminal equipment and the uplink scheduling permission information obtained by the network equipment measuring the SRS. Exemplarily, the uplink scheduling grant information may include PUSCH resource allocation, transmission precoding matrix indicator (transmission precoding matrix indicator, TPMI), transmission layer number, SRS resource indicator (SRS resource indicator, SRI), or DMRS port indication information wait.
可选地,本申请实施例中,TPMI用于终端设备使用码本(code book)传输方式发送上行信号 的传输方案中。其中,TPMI对应码本集合中的一个预编码矩阵。SRI用于终端设备使用非码本传输方式发送上行信号的传输方案中。SRI可以关联到一个非量化的预编码矩阵。Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, TPMI is used by the terminal device to send uplink signals using a code book transmission method. in the transmission scheme. Among them, TPMI corresponds to a precoding matrix in the codebook set. SRI is used in transmission schemes where terminal equipment uses non-codebook transmission methods to send uplink signals. SRI can be associated to a non-quantized precoding matrix.
应理解,关于“码本”、“预编码矩阵”、“码本传输方式”、以及“非码本传输方式”等相关概念在下面相关术语介绍中进行具体说明,此处不作进一步介绍。It should be understood that related concepts such as "codebook", "precoding matrix", "codebook transmission method", and "non-codebook transmission method" will be specifically explained in the following introduction of related terms, and will not be further introduced here.
再次参见表一,CSI-RS可以支持32个天线端口(包括1、2、4、8、12、16、24、以及32)。示例性的,网络设备向终端设备发送CSI-RS。相应地,终端设备接收来自网络设备的CSI-RS。终端设备可以对CSI-RS进行信道估计获取CSI,并通过PUSCH或PUCCH将CSI上报给网络设备。Referring to Table 1 again, CSI-RS can support 32 antenna ports (including 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, 16, 24, and 32). For example, the network device sends CSI-RS to the terminal device. Accordingly, the terminal device receives the CSI-RS from the network device. The terminal device can perform channel estimation on the CSI-RS to obtain the CSI, and report the CSI to the network device through PUSCH or PUCCH.
再次参见表一,PUSCH DMRS与SRS均可以支持4个天线端口(包括1、2、或者4)。也就是说,终端设备可以支持传输4个独立的SRS符号流或者PUSCH DMRS符号流。Referring to Table 1 again, both PUSCH DMRS and SRS can support 4 antenna ports (including 1, 2, or 4). In other words, the terminal equipment can support the transmission of 4 independent SRS symbol streams or PUSCH DMRS symbol streams.
第四,信道矩阵Fourth, channel matrix
以图1所示MIMO系统为例,如图1所示,网络设备具有Nt个发送天线,终端设备具有Nr个接收天线。其中,发送信号为X,接收信号为Y,则接收信号Y和发送信号X之间可以满足公式(1)所示的关系。
Y=HX+N                公式(1)
Taking the MIMO system shown in Figure 1 as an example, as shown in Figure 1, the network equipment has Nt transmitting antennas, and the terminal equipment has Nr receiving antennas. Among them, the sending signal is X and the receiving signal is Y, then the relationship between the receiving signal Y and the sending signal
Y=HX+N Formula (1)
其中,X为包含Nt个元素的列向量,Y为包含Nr个元素的列向量,信道矩阵H为包含Nr×Nt个元素的矩阵,N为加性高斯噪声。示例性的,信道矩阵H可以为公式(2)所示的矩阵。
Among them, X is a column vector containing Nt elements, Y is a column vector containing Nr elements, the channel matrix H is a matrix containing Nr×Nt elements, and N is additive Gaussian noise. For example, the channel matrix H may be the matrix shown in formula (2).
如公式(2)所示,信道矩阵H的第i行第j列的hij可以表示从第j个发送天线到第i个接收天线的信道增益。As shown in formula (2), h ij in the i-th row and j-th column of the channel matrix H can represent the channel gain from the j-th transmitting antenna to the i-th receiving antenna.
第五,预编码矩阵Fifth, precoding matrix
在无线通信系统中,可以根据CSI测量获得的信道信息(例如信道矩阵H)对发送信号进行预处理。示例性的,可以在网络设备处预先消除层映射后的多个独立符号流之间的部分或全部干扰,实现数据发送的链路自适应,即按照不同的信道条件采用不同的数据发送方式,尽量降低多层空间复用流符号流之间的干扰。网络设备或终端设备发送信号时进行预编码处理时使用的矩阵即为“预编码矩阵”。在忽略加性高斯噪声N的情况下,网络设备采用预编码处理后,接收信号Y和发送信号X之间的关系可以通过公式(3)确定。
Y=HVX               公式(3)
In a wireless communication system, the transmitted signal can be preprocessed according to the channel information (eg, channel matrix H) obtained by CSI measurement. For example, part or all of the interference between multiple independent symbol streams after layer mapping can be eliminated in advance at the network device to achieve link adaptation of data transmission, that is, using different data transmission methods according to different channel conditions. Minimize interference between multi-layer spatial multiplexing stream symbol streams. The matrix used for precoding processing when network equipment or terminal equipment sends signals is the "precoding matrix". When the additive Gaussian noise N is ignored, after the network device adopts precoding processing, the relationship between the received signal Y and the transmitted signal X can be determined by formula (3).
Y=HVX formula (3)
在公式(3)中,矩阵V为预编码矩阵。可以理解,为消除信道矩阵H中的干扰,V可以为H的逆矩阵H-1。由于H与V相乘后为单位矩阵,即Y=HH-1X=X,这样信道的干扰可以被抵消。In formula (3), matrix V is a precoding matrix. It can be understood that in order to eliminate interference in the channel matrix H, V can be the inverse matrix H-1 of H. Since H and V are multiplied to form the identity matrix, that is, Y=HH -1 X=X, the interference of the channel can be offset.
可以理解,在信道矩阵H右乘V,相当于对发射信号X对应的数据左乘V。换言之,通过对发射信号X对应的数据进行预编码就可以实现对信道矩阵H预编码。It can be understood that multiplying the channel matrix H by V on the right is equivalent to multiplying the data corresponding to the transmitted signal X by V on the left. In other words, by precoding the data corresponding to the transmitted signal X, the channel matrix H can be precoded.
可选地,本申请实施例中,在信道矩阵H不可逆的情况下,预编码矩阵V可以通过对信道矩阵H分解,并进行信道估计得到预编码矩阵V。其中,对信道矩阵H分解的方式可以是奇异值分解(singular value decomposition,SVD),或者特征值分解(eigen value decomposition,EVD),或者还可以是其他的矩阵分解方式,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, when the channel matrix H is irreversible, the precoding matrix V can be obtained by decomposing the channel matrix H and performing channel estimation. Among them, the method of decomposing the channel matrix H may be singular value decomposition (SVD), or eigen value decomposition (EVD), or other matrix decomposition methods. The embodiments of this application are No specific limitation is made.
下面以SVD为例阐述通过信道矩阵H获得预编码矩阵V的过程。The following takes SVD as an example to explain the process of obtaining the precoding matrix V through the channel matrix H.
5.1、SVD5.1.SVD
本申请实施例中,对信道矩阵H进行SVD分解,可以得到公式(4)。
H=USVH             公式(4)
In the embodiment of this application, formula (4) can be obtained by performing SVD decomposition on the channel matrix H.
H=USV H formula (4)
在公式(4)中,矩阵U为Nr×Nr个元素的酉矩阵,矩阵VH为Nt×Nt个元素的酉矩阵,矩阵S为Nr×Nt个元素的对角矩阵。矩阵U的列向量为信道矩阵H与其转置矩阵HT的乘积HHT的正交特征向量。矩阵VH的列向量为HHT的正交特征向量。In formula (4), the matrix U is a unitary matrix of Nr×Nr elements, the matrix V H is a unitary matrix of Nt×Nt elements, and the matrix S is a diagonal matrix of Nr×Nt elements. The column vector of the matrix U is the orthogonal eigenvector of the product HHT of the channel matrix H and its transpose matrix HT. The column vectors of matrix V H are the orthogonal eigenvectors of HHT.
应理解,本申请实施例中,矩阵S可以不是方阵。示例性的,矩阵S可以是如公式(5)所示的矩阵。
It should be understood that in the embodiment of the present application, the matrix S may not be a square matrix. For example, the matrix S may be a matrix shown in formula (5).
可选地,本申请实施例中,矩阵S对角线上元素对应的数值大于或等于第一阈值的元素的数量即为信道矩阵H的秩(rank)。其中,第一阈值可以是0,0.1,或者0.2等;或者,第一阈值还可以是用于衡量矩阵对变化敏感程度的S矩阵对应的条件数(condition number),本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, the number of elements whose values corresponding to the elements on the diagonal of the matrix S are greater than or equal to the first threshold is the rank of the channel matrix H. Wherein, the first threshold may be 0, 0.1, or 0.2, etc.; or, the first threshold may also be the condition number corresponding to the S matrix used to measure the sensitivity of the matrix to changes. This is not the case in the embodiment of this application. Specific limitations.
应理解,本申请实施例中,层数取决于信道矩阵H的秩。示例性的,若信道矩阵H的秩为1,则层数为1;若信道矩阵H的秩为2,则层数为2,在此统一说明,以下不再赘述。It should be understood that in the embodiment of the present application, the number of layers depends on the rank of the channel matrix H. For example, if the rank of the channel matrix H is 1, then the number of layers is 1; if the rank of the channel matrix H is 2, then the number of layers is 2. This is explained uniformly and will not be described again below.
5.2、预编码5.2. Precoding
由于酉矩阵自身与其共轭转置矩阵的乘积为单位矩阵,因此信道矩阵H右乘预编码矩阵V之后,公式(3)可以表示为公式(6)。
Y=USVHVX=USX                公式(6)
Since the product of the unitary matrix itself and its conjugate transposed matrix is the identity matrix, after the channel matrix H is right-multiplied by the precoding matrix V, formula (3) can be expressed as formula (6).
Y=USV H VX=USX Formula (6)
可以理解,公式(6)中的US表示MIMO信道未完全分解为多个彼此独立的信道,但已经根据实际信道对发送过程进行改善。其中,矩阵VH为预编码矩阵的共轭转置矩阵。也就是说,通过对信号矩阵H进行SVD分解,不仅可以获得信道矩阵H的秩,还可以通过VH获得预编码矩阵V。It can be understood that US in formula (6) indicates that the MIMO channel has not been completely decomposed into multiple independent channels, but the transmission process has been improved based on the actual channel. Among them, matrix V H is the conjugate transpose matrix of the precoding matrix. That is to say, by performing SVD decomposition on the signal matrix H, not only the rank of the channel matrix H can be obtained, but also the precoding matrix V can be obtained through V H.
可选地,本申请实施例中,经过层映射得到的多个符号流(对应DMRS端口的符号流)可以通过预编码(即左乘预编码矩阵),将多个符号流散布到各个天线端口(例如CSI-RS端口或者SRS端口)上进行发射。示例性的,以天线端口数为4,且层数为2以及每个符号流中的符号个数为1为例,结合公式(7)进行说明。
Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, the multiple symbol streams (symbol streams corresponding to the DMRS ports) obtained through layer mapping can be spread to each antenna port through precoding (ie, left multiplication of the precoding matrix). (such as CSI-RS port or SRS port). As an example, the number of antenna ports is 4, the number of layers is 2, and the number of symbols in each symbol stream is 1, and the description is given in combination with formula (7).
在公式(7)中,矩阵L为多个符号流对应的矩阵。其中,矩阵L的行向量的个数用于表示层数。预编码矩阵V的行向量个数(行数)等于天线端口数,预编码矩阵V的列向量个数(列数)等于层数(即DMRS端口数)。预编码矩阵V的列向量为预编码向量,每个预编码向量对应一个符号流。预编码矩阵V与矩阵L相乘后,每个符号流(l1或l2)被对应的预编码向量散布到各个天线端口(例如向量[v11l1,v21l1,v31l1,v41l1]T表示符号流l1被散布到各个天线端口上),并且每个天线端口承载多个预编码后的符号流之和。In formula (7), matrix L is a matrix corresponding to multiple symbol streams. Among them, the number of row vectors of matrix L is used to represent the number of layers. The number of row vectors (number of rows) of the precoding matrix V is equal to the number of antenna ports, and the number of column vectors (number of columns) of the precoding matrix V is equal to the number of layers (that is, the number of DMRS ports). The column vectors of the precoding matrix V are precoding vectors, and each precoding vector corresponds to a symbol stream. After the precoding matrix V is multiplied by the matrix L, each symbol stream (l 1 or l 2 ) is spread to each antenna port by the corresponding precoding vector (for example, the vector [v 11 l 1 ,v 21 l 1 ,v 31 l 1 ,v 41 l 1 ]T means that the symbol stream l 1 is spread to each antenna port), and each antenna port carries the sum of multiple precoded symbol streams.
可选地,本申请实施例中,预编码向量中的各个元素可以表示各个天线端口发送预编码向量对应的符号流的权重。其中,基于预编码向量中的各个元素所表示的各个天线端口发送预编码向量对应的符号流的权重,将各个天线端口发送的信号做线性叠加,进而可以在空间某一方向上形成信号较强的区域。也就是说,预编码向量可以指示发送符号流的波束(beam)信息。Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, each element in the precoding vector may represent the weight of the symbol stream corresponding to the precoding vector sent by each antenna port. Among them, based on the weight of the symbol stream corresponding to the precoding vector sent by each antenna port represented by each element in the precoding vector, the signals sent by each antenna port are linearly superimposed, thereby forming a strong signal in a certain direction of space. area. That is, the precoding vector may indicate beam information for transmitting the symbol stream.
应理解,本申请实施例中,“预编码向量”还可以称为“天线权重向量”、“角度向量”、“数字波束(digital beam)向量”、“空域波束基向量”、或者“空域基向量”等。换言之,“预编码向量”、“天线权重向量”、“角度向量”、“数字波束向量”、“空域波束基向量”、以及“空域基向量”之间可以相互替换表述,在此统一说明,以下不再赘述。It should be understood that in the embodiments of this application, "precoding vector" may also be called "antenna weight vector", "angle vector", "digital beam (digital beam) vector", "spatial domain beam basis vector", or "spatial domain basis vector". vector" etc. In other words, "precoding vector", "antenna weight vector", "angle vector", "digital beam vector", "spatial domain beam basis vector", and "spatial domain basis vector" can be interchangeably expressed, and are explained here uniformly. No further details will be given below.
在本申请实施例中,波束可以理解为空间资源,可以指具有能量传输指向性的发送或接收预编码向量。并且,该发送或接收预编码向量能够通过索引信息进行标识,索引信息可以对应配置终端设备的资源标识(identity,ID),比如,索引信息可以对应配置的CSI-RS的标识或者资源;也可以是对应配置的SRS的标识或者资源。可选地,索引信息也可以是通过波束承载的信号或信道显示或隐式承载的索引信息。能量传输指向性可以指通过该预编码向量对所需发送的信号进行预编码处理,经过该预编码处理的信号具有一定的空间指向性,接收经过该预编码向量进行预编码处理后的信号具有较好的接收功率,如满足接收解调信噪比等;能量传输指向性也可以指通过该预编码向量接收来自不同空间位置发送的相同信号具有不同的接收功率。可选地,同一通信装置(比如终端设备或网络设备)可以有不同的预编码向量,不同的设备也可以有不同的预编码向量,即 对应不同的波束。针对通信装置的配置或者能力,一个通信装置在同一时刻可以使用多个不同的预编码向量中的一个或者多个,即同时可以形成一个波束或者多个波束。In this embodiment of the present application, a beam can be understood as a spatial resource, which can refer to a transmit or receive precoding vector with energy transmission directivity. Moreover, the sending or receiving precoding vector can be identified by index information, and the index information can correspond to the resource identifier (identity, ID) of the configured terminal device. For example, the index information can correspond to the identifier or resource of the configured CSI-RS; or it can It is the identifier or resource of the corresponding configured SRS. Optionally, the index information may also be index information carried explicitly or implicitly by a signal or channel carried by a beam. Energy transmission directivity can refer to precoding the signal to be sent through the precoding vector. The signal that has been processed by the precoding has a certain spatial directivity. The signal that has been precoded by the precoding vector has Better receiving power, such as meeting the reception demodulation signal-to-noise ratio; energy transmission directivity can also refer to receiving the same signal sent from different spatial locations through the precoding vector with different receiving powers. Optionally, the same communication device (such as terminal equipment or network equipment) may have different precoding vectors, and different devices may also have different precoding vectors, that is, Corresponds to different beams. Depending on the configuration or capabilities of the communication device, a communication device may use one or more of multiple different precoding vectors at the same time, that is, it may form one beam or multiple beams at the same time.
第六,码本Sixth, codebook
码本为包括多个预编码矩阵的集合。其中,该多个预编码矩阵可以是预先定义的。码本可以被划分为不同类型,例如第三代合作伙伴计划(3rd generation partnership project,3GPP)在技术规范(technical specification,TS)38.214中规定的类型I(type I)码本和类型II(type II)码本。其中,类型I码本可以分为类型I单面板码本和类型II多面板码本,类型II码本可以分为类型II单面板码本和类型II多面板码本,码本的具体设计和实现可以参考TS38.214的相关描述,此处不再赘述。A codebook is a set including multiple precoding matrices. The plurality of precoding matrices may be predefined. Codebooks can be divided into different types, such as Type I (type I) codebooks and Type II (type II) codebooks specified by the 3rd generation partnership project (3GPP) in technical specification (TS) 38.214 II) Codebook. Among them, Type I codebooks can be divided into Type I single-panel codebooks and Type II multi-panel codebooks. Type II codebooks can be divided into Type II single-panel codebooks and Type II multi-panel codebooks. The specific design of the codebooks and For implementation, please refer to the relevant description of TS38.214 and will not be repeated here.
第七,NR系统上行传输方案Seventh, NR system uplink transmission scheme
终端设备可以通过MIMO技术进行上行信号的传输,从而获得多天线处理增益。NR系统上行传输方案包括使用码本传输方式发送上行信号的传输方案,或者使用非码本传输方式发送上行信号的传输方案。Terminal equipment can transmit uplink signals through MIMO technology to obtain multi-antenna processing gains. The uplink transmission scheme of the NR system includes a transmission scheme that uses a codebook transmission method to send uplink signals, or a transmission scheme that uses a non-codebook transmission method to send uplink signals.
7.1、码本传输7.1. Codebook transmission
基于码本传输的方案中,终端设备使用的预编码矩阵取自固定的码本。如图2所示,NR系统基于码本传输发送上行信号的流程,包括如下步骤:In the codebook-based transmission scheme, the precoding matrix used by the terminal equipment is taken from the fixed codebook. As shown in Figure 2, the process of the NR system sending uplink signals based on codebook transmission includes the following steps:
S201、终端设备向网络设备发送SRS。相应地,网络设备接收来自终端设备的SRS。S201. The terminal device sends SRS to the network device. Accordingly, the network device receives the SRS from the terminal device.
S202、网络设备测量来自终端设备的SRS获得上行调度许可信息,并向终端设备发送该上行调度许可信息。相应地,终端设备接收来自网络设备的上行调度许可信息。其中,上行调度许可信息可以包括TPMI、传输的层数、或者SRI等信息。S202. The network device measures the SRS from the terminal device to obtain the uplink scheduling permission information, and sends the uplink scheduling permission information to the terminal device. Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the uplink scheduling permission information from the network device. The uplink scheduling permission information may include information such as TPMI, transmission layer number, or SRI.
S203、终端设备根据上行调度许可信息向网络设备发送上行信号。相应地,网络设备接收来自终端设备的上行信号。S203. The terminal device sends an uplink signal to the network device according to the uplink scheduling permission information. Correspondingly, the network device receives the uplink signal from the terminal device.
可选地,终端设备可以根据TPMI、SRI、以及传输的层数确定码本中对应的预编码矩阵,进而终端设备可以根据该预编码矩阵对上行信号进行预编码。Optionally, the terminal device can determine the corresponding precoding matrix in the codebook based on TPMI, SRI, and the number of transmission layers, and then the terminal device can precode the uplink signal according to the precoding matrix.
示例性的,以网络设备为终端设备配置两个SRS资源为例说明上行调度许可信息。两个SRS资源包含相同的SRS端口数。其中,网络设备通过对两个SRS资源对应的信道测量(例如对SRS端口进行SVD分解),选择最优的上行预编码矩阵和传输的层数,并通过DCI中的SRI将所选择的预编码矩阵对应的SRS资源指示给终端设备。As an example, the uplink scheduling permission information is explained by taking the network device configuring two SRS resources for the terminal device. Both SRS resources contain the same number of SRS ports. Among them, the network equipment selects the optimal uplink precoding matrix and the number of transmission layers by measuring the channels corresponding to the two SRS resources (for example, performing SVD decomposition on the SRS port), and converts the selected precoding matrix through the SRI in the DCI. The SRS resources corresponding to the matrix are indicated to the terminal equipment.
可选地,在步骤S201中,终端设备可以分别用不同的波束(例如模拟波束)发送多个SRS资源对应的SRS。相应地,网络设备对SRS资源的选择(例如通过SRI指示选择的SRS资源),即相当于对上行发送波束的选择。可以理解,在网络设备为终端设备配置了一个SRS资源的情况下,网络设备所选择的预编码矩阵对应于该SRS资源,进而在步骤202中网络设备向终端设备发送的上行调度许可信息可以不包括SRI。Optionally, in step S201, the terminal device may send SRS corresponding to multiple SRS resources using different beams (eg, analog beams). Correspondingly, the network device's selection of SRS resources (for example, the selected SRS resources indicated through SRI) is equivalent to the selection of the uplink transmission beam. It can be understood that when the network device configures an SRS resource for the terminal device, the precoding matrix selected by the network device corresponds to the SRS resource, and the uplink scheduling permission information sent by the network device to the terminal device in step 202 may not be Includes SRI.
可选地,本申请实施例中,上行信号可以由PUSCH承载。其中,PUSCH的DMRS与PSUCH的数据采用相同的预编码矩阵进行预编码。示例性的,终端设备可以按照公式(8)的方式对PUSCH数据进行预编码。
Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, the uplink signal may be carried by PUSCH. Among them, the DMRS of PUSCH and the data of PSUCH are precoded using the same precoding matrix. For example, the terminal equipment can precode the PUSCH data according to formula (8).
参见公式(8),[y0(i),y1(i),…,yv-1(i)]T表示PUSCH数据的符号对应的矩阵,v表示网络设备指示的传输的层数(即PUSCH数据的层数),i表示PUSCH数据的第i个数据符号,预编码矩阵V为TPMI对应的预编码矩阵。其中,预编码矩阵V与[y0(i),y1(i),…,yv-1(i)]T相乘,即表示对PUSCH数据进行预编码。表示经过预编码后映射到端口pn上的数据,n=0,1,…k-1。Referring to formula (8), [y 0 (i), y 1 (i),..., y v-1 (i)]T represents the matrix corresponding to the symbols of the PUSCH data, and v represents the number of transmission layers indicated by the network device ( That is, the number of layers of PUSCH data), i represents the i-th data symbol of PUSCH data, and the precoding matrix V is the precoding matrix corresponding to TPMI. Among them, the precoding matrix V is multiplied by [y 0 (i), y 1 (i),..., y v-1 (i)]T, which means precoding the PUSCH data. Indicates the data mapped to port p n after precoding, n=0,1,...k-1.
可以理解,PUSCH的DMRS也可以采用公式(8)的预编码方式进行预编码,即采用相同的预编码矩阵进行预编码,并将预编码之后的DMRS符号流映射到相同的天线端口。其中,若终端设备发送的SRS本身做了预编码(或者模拟波束赋形),终端设备按照公式(8)对PUSCH和 PUSCH的DMRS进行预编码之后,还要按照SRS预编码的方式作进一步处理。It can be understood that the DMRS of PUSCH can also be precoded using the precoding method of formula (8), that is, the same precoding matrix is used for precoding, and the precoded DMRS symbol stream is mapped to the same antenna port. Among them, if the SRS sent by the terminal equipment itself is precoded (or simulated beamforming), the terminal equipment performs PUSCH and After the DMRS of PUSCH is precoded, it needs to be further processed according to the SRS precoding method.
7.2、非码本传输7.2. Non-codebook transmission
非码本传输方案与码本传输方案的区别在于非码本传输方案的预编码矩阵不再限定在固定码本的有限候选集内。其中,终端设备基于信道互易性(比如时分双工(time division duplex,TDD)系统的信道具有互易性)确定上行预编码矩阵。若上下行信道的互易性存在,则终端设备可以利用下行参考信号(例如CSI-RS)估计出上行信道,并对估计出的信道采用SVD等算法得到上行预编码矩阵。The difference between the non-codebook transmission scheme and the codebook transmission scheme is that the precoding matrix of the non-codebook transmission scheme is no longer limited to a limited candidate set of fixed codebooks. Among them, the terminal equipment determines the uplink precoding matrix based on channel reciprocity (for example, the channel of a time division duplex (TDD) system has reciprocity). If reciprocity between uplink and downlink channels exists, the terminal device can estimate the uplink channel using downlink reference signals (such as CSI-RS), and use algorithms such as SVD on the estimated channel to obtain the uplink precoding matrix.
以图2所示的NR系统基于码本传输发送上行信号的流程为例,NR系统基于非码本传输发送上行信号与基于码本传输发送上行信号的区别在于:Taking the process of sending uplink signals based on codebook transmission in the NR system shown in Figure 2 as an example, the difference between the NR system sending uplink signals based on non-codebook transmission and sending uplink signals based on codebook transmission is:
(1)在步骤S201中,终端设备对来自网络设备的CSI-RS进行测量获得上行预编码矩阵,并且终端设备根据该上行预编码矩阵中的多个预编码向量分别对SRS进行预编码。也就是说,终端设备向网络设备发送预编码后的SRS;(1) In step S201, the terminal device measures the CSI-RS from the network device to obtain an uplink precoding matrix, and the terminal device separately precodes the SRS according to multiple precoding vectors in the uplink precoding matrix. In other words, the terminal device sends the precoded SRS to the network device;
(2)在步骤S202中,上行调度许可信息不包括TPMI,进而在步骤203中,终端设备利用上行调度许可信息中的SRI对应的预编码矩阵确定发送上行信号的预编码矩阵。(2) In step S202, the uplink scheduling grant information does not include TPMI, and in step 203, the terminal device uses the precoding matrix corresponding to the SRI in the uplink scheduling grant information to determine the precoding matrix for transmitting the uplink signal.
示例性的,以图3所示的非码本传输过程示意图为例说明终端设备确定发送上信号的预编码矩阵。如图3所示,假设终端设备根据CSI-RS获得的上行预编码矩阵包括四个预编码向量,并且网络设备为终端设备配置四个SRS资源,终端设备可以对四个SRS资源分别进行预编码后发送。相应地,网络设备接收来自终端设备发送的SRS。其中,四个SRS资源与四个预编码向量一一对应,例如SRS资源#0对应预编码向量#0,SRS资源#1对应预编码向量#1,SRS资源#2对应的预编码向量#2,以及SRS资源#3对应的预编码向量#3。若网络设备对终端设备发送的SRS进行测量,选择了SRS资源#0和SRS资源#1,则网络设备发送的上行调度许可信息中的SRI指示SRS资源#0和SRS资源#1,进而终端设备可以根据该SRS指示确定发送上行信号的预编码矩阵包括预编码向量#0和预编码向量#1。For example, the non-codebook transmission process schematic diagram shown in FIG. 3 is used as an example to illustrate how the terminal device determines the precoding matrix for transmitting the signal. As shown in Figure 3, assuming that the uplink precoding matrix obtained by the terminal device according to CSI-RS includes four precoding vectors, and the network device configures four SRS resources for the terminal device, the terminal device can precode the four SRS resources respectively. sent later. Correspondingly, the network device receives the SRS sent from the terminal device. Among them, four SRS resources correspond to four precoding vectors one-to-one. For example, SRS resource #0 corresponds to precoding vector #0, SRS resource #1 corresponds to precoding vector #1, and SRS resource #2 corresponds to precoding vector #2. , and the precoding vector #3 corresponding to SRS resource #3. If the network device measures the SRS sent by the terminal device and selects SRS resource #0 and SRS resource #1, then the SRI in the uplink scheduling permission information sent by the network device indicates SRS resource #0 and SRS resource #1, and then the terminal device It may be determined according to the SRS indication that the precoding matrix for transmitting the uplink signal includes precoding vector #0 and precoding vector #1.
下面以NR系统为例,介绍SRS资源配置信息中包括的内容。The following takes the NR system as an example to introduce the contents included in the SRS resource configuration information.
在NR系统中,引入SRS资源集(resource set)和SRS资源。SRS资源配置信息可以包括一个或多个SRS资源集,或者一个或多个SRS资源。其中,一个SRS资源集可以包括一个或多个SRS资源。一个SRS资源可以包括以下一项或多项:In the NR system, SRS resource set and SRS resources are introduced. The SRS resource configuration information may include one or more SRS resource sets, or one or more SRS resources. An SRS resource set may include one or more SRS resources. An SRS resource can include one or more of the following:
1、用途指示(usage):在NR系统中,用途指示可以被配置为“波束管理(beammanagement)”、“码本(codebook)”、“非码本(noncodebook)”、或“天线切换(antennaswitching)”;其中,“波束管理”用于上行波束管理,“码本”用于码本传输方案的上行信道信息获取,“非码本”用于非码本传输方案的上行信道信息获取,“天线切换”用于基于SRS天线切换的下行信道信息获取;1. Usage indication (usage): In the NR system, the usage indication can be configured as "beam management (beammanagement)", "codebook (codebook)", "noncodebook (noncodebook)", or "antenna switching (antenna switching)" )"; among them, "beam management" is used for uplink beam management, "codebook" is used for uplink channel information acquisition of codebook transmission schemes, "non-codebook" is used for uplink channel information acquisition of non-codebook transmission schemes, " "Antenna switching" is used to obtain downlink channel information based on SRS antenna switching;
2、天线端口数:在NR系统中,一个SRS资源可以配置1个、2个或者4个天线端口;2. Number of antenna ports: In the NR system, one SRS resource can be configured with 1, 2 or 4 antenna ports;
3、时域位置:在NR系统中,时域位置包括占用的正交频分复用(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing,OFDM)符号的索引、起始位置等。其中,OFDM符号索引可以指示SRS资源占用的OFDM符号的个数,一个SRS资源可以配置1个、2个、4个、8个或者12个OFDM符号,起始位置可以由字段startPosition给出;3. Time domain position: In the NR system, the time domain position includes the index and starting position of the occupied orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbol. Among them, the OFDM symbol index can indicate the number of OFDM symbols occupied by the SRS resource. One SRS resource can be configured with 1, 2, 4, 8 or 12 OFDM symbols, and the starting position can be given by the field startPosition;
4、资源类型:在NR系统中,SRS资源可以分为周期性(periodic)、半持续性(semi-persistent)或者非周期性(aperiodic)几种类型;其中,对于半持续性或者周期性的SRS资源,一个SRS资源内可以包括为终端设备指定的周期以及时隙偏移索引(时隙偏移量);4. Resource type: In the NR system, SRS resources can be divided into periodic (periodic), semi-persistent (semi-persistent) or aperiodic (aperiodic) types; among them, for semi-persistent or periodic SRS resource. An SRS resource can include the period and timeslot offset index (timeslot offset) specified for the terminal device;
5、占用的资源块(resource element,RB)索引:在NR系统中,一个SRS资源可以占用4-272个RB。5. Occupied resource block (resource element, RB) index: In the NR system, one SRS resource can occupy 4-272 RBs.
第八,多终端设备协作传输Eighth, multi-terminal equipment cooperative transmission
多终端设备协作传输是一种侧重于一组终端设备中的多个终端设备进行协作传输的通信技术。其中,多终端设备协作传输可以用于提高系统吞吐量、扩大覆盖范围和增加容量,还可以提高通信可靠性和降低通信时延。多终端设备协作传输可以有助于V2X等场景以及增强移动宽带(enhanced mobile broadband,eMBB)和超高可靠性超低时延通信(ultra-reliable low latency  communication,URLLC)等其它场景。Multi-terminal device cooperative transmission is a communication technology that focuses on cooperative transmission of multiple terminal devices in a group of terminal devices. Among them, multi-terminal equipment cooperative transmission can be used to improve system throughput, expand coverage and increase capacity, and can also improve communication reliability and reduce communication delay. Multi-terminal device cooperative transmission can contribute to V2X and other scenarios as well as enhanced mobile broadband (eMBB) and ultra-reliable low latency communication (ultra-reliable low latency). communication, URLLC) and other scenarios.
可选地,本申请实施例中,一组终端设备中的多个终端设备之间可以通过侧行链路(side link,SL)技术和/或近距离通信技术(例如蓝牙、无线保真(wireless fidelity,Wi-Fi)、或者近场通信(near field communication,NFC)等)进行交互。其中,该一组终端设备可以分为源用户设备(source user equipment,SUE),其他的终端设备可以称为协作用户设备(cooperative user equipment,CUE)。示例性的,SUE可以将待发送的协作数据和发送时间通过SL发送给一个或多个CUE,进而SUE以及一个或多个CUE可以同时发送该协作数据,进而实现协作传输。Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, multiple terminal devices in a group of terminal devices can communicate with each other through side link (SL) technology and/or short-range communication technology (such as Bluetooth, Wireless Fidelity (SL)). wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi), or near field communication (near field communication (NFC), etc.) to interact. Among them, the group of terminal devices can be divided into source user equipment (source user equipment, SUE), and other terminal devices can be called cooperative user equipment (cooperative user equipment, CUE). For example, the SUE can send the collaboration data to be sent and the sending time to one or more CUEs through the SL, and then the SUE and one or more CUEs can send the collaboration data at the same time, thereby realizing collaborative transmission.
应理解,本申请实施例中,SUE与CUE同时发送的协作数据可以是相同的;或者,SUE与CUE协作传输时,传输相同的传输块(transport block,TB)。其中,在NR中,上行传输可以是以TB为基本单位进行数据传输的,该TB可以是指编码前的数据,即每个终端设备待传输的原始数据。It should be understood that in this embodiment of the present application, the cooperation data sent simultaneously by the SUE and the CUE may be the same; or, when the SUE and the CUE cooperate in transmission, they transmit the same transport block (TB). Among them, in NR, uplink transmission may be based on TB as the basic unit for data transmission, and the TB may refer to data before encoding, that is, the original data to be transmitted by each terminal device.
可以理解,本申请实施例中,“协作传输”、“聚合传输”、以及“联合传输”之间含义相同,可以相互替换表述,在此统一说明,以下不再赘述。It can be understood that in the embodiments of the present application, "cooperative transmission", "aggregated transmission" and "joint transmission" have the same meaning and can be expressed interchangeably. They are explained in a unified manner and will not be described again below.
8.1、相干叠加8.1. Coherent superposition
相干叠加可以是指多路信号同向叠加,增加设备接收信号的功率,进而获得功率增益。其中,相干性强表明多路信号叠加后的信号功率强,相干性弱表明多路信号叠加后的信号功率弱。Coherent superposition can refer to the co-directional superposition of multiple signals, which increases the power of the signal received by the device, thereby obtaining power gain. Among them, strong coherence indicates that the signal power after the superposition of multiple signals is strong, and weak coherence indicates that the signal power after the superposition of multiple signals is weak.
8.1.1、相位差8.1.1. Phase difference
相位差可以是指终端设备发送的信号之间的相位差值。换言之,本申请实施例中的相位差可以是指终端设备之间的相位差值。其中,相位差可以用于表示相干性的强弱。示例性的,以终端设备#1发送信号#1和终端设备#2发送信号#2为例,相干性强指的是信号#1与信号#2之间的相位差位于2π的整数倍附近。例如,信号#1与信号#2之间的相位差减去整数倍的2π之后的差值位于第一范围内,该第一范围可以是[-10°,10°]、[-20°,20°]、或者(-40°,40°)等,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。可以理解,信号#1与信号#2之间的相位差越接近2π的整数倍,信号#1与信号#2之间的相干性越强,在信号#1与信号#2之间的相位差为2π的整数倍的情况下,信号#1与信号#2之间的相干性最强,并且信号#1与信号#2同向叠加后获得的功率增益最大。The phase difference may refer to the phase difference between signals sent by the terminal device. In other words, the phase difference in the embodiment of the present application may refer to the phase difference between terminal devices. Among them, the phase difference can be used to indicate the strength of coherence. For example, taking terminal device #1 to send signal #1 and terminal device #2 to send signal #2, strong coherence means that the phase difference between signal #1 and signal #2 is near an integer multiple of 2π. For example, the phase difference between signal #1 and signal #2 minus an integer multiple of 2π is within a first range. The first range may be [-10°, 10°], [-20°, 20°], or (-40°, 40°), etc., the embodiments of the present application do not specifically limit this. It can be understood that the closer the phase difference between signal #1 and signal #2 is to an integer multiple of 2π, the stronger the coherence between signal #1 and signal #2. When it is an integer multiple of 2π, the coherence between signal #1 and signal #2 is the strongest, and the power gain obtained after signal #1 and signal #2 are superimposed in the same direction is the largest.
相应地,相干性弱指的是信号#1与信号#2之间的相位差位于π的奇数倍附近,比如信号#1与信号#2之间的相位差减去2π的整数倍之后的差值位于第一范围外。可以理解,信号#1与信号#2之间的相位差越接近π的奇数倍,信号#1与信号#2之间的相干性越弱,在信号#1与信号#2之间的相位差为π的奇数倍的情况下,信号#1与信号#2之间的相干性最弱,并且信号#1与信号#2同向叠加后相互抵消,不仅无法获得功率增益,还会导致信号#1与信号#2叠加后的功率降低。Correspondingly, weak coherence means that the phase difference between signal #1 and signal #2 is near an odd multiple of π, such as the phase difference between signal #1 and signal #2 minus an integer multiple of 2π. The value is outside the first range. It can be understood that the closer the phase difference between signal #1 and signal #2 is to an odd multiple of π, the weaker the coherence between signal #1 and signal #2. When it is an odd multiple of π, the coherence between signal #1 and signal #2 is the weakest, and signal #1 and signal #2 cancel each other after being superimposed in the same direction. Not only can no power gain be obtained, but also signal # The power reduction after superposition of 1 and signal #2.
8.1.2、频偏8.1.2. Frequency deviation
频偏可以是指终端设备发送的信号之间频率的差值。换言之,本申请实施例中的频偏可以是指终端设备之间频率的差值。其中,频偏会导致两路信号之间产生相位差,该相位差是频偏在时间上的累积。也就是说,两路信号之间的相位差包括两路信号之间的频偏引起的相位差。Frequency offset can refer to the difference in frequency between signals sent by end devices. In other words, the frequency offset in the embodiment of the present application may refer to the frequency difference between terminal devices. Among them, frequency offset will cause a phase difference between the two signals, and this phase difference is the accumulation of frequency offset over time. That is to say, the phase difference between the two signals includes the phase difference caused by the frequency offset between the two signals.
应理解,本申请实施例中,终端设备之间的相位差不仅包括终端设备之间的频偏引起的相位差,还包括由于其他因素(例如随机初相、信道时延、以及同步误差等非理想因素)引起的相位差。其中,结合上述关于预编码矩阵的相关描述,预编码矩阵可以改变信号的状态(例如幅度、频率、或者相位等),因此通过预编码矩阵可以补偿终端设备之间的相位差和/或频偏。示例性的,若预编码矩阵补偿了终端设备之间的相位差,则相当于同时补偿了终端设备之间的频偏;若预编码矩阵仅补偿了终端设备之间的频偏引起的相位差,则该预编码矩阵仅补偿了终端设备之间的频偏,而未补偿终端设备之间的相位差。It should be understood that in the embodiment of the present application, the phase difference between the terminal devices not only includes the phase difference caused by the frequency offset between the terminal devices, but also includes non-uniform phase differences due to other factors (such as random initial phase, channel delay, synchronization error, etc.) The phase difference caused by ideal factors). Among them, combined with the above related description of the precoding matrix, the precoding matrix can change the state of the signal (such as amplitude, frequency, or phase, etc.), so the phase difference and/or frequency offset between terminal devices can be compensated through the precoding matrix. . For example, if the precoding matrix compensates the phase difference between the terminal devices, it is equivalent to compensating the frequency offset between the terminal devices at the same time; if the precoding matrix only compensates for the phase difference caused by the frequency offset between the terminal devices , then the precoding matrix only compensates for the frequency offset between terminal devices, but does not compensate for the phase difference between terminal devices.
可以理解,本申请实施例中,终端设备可以通过预编码矩阵补偿终端设备之间的频偏引起的相位差的方式对频偏进行补偿。It can be understood that in the embodiment of the present application, the terminal equipment can compensate for the frequency offset by using a precoding matrix to compensate the phase difference caused by the frequency offset between the terminal equipment.
8.2、功率一致性8.2. Power consistency
功率一致性可以是指在不同时刻终端设备发送信号的发送功率保持相同或发送功率的变化量小于或等于第一阈值。其中,第一阈值可以是1dB、2dB、或者3dB,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。 Power consistency may mean that the transmission power of the signal transmitted by the terminal device at different times remains the same or the variation of the transmission power is less than or equal to the first threshold. The first threshold may be 1dB, 2dB, or 3dB, which is not specifically limited in the embodiments of this application.
8.3、相位连续性8.3. Phase continuity
相位连续性可以是指在不同时刻的终端设备发送信号的相位变化量小于或等于第二阈值。其中,第二阈值可以是10°、20°、或者40°,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。Phase continuity may mean that the phase change amount of the signal sent by the terminal device at different times is less than or equal to the second threshold. The second threshold may be 10°, 20°, or 40°, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
可选地,本申请实施例中,第一阈值和第二阈值可以是终端设备预先配置的;或者,第一阈值和第二阈值可以是协议约定的;或者,第一阈值和第二阈值可以是网络设备指示的,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, the first threshold and the second threshold may be pre-configured by the terminal device; or the first threshold and the second threshold may be agreed upon by the agreement; or the first threshold and the second threshold may be It is indicated by the network device, and the embodiment of this application does not specifically limit this.
可选地,本申请实施例中,根据在上行传输过程中是否补偿多个终端设备发送的信号之间的相位差和/或频偏,聚合传输可以分为非相干联合传输(non-coherent joint transmission,NCJT)和相干联合传输(coherent joint transmission,CJT),下面分别介绍NCJT和CJT。Optionally, in the embodiment of the present application, the aggregate transmission can be divided into non-coherent joint transmission according to whether the phase difference and/or frequency offset between signals sent by multiple terminal devices is compensated during the uplink transmission process. transmission, NCJT) and coherent joint transmission (coherent joint transmission, CJT). NCJT and CJT are introduced below.
8.4、NCJT8.4, NCJT
NCJT可以是指在聚合传输中,不需要让每个终端设备发送的信号在到达网络设备时达到相干叠加(即同向叠加)的效果。其中,在NCJT中,网络设备根据每个终端设备的CSI测量获得的CSI分别确定每个终端设备对应的预编码矩阵。也就是说,在NCJT中,网络设备确定的预编码矩阵是根据终端设备本身的CSI信息确定的,未考虑其他终端设备的CSI信息,因此网络设备确定的预编码矩阵未补偿终端设备之间的相位差。NCJT can mean that in aggregated transmission, the signal sent by each terminal device does not need to achieve the effect of coherent superposition (ie, co-directional superposition) when it reaches the network device. Among them, in NCJT, the network device determines the precoding matrix corresponding to each terminal device based on the CSI obtained from the CSI measurement of each terminal device. That is to say, in NCJT, the precoding matrix determined by the network device is determined based on the CSI information of the terminal device itself, without considering the CSI information of other terminal devices. Therefore, the precoding matrix determined by the network device does not compensate for the CSI information between terminal devices. phase difference.
示例性的,以图4示出的两个终端设备(终端设备#1和终端设备#2)聚合传输为例说明NCJT确定的预编码矩阵未补偿终端设备之间的相位差。如图4所示,网络设备与终端设备#1之间进行CSI测量,获得终端设备#1该CSI测量时刻下的CSI,然后网络设备根据该CSI确定预编码矩阵#1,并向终端设备#1指示该预编码矩阵#1。同样地,网络设备与终端设备#2之间进行CSI测量获得终端设备#2对应的预编码矩阵#2,并向终端设备#2指示该预编码矩阵#2。其中,对于NCJT,由于预编码矩阵是分别独立确定的,不需要保证终端设备#1和终端设备#2之间的相位是对齐的,即预编码矩阵#1和预编码矩阵#2未补偿终端设备#1与终端设备#2之间的相位差。For example, taking the aggregate transmission of two terminal devices (terminal device #1 and terminal device #2) shown in Figure 4 as an example to illustrate that the precoding matrix determined by NCJT does not compensate for the phase difference between the terminal devices. As shown in Figure 4, CSI measurement is performed between the network device and terminal device #1 to obtain the CSI of terminal device #1 at the CSI measurement time. Then the network device determines precoding matrix #1 based on the CSI and sends it to terminal device #1. 1 indicates the precoding matrix #1. Similarly, CSI measurement is performed between the network device and the terminal device #2 to obtain the precoding matrix #2 corresponding to the terminal device #2, and the precoding matrix #2 is indicated to the terminal device #2. Among them, for NCJT, since the precoding matrices are determined independently, there is no need to ensure that the phases between terminal equipment #1 and terminal equipment #2 are aligned, that is, precoding matrix #1 and precoding matrix #2 do not compensate the terminal Phase difference between device #1 and terminal device #2.
应理解,本申请实施例中,在NCJT中,每个终端设备传输的信道编码前或编码后的数据可以不相同;或者,每个终端设备传输不同的传输块TB;或者,每个终端设备传输相同的TB,但每个终端设备传输的冗余版本(redundancy version,RV)可以不相同。其中,在NR中,TB经过信道编码后包括基本数据和多段冗余数据,基本数据和多段冗余数据依次序存储在缓存区内,RV用于指示终端设备在缓存区读取数据的位置,即RV可以用于指示每个终端设备待传输的编码后的数据。It should be understood that in the embodiment of the present application, in NCJT, the data before or after channel coding transmitted by each terminal device may be different; or, each terminal device transmits a different transmission block TB; or, each terminal device transmits a different transmission block TB; The same TB is transmitted, but the redundancy version (RV) transmitted by each terminal device can be different. Among them, in NR, TB includes basic data and multiple segments of redundant data after channel coding. The basic data and multiple segments of redundant data are stored in the cache area in sequence. RV is used to indicate the location of the terminal device to read the data in the cache area. That is, RV can be used to indicate the encoded data to be transmitted by each terminal device.
8.5、CJT8.5,CJT
CJT可以是指在聚合传输中,需要让每个终端设备发送的信号在到达网络设备时达到相干叠加(即同向叠加)的效果。其中,在CJT中,网络设备根据每个终端设备的CSI测量获得的CSI联合确定每个终端设备对应的预编码矩阵。也就是说,在CJT中确定的预编码矩阵是联合每个终端设备的CSI信息之后综合确定的预编码矩阵,因此CJT中确定的预编码矩阵补偿了多个终端设备之间的相位差。CJT can refer to the need for the signal sent by each terminal device to achieve coherent superposition (i.e., co-directional superposition) effect when it reaches the network device in aggregate transmission. Among them, in CJT, the network device jointly determines the precoding matrix corresponding to each terminal device based on the CSI obtained from the CSI measurement of each terminal device. That is to say, the precoding matrix determined in CJT is a precoding matrix determined comprehensively after combining the CSI information of each terminal device. Therefore, the precoding matrix determined in CJT compensates for the phase difference between multiple terminal devices.
示例性的,以两个终端设备(终端设备#1和终端设备#2)聚合传输为例说明CJT确定的预编码矩阵补偿了终端设备之间的相位差。其中,网络设备可以根据终端设备#1的信道矩阵#1和终端设备#2的信道矩阵#2联合确定终端设备#1的预编码矩阵#3和终端设备#2的预编码矩阵#4,并向终端设备#1指示预编码矩阵#3,以及向终端设备#2指示预编码矩阵#4,进而保证终端设备#1发送的信号与终端设备#2发送的信号之间的相干性,以提升多路信号同向叠加的功率增益。Taking the aggregated transmission of two terminal devices (terminal device #1 and terminal device #2) as an example, it is illustrated that the precoding matrix determined by the CJT compensates for the phase difference between the terminal devices. Wherein, the network device may jointly determine the precoding matrix #3 of the terminal device #1 and the precoding matrix #4 of the terminal device #2 based on the channel matrix #1 of the terminal device #1 and the channel matrix #2 of the terminal device #2, and Indicate precoding matrix #3 to terminal device #1, and precoding matrix #4 to terminal device #2, thereby ensuring the coherence between the signal sent by terminal device #1 and the signal sent by terminal device #2 to improve The power gain of multi-channel signals superimposed in the same direction.
应理解,上述示例中,信道矩阵#1是通过对网络设备与终端设备#1之间的上行信道进行CSI测量获得的,信道矩阵#2是通过对网络设备与终端设备#2之间的上行信道进行CSI测量获得的。其中,信道矩阵#1对应的CSI测量时刻与信道矩阵#2对应的CSI测量时刻相同或者两者之间的差值小于第三阈值。该第三阈值可以是0.2ms、0.3ms、或者1ms,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。It should be understood that in the above example, channel matrix #1 is obtained by performing CSI measurements on the uplink channel between the network device and terminal device #1, and channel matrix #2 is obtained by performing CSI measurements on the uplink channel between the network device and terminal device #2. The channel is obtained by performing CSI measurements. Wherein, the CSI measurement time corresponding to channel matrix #1 is the same as the CSI measurement time corresponding to channel matrix #2 or the difference between them is less than the third threshold. The third threshold may be 0.2ms, 0.3ms, or 1ms, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
可以理解,本申请实施例中,CSI不仅包括信道矩阵,还可以包括干扰信息等,即预编码矩阵可以是根据信道矩阵和/或干扰信息确定的,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。It can be understood that in the embodiment of the present application, CSI not only includes the channel matrix, but may also include interference information, etc. That is, the precoding matrix may be determined based on the channel matrix and/or interference information, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
可选地,本申请实施例中,第三阈值可以是预先配置的;或者,可以是协议约定的,本申请 实施例对此不作具体限定。Optionally, in the embodiment of this application, the third threshold may be pre-configured; or it may be agreed upon in the agreement. The examples do not specifically limit this.
可选地,本申请实施例中,在CJT中,每个终端设备传输的信道编码前的数据可以相同;或者,每个终端设备传输的TB相同;或者,每个终端设备的RV相同。也就是说,在CJT中,每个终端设备发送的协作数据可以是相同的。Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, in CJT, the data before channel coding transmitted by each terminal device may be the same; or the TB transmitted by each terminal device may be the same; or the RV of each terminal device may be the same. That is to say, in CJT, the collaboration data sent by each terminal device can be the same.
目前,通过CJT进行聚合传输,可以将多个终端设备中每个终端设备发送的信号聚合到一起来进行数据传输,到达网络设备时该聚合传输的多路信号形成同向叠加以获得功率增益,达到提升上行传输速率的效果。Currently, through CJT aggregation transmission, the signals sent by each terminal device in multiple terminal devices can be aggregated together for data transmission. When arriving at the network device, the aggregated and transmitted multi-channel signals form a co-directional superposition to obtain power gain. To achieve the effect of increasing the uplink transmission rate.
然而,终端设备本身在不同时刻的相位和/或频偏是变化的,即使在多个终端设备聚合传输过程中通过预编码矩阵补偿了多路信号之间在CSI测量时刻的相位差和/或频偏,但在多个终端设备之间的相位变化和/或频偏变化不一致时,多路信号之间在发送时刻的相位差和/或频偏无法达到同向叠加的相干性要求,会导致多个终端设备聚合传输时无法获得功率增益。However, the phase and/or frequency offset of the terminal equipment itself changes at different times, even if the phase difference and/or frequency offset between the multi-channel signals at the CSI measurement time is compensated through the precoding matrix during the aggregate transmission of multiple terminal equipment. Frequency offset, but when the phase changes and/or frequency offset changes between multiple terminal devices are inconsistent, the phase difference and/or frequency offset between the multi-channel signals at the time of transmission cannot meet the coherence requirements of co-directional superposition, which will As a result, power gain cannot be obtained when multiple terminal devices aggregate transmission.
鉴于此,本申请实施例提供一种相位校准方法,可以在多个终端设备之间相位变化和/或频偏变化不一致时提高聚合传输的多路信号的相干性以提高多路信号同向叠加的功率增益。In view of this, embodiments of the present application provide a phase calibration method that can improve the coherence of aggregated and transmitted multi-channel signals when the phase changes and/or frequency offset changes between multiple terminal devices are inconsistent, so as to improve the co-directional superposition of multi-channel signals. power gain.
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图,对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行描述。其中,在本申请的描述中,除非另有说明,“/”表示前后关联的对象是一种“或”的关系,例如,A/B可以表示A或B;本申请中的“和/或”仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况,其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。并且,在本申请的描述中,除非另有说明,“多个”是指两个或多于两个。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达,是指的这些项中的任意组合,包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如,a,b,或c中的至少一项(个),可以表示:a,b,c,a-b,a-c,b-c,或a-b-c,其中a,b,c可以是单个,也可以是多个。另外,为了便于清楚描述本申请实施例的技术方案,在本申请的实施例中,采用了“第一”、“第二”等字样对功能和作用基本相同的相同项或相似项进行区分。本领域技术人员可以理解“第一”、“第二”等字样并不对数量和执行次序进行限定,并且“第一”、“第二”等字样也并不限定一定不同。同时,在本申请实施例中,“示例性的”或者“例如”等词用于表示作例子、例证或说明。本申请实施例中被描述为“示例性的”或者“例如”的任何实施例或设计方案不应被解释为比其它实施例或设计方案更优选或更具优势。确切而言,使用“示例性的”或者“例如”等词旨在以具体方式呈现相关概念,便于理解。The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application will be described below with reference to the drawings in the embodiments of the present application. Among them, in the description of this application, unless otherwise stated, "/" means that the related objects are an "or" relationship. For example, A/B can mean A or B; "and/or" in this application "It is just an association relationship that describes related objects. It means that there can be three relationships. For example, A and/or B can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and B exists alone. Among them, A ,B can be singular or plural. Furthermore, in the description of this application, unless otherwise specified, "plurality" means two or more than two. "At least one of the following" or similar expressions thereof refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of a single item (items) or a plurality of items (items). For example, at least one of a, b, or c can mean: a, b, c, a-b, a-c, b-c, or a-b-c, where a, b, c can be single or multiple . In addition, in order to facilitate a clear description of the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, in the embodiments of the present application, words such as “first” and “second” are used to distinguish identical or similar items with basically the same functions and effects. Those skilled in the art can understand that words such as "first" and "second" do not limit the number and execution order, and words such as "first" and "second" do not limit the number and execution order. At the same time, in the embodiments of this application, words such as "exemplary" or "for example" are used to represent examples, illustrations or explanations. Any embodiment or design described as "exemplary" or "such as" in the embodiments of the present application is not to be construed as preferred or advantageous over other embodiments or designs. Rather, the use of words such as "exemplary" or "such as" is intended to present related concepts in a concrete manner that is easier to understand.
在本申请实施例中,“指示”可以包括直接指示和间接指示,也可以包括显式指示和隐式指示。将某一信息(如下文的指示第一终端设备接收的第一探测参考信号SRS资源配置信息用于第一终端设备接收SRS)所指示的信息称为待指示信息,则具体实现过程中,对待指示信息进行指示的方式有很多种,例如但不限于,可以直接指示待指示信息,如待指示信息本身或者该待指示信息的索引等。也可以通过指示其他信息来间接指示待指示信息,其中该其他信息与待指示信息之间存在关联关系。还可以仅仅指示待指示信息的一部分,而待指示信息的其他部分则是已知的或者提前约定的。例如,还可以借助预先约定(例如协议规定)的各个信息的排列顺序来实现对特定信息的指示,从而在一定程度上降低指示开销。In the embodiment of this application, "instruction" may include direct instruction and indirect instruction, and may also include explicit instruction and implicit instruction. The information indicated by certain information (such as the following first sounding reference signal SRS resource configuration information indicating that the first terminal equipment receives the SRS is used by the first terminal equipment to receive the SRS) is called information to be indicated. In the specific implementation process, it is treated as There are many ways to indicate information. For example, but not limited to, the information to be indicated can be directly indicated, such as the information to be indicated itself or the index of the information to be indicated, etc. The information to be indicated may also be indirectly indicated by indicating other information, where there is an association relationship between the other information and the information to be indicated. It is also possible to indicate only a part of the information to be indicated, while other parts of the information to be indicated are known or agreed in advance. For example, the indication of specific information can also be achieved by means of a pre-agreed (for example, protocol stipulated) arrangement order of each piece of information, thereby reducing the indication overhead to a certain extent.
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统。例如:正交频分多址(orthogonal frequency-division multiple access,OFDMA)、单载波频分多址(single carrier FDMA,SC-FDMA)和其它系统等。术语“系统”可以和“网络”相互替换。OFDMA系统可以实现诸如演进通用无线陆地接入(evolved universal terrestrial radio access,E-UTRA)、超级移动宽带(ultra mobile broadband,UMB)等无线技术。E-UTRA是通用移动通信系统(universal mobile telecommunications system,UMTS)演进版本。3GPP在长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)和基于LTE演进的各种版本是使用E-UTRA的新版本。5G通信系统是正在研究当中的下一代通信系统。其中,5G通信系统包括非独立组网(non-standalone,简称NSA)的5G移动通信系统,独立组网(standalone,简称SA)的5G移动通信系统,或者,NSA的5G移动通信系统和SA的5G移动通信系统。此外,通信系统还可以适用于面向未来的通信技术,都适用本申请实施例提供的技术方案。上述适用本申请的通信系统仅是举例说明,适用本申请的通信系统不限于此,在此统一说明,以下不再赘述。The technical solutions of the embodiments of this application can be applied to various communication systems. For example: orthogonal frequency-division multiple access (OFDMA), single carrier frequency division multiple access (single carrier FDMA, SC-FDMA) and other systems. The term "system" is interchangeable with "network". The OFDMA system can implement wireless technologies such as evolved universal terrestrial radio access (E-UTRA) and ultra mobile broadband (UMB). E-UTRA is an evolved version of Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS). 3GPP's long term evolution (LTE) and various versions based on LTE evolution are new versions using E-UTRA. 5G communication system is the next generation communication system under research. Among them, the 5G communication system includes a non-standalone (NSA) 5G mobile communication system, a standalone (SA) 5G mobile communication system, or NSA's 5G mobile communication system and SA's 5G mobile communication system. In addition, the communication system can also be adapted to future-oriented communication technologies, all of which are applicable to the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of this application. The above-mentioned communication systems applicable to the present application are only examples. The communication systems applicable to the present application are not limited to these and will be explained uniformly here, and will not be described in detail below.
此外,本申请实施例描述的通信架构以及业务场景是为了更加清楚的说明本申请实施例的技 术方案,并不构成对于本申请实施例提供的技术方案的限定,本领域普通技术人员可知,随着通信架构的演变和新业务场景的出现,本申请实施例提供的技术方案对于类似的技术问题,同样适用。In addition, the communication architecture and business scenarios described in the embodiments of this application are to more clearly illustrate the technical aspects of the embodiments of this application. The technical solution does not constitute a limitation on the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present application. Persons of ordinary skill in the art will know that with the evolution of communication architecture and the emergence of new business scenarios, the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present application is not suitable for similar technologies. question, the same applies.
如图5所示,为本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统,该通信系统包括一个或多个网络设备50(图5以通信系统包括一个网络设备50为例进行示意),以及与每个网络设备50连接的多个终端设备60。其中,多个终端设备60之间可以聚合传输。As shown in Figure 5, a communication system is provided in this embodiment of the present application. The communication system includes one or more network devices 50 (Figure 5 takes the communication system including one network device 50 as an example), and each A plurality of terminal devices 60 are connected to the network device 50 . Among them, transmission among multiple terminal devices 60 can be aggregated.
一种可能的实现方式中,网络设备获取第一指示信息,并向第一终端设备发送第一指示信息,该第一指示信息指示第一终端设备接收的第一SRS资源配置信息用于第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准。相应地,第一终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息,并根据第一指示信息在第一SRS资源配置信息指示的时频资源上接收来自第二终端设备的第一SRS,并对第一SRS进行测量获得第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的相位差信息和/或频偏信息。其中,相位差信息和/或频偏信息用于补偿第一终端设备与第二终端设备发送第一信号时对应的相位差和/或频偏。In a possible implementation, the network device obtains the first indication information and sends the first indication information to the first terminal device. The first indication information indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information received by the first terminal device is used for the first Phase calibration between end equipment and other end equipment. Correspondingly, the first terminal device receives the first indication information from the network device, receives the first SRS from the second terminal device on the time-frequency resource indicated by the first SRS resource configuration information according to the first indication information, and configures the first SRS for the first terminal device. An SRS performs measurements to obtain phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the first terminal equipment and the second terminal equipment. The phase difference information and/or frequency offset information are used to compensate the corresponding phase difference and/or frequency offset when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal.
上述方案的具体实现将在下述实施例中详细阐述,在此不再赘述。The specific implementation of the above solution will be explained in detail in the following embodiments, and will not be described again here.
由于本申请实施例中,第一指示信息指示第一终端设备接收的第一SRS资源配置信息用于第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准,使得第一终端设备可以接收来自第二终端设备的第一SRS,并对该第一SRS进行测量获得第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的相位差信息和/或频偏信息,通过该相位差信息和/或频偏信息可以补偿第一终端设备与第二终端设备同时发送第一信号时由于第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的相位变化和/或频偏变化不一致造成的相位差,进而可以提高第一终端设备和第二终端设备聚合传输的信号之间的相干性,以提升多路信号同向叠加的功率增益。因此,基于本申请实施例提供的相位校准方法,可以在多个终端设备之间相位变化和/或频偏变化不一致时提高聚合传输的多路信号的相干性以提升多路信号同向叠加的功率增益。In this embodiment of the present application, the first indication information indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information received by the first terminal device is used for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices, so that the first terminal device can receive data from the second terminal device. The first SRS of the terminal equipment, and measuring the first SRS to obtain the phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the first terminal equipment and the second terminal equipment, through which the phase difference information and/or the frequency offset information can be Compensating for the phase difference caused by inconsistent phase changes and/or frequency offset changes between the first terminal device and the second terminal device when the first terminal device and the second terminal device transmit the first signal at the same time, thereby improving the performance of the first terminal device and the second terminal device to aggregate the coherence between the transmitted signals to improve the power gain of co-directional superposition of multi-channel signals. Therefore, based on the phase calibration method provided by the embodiments of the present application, when the phase changes and/or frequency offset changes among multiple terminal devices are inconsistent, the coherence of the aggregated and transmitted multi-channel signals can be improved to improve the co-directional superposition of the multi-channel signals. Power gain.
可选地,本申请实施例中的终端设备60,可以是用于实现无线通信功能的设备,例如终端或者可用于终端中的芯片等。其中,终端可以是5G网络或者未来演进的公共陆地移动网络(public land mobile network,PLMN)中的用户设备(user equipment,UE)、接入终端、终端单元、终端站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、无线通信设备、终端代理或终端装置等。接入终端可以是蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(session initiation protocol,SIP)电话、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字处理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备或可穿戴设备,虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)终端设备、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)终端设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程医疗(remote medical)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端等。可选地,终端设备可以是移动的,也可以是固定的。Optionally, the terminal device 60 in the embodiment of the present application may be a device used to implement wireless communication functions, such as a terminal or a chip that can be used in a terminal. Among them, the terminal can be a user equipment (UE), access terminal, terminal unit, terminal station, mobile station, mobile station, in a 5G network or a future evolved public land mobile network (PLMN). Remote stations, remote terminals, mobile devices, wireless communication equipment, terminal agents or terminal devices, etc. The access terminal may be a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (WLL) station, a personal digital assistant (PDA), or a device with wireless communications Functional handheld devices, computing devices or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, vehicle-mounted devices or wearable devices, virtual reality (VR) terminal devices, augmented reality (AR) terminal devices, industrial control (industrial) Wireless terminals in control, wireless terminals in self-driving, wireless terminals in remote medical, wireless terminals in smart grid, wireless terminals in transportation safety Terminals, wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, etc. Optionally, the terminal device can be mobile or fixed.
可选地,本申请实施例中的网络设备50可以是与终端设备60通信的设备。该网络设备50可以包括传输接收点(transmission and reception point,TRP)、基站、分离式基站的远端射频单元(remote radio unit,RRU)或基带单元(baseband unit,BBU)(也可称为数字单元(digital unit,DU))、宽带网络业务网关(broadband network gateway,BNG),汇聚交换机、非3GPP接入设备、中继站或接入点等。其中,图5中以网络设备为基站为例进行示意,在此统一说明,以下不再赘述。此外,本申请实施例中的基站可以是全球移动通信系统(global system for mobile communication,GSM)或码分多址(code division multiple access,CDMA)网络中的基站收发信台(base transceiver station,BTS)、宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access,WCDMA)中的NB(NodeB)、LTE中的eNB或eNodeB(evolutional NodeB)、云无线接入网络(cloud radio access network,CRAN)场景下的无线控制器或者5G通信系统中的基站、或者未来演进网络中的基站等,在此不作具体限定。Optionally, the network device 50 in the embodiment of the present application may be a device that communicates with the terminal device 60 . The network device 50 may include a transmission and reception point (TRP), a base station, a remote radio unit (RRU) of a detached base station, or a baseband unit (BBU) (also known as a digital Unit (digital unit, DU)), broadband network service gateway (broadband network gateway, BNG), aggregation switch, non-3GPP access equipment, relay station or access point, etc. Among them, Figure 5 takes the network device as a base station as an example for illustration, which will be explained uniformly and will not be described again below. In addition, the base station in the embodiment of the present application may be a base transceiver station (BTS) in a global system for mobile communication (GSM) or a code division multiple access (code division multiple access, CDMA) network. ), NB (NodeB) in wideband code division multiple access (WCDMA), eNB or eNodeB (evolutional NodeB) in LTE, and cloud radio access network (cloud radio access network, CRAN) scenarios The wireless controller or the base station in the 5G communication system, or the base station in the future evolution network, etc. are not specifically limited here.
可选地,在本申请实施例中,网络设备50和终端设备60均可以配置有多根天线,以支持MIMO技术。进一步来说,网络设备50和终端设备60既可以支持单用户MIMO(single-user MIMO, SU-MIMO)技术,也可以支持多用户MIMO(multi-user MIMO,MU-MIMO)。其中,MU-MIMO技术可以基于空分多址(space division Multiple access,SDMA)技术来实现。由于配置有多根天线,网络设备50和终端设备60还可以灵活支持单入单出(Single Input Single Output,SISO)技术、单入多出(Single Input Multiple Output,SIMO)和多入单出(Multiple Input Single Output,MISO)技术,以实现各种分集(例如但不限于发射分集和接收分集)和复用技术,其中分集技术可以包括但不限于发射分集(transmit diversity,TD)技术和接收分集(receive diversity,RD)技术,复用技术可以为空间复用(spatial multiplexing)技术。而且上述各种技术还可以包括多种实现方案,例如发射分集技术可以包括但不限于:空时发射分集(space-time transmit diversity,STTD)、空频发射分集(space-frequency transmit diversity,SFTD)、时间切换发射分集(time switched transmit diversity,TSTD)、频率切换发射分集(frequency switch transmit diversity,FSTD)、正交发射分集(orthogonal transmit diversity,OTD)、循环延迟分集(cyclic delay diversity,CDD)等分集方式,以及上述各种分集方式经过衍生、演进以及组合后获得的分集方式。例如,目前LTE标准便采用了空时块编码(space time block coding,STBC)、空频块编码(space frequency block coding,SFBC)和CDD等发射分集方式。上文以举例的方式对发射分集进行了的概括性的描述。本领域技术人员应当明白,除上述实例外,发射分集还包括其他多种实现方式。因此,上述介绍不应理解为对本申请实施例提供的技术方案的限制,本申请实施例提供的技术方案应理解为适用于各种可能的发射分集方案。Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, both the network device 50 and the terminal device 60 may be configured with multiple antennas to support MIMO technology. Furthermore, the network device 50 and the terminal device 60 can support single-user MIMO (single-user MIMO, SU-MIMO) technology can also support multi-user MIMO (multi-user MIMO, MU-MIMO). Among them, MU-MIMO technology can be implemented based on space division multiple access (space division multiple access, SDMA) technology. Due to the configuration of multiple antennas, the network device 50 and the terminal device 60 can also flexibly support Single Input Single Output (SISO) technology, Single Input Multiple Output (SIMO) and Multiple Input Single Output (SIMO) technology. Multiple Input Single Output (MISO) technology to achieve various diversity (such as but not limited to transmit diversity and receive diversity) and multiplexing technologies, where the diversity technology may include but is not limited to transmit diversity (TD) technology and receive diversity (receive diversity, RD) technology, the multiplexing technology can be spatial multiplexing (spatial multiplexing) technology. Moreover, the various above-mentioned technologies may also include a variety of implementation solutions. For example, transmit diversity technologies may include but are not limited to: space-time transmit diversity (STTD), space-frequency transmit diversity (SFTD). , time switched transmit diversity (TSTD), frequency switch transmit diversity (FSTD), orthogonal transmit diversity (OTD), cyclic delay diversity (CDD), etc. Diversity methods, as well as diversity methods obtained through derivation, evolution and combination of the various diversity methods mentioned above. For example, the current LTE standard adopts transmit diversity methods such as space time block coding (STBC), space frequency block coding (space frequency block coding (SFBC)) and CDD. The above provides a general description of transmit diversity by way of example. Those skilled in the art should understand that, in addition to the above examples, transmit diversity also includes various other implementations. Therefore, the above introduction should not be understood as a limitation on the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application, and the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application should be understood as applicable to various possible transmit diversity solutions.
可选地,本申请实施例中的网络设备50和/或终端设备60具有处理基带信号的功能,例如在下行方向可以具有编码(coding)、速率匹配(rate matching)、加扰(scrambling)、调制(modulation)、层映射中的一个或多个功能;在上行方向可以具有解码(coding)、速率解匹配(rate de-matching)、解加扰(de-scrambling)、解调制(de-modulation)、信道估计(channel estimation)/均衡(equalization)中一个或多个功能。Optionally, the network device 50 and/or the terminal device 60 in the embodiment of the present application have the function of processing baseband signals, for example, in the downlink direction, they may have coding, rate matching, scrambling, One or more functions in modulation and layer mapping; in the uplink direction, it can have decoding, rate de-matching, de-scrambling, and de-modulation ), one or more functions in channel estimation/equalization.
可选地,本申请实施例中的网络设备50和/或终端设备60具有处理中频信号和/或射频信号,以及提供部分基带信号的处理功能,例如,在下行方向可以具有资源映射(resource element mapping)、数字波束赋形(digital beam forming,DBF)、快速傅里叶反变换(inverse fast fourier transformation,IFFT)和循环前缀添加(cyclic prefix addition)、模拟波束赋形(analog beam forming,ABF)、模数转换(analog to digital)中的一个或者多个功能;在上行方向可以具有快速傅里叶变换(fast fourier transformation,FFT)和带循环前缀移除(cyclic prefix removal)、模拟波束赋形、模数转换、数字波束赋形、资源解映射(resource element de-mapping)中的一个或者多个功能。Optionally, the network device 50 and/or the terminal device 60 in the embodiment of the present application have the processing function of processing intermediate frequency signals and/or radio frequency signals, and providing partial baseband signals. For example, they may have resource mapping (resource element) in the downlink direction. mapping), digital beam forming (DBF), inverse fast fourier transformation (IFFT) and cyclic prefix addition (cyclic prefix addition), analog beam forming (ABF) , one or more functions in analog to digital conversion; in the uplink direction, it can have fast fourier transformation (FFT) and cyclic prefix removal (cyclic prefix removal), analog beamforming , one or more functions in analog-to-digital conversion, digital beamforming, and resource element de-mapping.
可选地,本申请实施例中的网络设备50与终端设备60也可以称之为通信装置,其可以是一个通用设备或者是一个专用设备,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。Optionally, the network device 50 and the terminal device 60 in the embodiment of the present application can also be called a communication device, which can be a general device or a special device, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
可选地,本申请实施例中的终端设备50或网络设备60的相关功能可以由一个设备实现,也可以由多个设备共同实现,还可以是由一个设备内的一个或多个功能模块实现,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。可以理解的是,上述功能既可以是硬件设备中的网络元件,也可以是在专用硬件上运行的软件功能,或者是硬件与软件的结合,或者是平台(例如,云平台)上实例化的虚拟化功能。Optionally, the relevant functions of the terminal device 50 or the network device 60 in the embodiment of the present application may be implemented by one device, may be implemented by multiple devices together, or may be implemented by one or more functional modules within one device. , the embodiments of this application do not specifically limit this. It can be understood that the above functions can be either network elements in hardware devices, software functions running on dedicated hardware, or a combination of hardware and software, or instantiated on a platform (for example, a cloud platform) Virtualization capabilities.
例如,本申请实施例中的终端设备60或网络设备50的相关功能可以通过图6中的通信装置600来实现。图6所示为本申请实施例提供的通信装置600的结构示意图。该通信装置600包括一个或多个处理器601,通信线路602,以及至少一个通信接口(图6中仅是示例性的以包括通信接口604,以及一个处理器601为例进行说明),可选的还可以包括存储器603。For example, the related functions of the terminal device 60 or the network device 50 in the embodiment of the present application can be implemented through the communication device 600 in FIG. 6 . FIG. 6 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 600 provided by an embodiment of the present application. The communication device 600 includes one or more processors 601, communication lines 602, and at least one communication interface (FIG. 6 is only an example of including a communication interface 604 and a processor 601 for illustration). Optional may also include memory 603.
处理器601可以是一个通用中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU),微处理器,特定应用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit,ASIC),或一个或多个用于控制本申请方案程序执行的集成电路。The processor 601 can be a general central processing unit (CPU), a microprocessor, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or one or more processors used to control the execution of the program of the present application. integrated circuit.
通信线路602可包括一通路,用于连接不同组件之间。Communication line 602 may include a path for connecting between different components.
通信接口604,可以是收发模块用于与其他设备或通信网络通信,如以太网,RAN,无线局域网(wireless local area networks,WLAN)等。例如,收发模块可以是收发器、收发机一类的装置。可选的,通信接口604也可以是位于处理器601内的收发电路,用以实现处理器的信号输入和信号输出。 The communication interface 604 may be a transceiver module used to communicate with other devices or communication networks, such as Ethernet, RAN, wireless local area networks (WLAN), etc. For example, the transceiver module may be a device such as a transceiver or a transceiver. Optionally, the communication interface 604 may also be a transceiver circuit located within the processor 601 to implement signal input and signal output of the processor.
存储器603可以是具有存储功能的装置。例如可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)或可存储静态信息和指令的其他类型的静态存储设备,随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)或者可存储信息和指令的其他类型的动态存储设备,也可以是电可擦可编程只读存储器(electrically erasable programmable read-only memory,EEPROM)、只读光盘(compact disc read-only memory,CD-ROM)或其他光盘存储、光碟存储(包括压缩光碟、激光碟、光碟、数字通用光碟、蓝光光碟等)、磁盘存储介质或者其他磁存储设备、或者能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其他介质,但不限于此。存储器可以是独立存在,通过通信线路602与处理器相连接。存储器也可以和处理器集成在一起。The memory 603 may be a device with a storage function. For example, it can be read-only memory (ROM) or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, random access memory (random access memory, RAM) or other types of things that can store information and instructions. Dynamic storage devices can also be electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), compact disc read-only memory (CD-ROM) or other optical disk storage, optical disc storage ( Including compressed optical discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.), magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices, or can be used to carry or store desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and can be stored by a computer. any other medium, but not limited to this. The memory may exist independently and be connected to the processor through a communication line 602 . Memory can also be integrated with the processor.
其中,存储器603用于存储执行本申请方案的计算机执行指令,并由处理器601来控制执行。处理器601用于执行存储器603中存储的计算机执行指令,从而实现本申请实施例中提供的相位校准方法。Among them, the memory 603 is used to store computer execution instructions for executing the solution of the present application, and is controlled by the processor 601 for execution. The processor 601 is configured to execute computer execution instructions stored in the memory 603, thereby implementing the phase calibration method provided in the embodiment of the present application.
或者,本申请实施例中,也可以是处理器601执行本申请下述实施例提供的相位校准方法的处理相关的功能,通信接口604负责与其他设备或通信网络通信,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。Alternatively, in the embodiment of the present application, the processor 601 may also perform functions related to the processing of the phase calibration method provided in the following embodiments of the present application, and the communication interface 604 is responsible for communicating with other devices or communication networks. In this embodiment of the present application, No specific limitation is made.
可选地,本申请实施例中的存储器603还可以用于存储下述实施例中所描述的信息或参数,例如第一SRS资源配置信息、第一指示信息、码本、以及相位差信息和/或频偏信息。其中,相位差信息和/或频偏信息包括多个终端设备之间的相位差和/或频偏。示例性的,以多个终端设备包括第一终端设备和第二终端设备为例,相位差信息和/或频偏信息包括第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的相位差和/或频偏。以多个终端设备包括第一终端设备、第二终端设备以及第三终端设备为例,相位差信息包括第一终端设备、第二终端设备以及第三终端设备之间的相位差和/或频偏。Optionally, the memory 603 in the embodiment of the present application can also be used to store information or parameters described in the following embodiments, such as first SRS resource configuration information, first indication information, codebook, and phase difference information. /or frequency offset information. The phase difference information and/or frequency offset information includes phase differences and/or frequency offsets between multiple terminal devices. For example, taking a plurality of terminal devices including a first terminal device and a second terminal device, the phase difference information and/or frequency offset information includes the phase difference and/or frequency between the first terminal device and the second terminal device. Partial. Taking multiple terminal devices including a first terminal device, a second terminal device, and a third terminal device as an example, the phase difference information includes the phase difference and/or frequency between the first terminal device, the second terminal device, and the third terminal device. Partial.
本申请实施例中的计算机执行指令也可以称之为应用程序代码,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。The computer-executed instructions in the embodiments of the present application may also be called application codes, which are not specifically limited in the embodiments of the present application.
在具体实现中,作为一种实施例,处理器601可以包括一个或多个CPU,例如图6中的CPU0和CPU1。In specific implementation, as an embodiment, the processor 601 may include one or more CPUs, such as CPU0 and CPU1 in FIG. 6 .
在具体实现中,作为一种实施例,通信装置600可以包括多个处理器,例如图6中的处理器601和处理器608。这些处理器中的每一个可以是一个单核(single-CPU)处理器,也可以是一个多核(multi-CPU)处理器。这里的处理器可以指一个或多个设备、电路、和/或用于处理数据(例如计算机程序指令)的处理核。In specific implementation, as an embodiment, the communication device 600 may include multiple processors, such as the processor 601 and the processor 608 in FIG. 6 . Each of these processors may be a single-CPU processor or a multi-CPU processor. A processor here may refer to one or more devices, circuits, and/or processing cores for processing data (eg, computer program instructions).
在具体实现中,作为一种实施例,通信装置600还可以包括输出设备605和输入设备606。输出设备605和处理器601通信,可以以多种方式来显示信息。In specific implementation, as an embodiment, the communication device 600 may also include an output device 605 and an input device 606. Output device 605 communicates with processor 601 and can display information in a variety of ways.
上述的通信装置600可以是一个通用装置或者是一个专用装置。例如通信装置600可以是台式机、便携式电脑、网络服务器、掌上电脑(personal digital assistant,PDA)、移动手机、平板电脑、无线终端设备、嵌入式设备或具有图6中类似结构的设备。本申请实施例不限定通信装置600的类型。The above-mentioned communication device 600 may be a general-purpose device or a special-purpose device. For example, the communication device 600 may be a desktop computer, a portable computer, a network server, a personal digital assistant (PDA), a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a wireless terminal device, an embedded device, or a device with a similar structure as shown in FIG. 6 . The embodiment of the present application does not limit the type of communication device 600.
结合图6所示的通信装置600的结构示意图,以通信装置600为图5中的终端设备60为例,示例性的,图7为本申请实施例提供的终端设备60的一种具体结构形式。With reference to the schematic structural diagram of the communication device 600 shown in FIG. 6 , taking the communication device 600 as the terminal device 60 in FIG. 5 as an example, FIG. 7 illustrates a specific structural form of the terminal device 60 provided by the embodiment of the present application. .
其中,在一些实施例中,图6中的处理器601的功能可以通过图7中的处理器710实现。In some embodiments, the functions of the processor 601 in Figure 6 can be implemented by the processor 710 in Figure 7 .
在一些实施例中,图6中的通信接口604的功能可以通过图7中的天线1,天线2,移动通信模块750,无线通信模块760等实现。In some embodiments, the function of communication interface 604 in Figure 6 can be implemented through antenna 1, antenna 2, mobile communication module 750, wireless communication module 760, etc. in Figure 7.
其中,天线1和天线2用于发射和接收电磁波信号。终端设备60中的每个天线可用于覆盖单个或多个通信频带。不同的天线还可以复用,以提高天线的利用率。例如:可以将天线1复用为无线局域网的分集天线。在另外一些实施例中,天线可以和调谐开关结合使用。Among them, antenna 1 and antenna 2 are used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals. Each antenna in terminal device 60 may be used to cover a single or multiple communication frequency bands. Different antennas can also be reused to improve antenna utilization. For example: Antenna 1 can be reused as a diversity antenna for a wireless LAN. In other embodiments, antennas may be used in conjunction with tuning switches.
移动通信模块750可以提供应用在终端设备60上的包括2G/3G/4G/5G等无线通信的解决方案。移动通信模块750可以包括至少一个滤波器,开关,功率放大器,低噪声放大器(low noise amplifier,LNA)等。移动通信模块750可以由天线1接收电磁波,并对接收的电磁波进行滤波,放大等处理,传送至调制解调处理器进行解调。移动通信模块750还可以对经调制解调处理器调制后的信号放大,经天线1转为电磁波辐射出去。在一些实施例中,移动通信模块750的至少部 分功能模块可以被设置于处理器710中。在一些实施例中,移动通信模块750的至少部分功能模块可以与处理器710的至少部分模块被设置在同一个器件中。The mobile communication module 750 can provide wireless communication solutions including 2G/3G/4G/5G applied on the terminal device 60 . The mobile communication module 750 may include at least one filter, switch, power amplifier, low noise amplifier (LNA), etc. The mobile communication module 750 can receive electromagnetic waves from the antenna 1, perform filtering, amplification and other processing on the received electromagnetic waves, and transmit them to the modem processor for demodulation. The mobile communication module 750 can also amplify the signal modulated by the modem processor and convert it into electromagnetic waves through the antenna 1 for radiation. In some embodiments, at least part of mobile communications module 750 Sub-functional modules may be provided in the processor 710. In some embodiments, at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 750 and at least part of the modules of the processor 710 may be provided in the same device.
无线通信模块760可以是集成至少一个通信处理模块的一个或多个器件。无线通信模块760经由天线2接收电磁波,将电磁波信号调频以及滤波处理,将处理后的信号发送到处理器710。无线通信模块760还可以从处理器710接收待发送的信号,对其进行调频,放大,经天线2转为电磁波辐射出去。The wireless communication module 760 may be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module. The wireless communication module 760 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna 2 , frequency modulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signals, and sends the processed signals to the processor 710 . The wireless communication module 760 can also receive the signal to be sent from the processor 710, frequency modulate it, amplify it, and convert it into electromagnetic waves through the antenna 2 for radiation.
在一些实施例中,终端设备60的天线1和移动通信模块750耦合,天线2和无线通信模块760耦合,使得终端设备60可以通过无线通信技术与网络以及其他设备通信。In some embodiments, the antenna 1 of the terminal device 60 is coupled to the mobile communication module 750, and the antenna 2 is coupled to the wireless communication module 760, so that the terminal device 60 can communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication technology.
在一些实施例中,图6中的存储器603的功能可以通过图7中的内部存储器721或者外部存储器接口720连接的外部存储器(例如Micro SD卡)等实现。In some embodiments, the function of the memory 603 in Figure 6 can be implemented through the internal memory 721 in Figure 7 or an external memory (such as a Micro SD card) connected to the external memory interface 720.
在一些实施例中,图6中的输出设备605的功能可以通过图7中的显示屏794实现。显示屏794包括显示面板。In some embodiments, the functions of the output device 605 in FIG. 6 may be implemented through the display screen 794 in FIG. 7 . Display 794 includes a display panel.
在一些实施例中,图6中的输入设备606的功能可以通过鼠标、键盘、触摸屏设备或图7中的传感器模块780来实现。在一些实施例中,如图7所示,该终端设备60还可以包括音频模块770、摄像头793、指示器792、马达791、按键790、SIM卡接口795、USB接口730、充电管理模块740、电源管理模块741和电池742中的一个或多个,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。In some embodiments, the functionality of input device 606 in FIG. 6 may be implemented through a mouse, keyboard, touch screen device, or sensor module 780 in FIG. 7 . In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 7, the terminal device 60 may also include an audio module 770, a camera 793, an indicator 792, a motor 791, a button 790, a SIM card interface 795, a USB interface 730, a charging management module 740, One or more of the power management module 741 and the battery 742 are not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
可以理解的是,图7所示的结构并不构成对终端设备60的具体限定。比如,在本申请另一些实施例中,终端设备60可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件,或者组合某些部件,或者拆分某些部件,或者不同的部件布置。图示的部件可以以硬件,软件或软件和硬件的组合实现。It can be understood that the structure shown in FIG. 7 does not constitute a specific limitation on the terminal device 60. For example, in other embodiments of the present application, the terminal device 60 may include more or less components than shown in the figures, or combine some components, or split some components, or arrange different components. The components illustrated may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
或者,结合图6所示的通信装置600的结构示意图,以通信装置600为图5中的网络设备50,网络设备50为基站为例,示例性的,图8为本申请实施例提供的基站80的一种具体结构形式。Or, with reference to the schematic structural diagram of the communication device 600 shown in Figure 6, take the communication device 600 as the network device 50 in Figure 5 and the network device 50 as a base station as an example. Exemplarily, Figure 8 shows the base station provided by the embodiment of the present application. A specific structural form of 80.
其中,该基站80包括一个或多个射频单元(如RRU801)、以及一个或多个BBU802。The base station 80 includes one or more radio frequency units (such as RRU801) and one or more BBU802.
RRU801可以称为收发单元、收发机、收发电路、或者收发器等等,其可以包括至少一个天馈系统(即天线)811和射频单元812。该RRU801主要用于射频信号的收发以及射频信号与基带信号的转换。在一些实施例中,图6中的通信接口604的功能可以通过图8中的RRU801实现。The RRU 801 may be called a transceiver unit, a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, a transceiver, etc., and may include at least one antenna system (ie, antenna) 811 and a radio frequency unit 812. The RRU801 is mainly used for transmitting and receiving radio frequency signals and converting radio frequency signals and baseband signals. In some embodiments, the function of the communication interface 604 in Figure 6 can be implemented through the RRU 801 in Figure 8 .
该BBU802为网络设备的控制中心,也可以称为处理单元,主要用于完成基带处理功能,如信道编码,复用,调制,扩频等等。The BBU802 is the control center of network equipment and can also be called a processing unit. It is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions, such as channel coding, multiplexing, modulation, spread spectrum, etc.
在一些实施例中,该BBU802可以由一个或多个单板构成,多个单板可以共同支持单一接入指示的无线接入网(如LTE网络),也可以分别支持不同接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网,5G网或其它网络)。该BBU802还包括存储器821和处理器822,该存储器821用于存储必要的指令和数据。该处理器822用于控制网络设备进行必要的动作。该存储器821和处理器822可以服务于一个或多个单板。也就是说,可以每个单板上单独设置存储器和处理器。也可以是多个单板共用相同的存储器和处理器。此外每个单板上还可以设置有必要的电路。其中,在一些实施例中,图6中的处理器601的功能可以通过图8中的处理器822实现,图6中的存储器603的功能可以通过图8中的存储器821实现。In some embodiments, the BBU 802 may be composed of one or more single boards. Multiple single boards may jointly support a wireless access network (such as an LTE network) with a single access indication, or may respectively support wireless access networks of different access standards. Access network (such as LTE network, 5G network or other networks). The BBU 802 also includes a memory 821 and a processor 822. The memory 821 is used to store necessary instructions and data. The processor 822 is used to control the network device to perform necessary actions. The memory 821 and processor 822 may serve one or more single boards. In other words, the memory and processor can be set independently on each board. It is also possible for multiple boards to share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits can also be installed on each board. In some embodiments, the function of the processor 601 in Figure 6 can be implemented by the processor 822 in Figure 8 , and the function of the memory 603 in Figure 6 can be implemented by the memory 821 in Figure 8 .
可选的,图8中的RRU801与BBU802可以是物理上设置在一起,也可以物理上分离设置的,例如,分布式基站,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。Optionally, the RRU 801 and the BBU 802 in Figure 8 may be physically installed together or physically separated, for example, a distributed base station, which is not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
可选地,本申请实施例中的网络设备50可以支持以下一项或多项:空间复用、SU-MIMO、编码、速率匹配、加扰、调制、层映射、预编码、资源映射、IFFT、DBF、或者ABF等功能。Optionally, the network device 50 in the embodiment of the present application may support one or more of the following: spatial multiplexing, SU-MIMO, coding, rate matching, scrambling, modulation, layer mapping, precoding, resource mapping, IFFT , DBF, or ABF and other functions.
可选地,本申请时候中的终端设备60可以支持以下一项或多项:解码、速率解匹配、解加扰、解调制、或者信道估计/均衡等功能。Optionally, the terminal device 60 in this application may support one or more of the following functions: decoding, rate dematching, descrambling, demodulation, or channel estimation/equalization.
下面将结合图9,对本申请实施例提供的相位校准方法进行展开说明。The phase calibration method provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described below with reference to FIG. 9 .
应理解,本申请下述实施例中各个设备之间的信号名字或信号中各参数的名字等只是一个示例,具体实现中也可以是其他的名字,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。It should be understood that the names of the signals between the various devices or the names of the parameters in the signals in the following embodiments of the present application are just examples, and other names may also be used in specific implementations, which are not specifically limited in the embodiments of the present application.
以图5所示的网络设备50分别与第一终端设备和第二终端设备进行交互为例,如图9所示,为本申请实施例提供的一种相位校准方法,包括如下步骤:Taking the network device 50 shown in Figure 5 interacting with the first terminal device and the second terminal device respectively as an example, as shown in Figure 9, a phase calibration method provided by an embodiment of the present application includes the following steps:
S901、网络设备获取第一指示信息。其中,第一指示信息指示第一终端设备接收的第一SRS 资源配置信息用于第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准。第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准可以是指:在第一终端设备与其他终端设备进行相干聚合传输的情况下,第一终端设备补偿第一终端设备与其他终端设备同时发送信号时对应的相位差和/或频偏。S901. The network device obtains the first instruction information. Wherein, the first indication information indicates the first SRS received by the first terminal device The resource configuration information is used for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices. The phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices may refer to: in the case of coherent aggregation transmission between the first terminal device and other terminal devices, the first terminal device compensates the first terminal device for transmitting signals simultaneously with other terminal devices. corresponding phase difference and/or frequency offset.
示例性的,以第一终端设备与第二终端设备进行聚合传输为例,第二终端设备为其他终端设备。其中,第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的相位校准可以是指第一终端设备补偿第一终端设备与第二终端设备同时发送信号时对应的相位差和/或频偏。可以理解,第一终端设备与第二终端设备进行聚合传输可以是第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间使用CJT进行聚合传输,具体可以参见具体实施方式前序部分关于CJT的介绍,在此不再赘述。As an example, the first terminal device and the second terminal device perform aggregated transmission, and the second terminal device is another terminal device. The phase calibration between the first terminal device and the second terminal device may refer to the first terminal device compensating the corresponding phase difference and/or frequency offset when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send signals simultaneously. It can be understood that the aggregation transmission between the first terminal device and the second terminal device may be aggregation transmission between the first terminal device and the second terminal device using CJT. For details, please refer to the introduction about CJT in the preamble of the specific embodiments, here. No longer.
可选地,本申请实施中,网络设备获取第一指示信息(步骤S901),可以包括:第一终端设备向网络设备发送能力信息,该能力信息用于指示第一终端设备具备获得第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位差信息和/或频偏信息的能力。相应地,网络设备接收来自第一终端设备的能力信息,并根据该能力信息确定第一指示信息。也就是说,若第一终端设备具备获得第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位差信息和/或频偏信息的能力,则网络设备根据第一终端设备的能力信息确定第一指示信息;若第一终端设备不具备获得第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位差信息和/或频偏信息,则网络设备放弃获取第一指示信息。如此,网络设备可以根据第一终端设备的能力信息,确定是否向第一终端设备发送第一指示信息,以避免向第一终端设备发送超出其能力的第一指示信息所导致的无效信令交互,从而提高相位校准的效率。Optionally, in the implementation of this application, the network device obtains the first indication information (step S901), which may include: the first terminal device sends capability information to the network device, and the capability information is used to indicate that the first terminal device is capable of obtaining the first terminal device. The ability to provide phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the device and other end devices. Correspondingly, the network device receives the capability information from the first terminal device, and determines the first indication information based on the capability information. That is to say, if the first terminal device has the ability to obtain phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the first terminal device and other terminal devices, the network device determines the first indication information based on the capability information of the first terminal device. ; If the first terminal device does not have the ability to obtain the phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the first terminal device and other terminal devices, the network device gives up obtaining the first indication information. In this way, the network device can determine whether to send the first indication information to the first terminal device according to the capability information of the first terminal device, so as to avoid invalid signaling interactions caused by sending the first indication information that exceeds its capabilities to the first terminal device. , thereby improving the efficiency of phase calibration.
可选地,本申请实施例中,能力信息可以承载在无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)能力上报的信令中。其中,RRC能力上报的信令中可以增加用于相位校准能力的信元。Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, the capability information may be carried in the signaling of radio resource control (RRC) capability reporting. Among them, information elements for phase calibration capabilities can be added to the signaling reported by the RRC capability.
或者,可选地,能力信息可以是终端设备聚合相干传输能力的信息。也就是说,在第一终端设备向网络设备发送终端设备具备聚合相干传输能力的情况下,默认第一终端设备具备获得第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的相位差信息和/或频偏信息的能力。Or, optionally, the capability information may be information on aggregated coherent transmission capabilities of the terminal devices. That is to say, when the first terminal device sends a message to the network device that the terminal device has the ability to aggregate coherent transmission, by default the first terminal device has the ability to obtain the phase difference information and/or frequency between the first terminal device and the second terminal device. The ability to bias information.
或者,可选地,能力信息可以是相干时间窗大小的信息。其中,相干时间窗可以指示终端设备在该时间窗内可以保证功率一致性和/或相位连续性,进而可以进行聚合相干传输。也就是说,在第一终端设备向网络设备发送相干时间窗大小的信息的情况下,默认第一终端设备具备获得第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的相位差信息和/或频偏信息的能力。Or, alternatively, the capability information may be coherence time window size information. The coherence time window may indicate that the terminal device can ensure power consistency and/or phase continuity within the time window, thereby enabling aggregated coherent transmission. That is to say, when the first terminal device sends information about the coherence time window size to the network device, by default the first terminal device has the ability to obtain the phase difference information and/or frequency offset between the first terminal device and the second terminal device. information capabilities.
或者,可选地,本申请实施例中,网络设备可以在确定第一终端设备与第二终端设备进行聚合传输的情况下,获取第一指示信息。也就是说,在第一终端设备进行聚合传输的情况下,协议约定默认第一终端设备具备获得第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位差信息和/或频偏信息的能力,进而网络设备不需要第一终端设备发送能力信息也可以确定第一指示信息。Or, optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, the network device may obtain the first indication information when it is determined that the first terminal device and the second terminal device perform aggregated transmission. That is to say, when the first terminal device performs aggregate transmission, the protocol stipulates that the first terminal device has the ability to obtain the phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the first terminal device and other terminal devices, and then the network The device can determine the first indication information without the need for the first terminal device to send capability information.
或者,可选地,网络设备可以在确定第一终端设备与第二终端设备进行相干聚合的情况下,获取第一指示信息。其中,相干聚合传输可以是指CJT。也就是说,在第一终端设备进行CJT的情况下,协议约定默认第一终端设备具体获得第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位差信息和/或频偏信息的能力,进而网络设备不需要第一终端设备发送能力信息也可以确定第一指示信息。Or, optionally, the network device may obtain the first indication information when it is determined that the first terminal device and the second terminal device perform coherent aggregation. Among them, coherent aggregated transmission may refer to CJT. That is to say, when the first terminal device performs CJT, the protocol stipulates that the first terminal device has the ability to specifically obtain the phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the first terminal device and other terminal devices, and then the network device The first indication information can be determined without the first terminal device sending capability information.
S902、网络设备向第一终端设备发送第一指示信息。相应地,第一终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息。S902. The network device sends the first instruction information to the first terminal device. Correspondingly, the first terminal device receives the first indication information from the network device.
可选地,本申请实施例中,第一指示信息可以包括第一SRS资源配置信息,该第一SRS资源配置信息用于指示第一终端设备接收SRS;或者,该第一SRS资源配置信息用于指示第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准。Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, the first indication information may include first SRS resource configuration information, which is used to instruct the first terminal device to receive SRS; or, the first SRS resource configuration information is used. To indicate phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices.
应理解,本申请实施例中,在第一终端设备与第二终端设备进行聚合传输的情况下,第一终端设备接收用于接收SRS的第一SRS资源配置信息之后,可以根据第一SRS资源配置信息接收来自第二终端设备的第一SRS,并对第一SRS进行测量获得第一终端设备与第二终端设备之前的相位差信息和/或频偏信息。也就是说,本申请实施例中,第一SRS资源配置信息用于第一终端设备接收SRS可以隐式地指示第一SRS资源配置信息用于第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准。It should be understood that in this embodiment of the present application, when the first terminal device and the second terminal device perform aggregated transmission, after the first terminal device receives the first SRS resource configuration information for receiving SRS, it can configure the configuration information according to the first SRS resource. The configuration information receives the first SRS from the second terminal device, and measures the first SRS to obtain phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the first terminal device and the second terminal device. That is to say, in this embodiment of the present application, the first SRS resource configuration information used by the first terminal device to receive SRS may implicitly indicate that the first SRS resource configuration information is used for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices. .
可选地,一种可能的实现方式中,第一SRS资源配置信息包括usage,该usage指示第一SRS资源配置信息用于第一终端设备接收SRS。其中,该usage可以是SRS资源配置信息中新的usage 类型。示例性的,在第一SRS资源配置信息中的usage被配置为“发送”的情况下,该第一SRS资源配置信息用于发送SRS。在第一SRS资源配置信息中的usage被配置为“接收”的情况下,该第一SRS资源配置信息用于接收SRS。也就是说,第一指示信息可以是第一SRS资源配置信息中usage被配置为“接收”的信息,这样可以隐式地指示第一SRS资源配置信息用于第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准。Optionally, in a possible implementation, the first SRS resource configuration information includes usage, where the usage indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information is used by the first terminal device to receive SRS. Among them, the usage can be a new usage in the SRS resource configuration information. type. For example, when usage in the first SRS resource configuration information is configured as "send", the first SRS resource configuration information is used to send SRS. In the case where usage in the first SRS resource configuration information is configured as "receive", the first SRS resource configuration information is used to receive SRS. That is to say, the first indication information may be information in which usage is configured as "receive" in the first SRS resource configuration information. This may implicitly indicate that the first SRS resource configuration information is used between the first terminal device and other terminal devices. phase calibration.
或者,可选地,该usage指示第一SRS资源配置信息用于第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准。也就是说,由于SRS资源配置信息本身用于终端设备发送SRS,而在SRS资源配置信息用于相位校准的情况下,可以隐式的表示该SRS资源配置信息用于终端设备接收SRS。Or, optionally, the usage indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information is used for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices. That is to say, since the SRS resource configuration information itself is used by the terminal device to send SRS, and when the SRS resource configuration information is used for phase calibration, it can implicitly indicate that the SRS resource configuration information is used by the terminal device to receive SRS.
另一种可能的实现方式中,第一SRS资源配置信息包括的时域资源信息对应的符号类型为下行符号。由于一个OFDM符号可能包括3种类型:下行符号、上行符号和灵活符号,上行符号只能用于上行传输,下行符号只能用于下行传输。也就是说,第一SRS资源配置信息包括的时域资源信息对应的符号类型为下行符号时,可以表示第一SRS资源配置信息用于接收SRS,进而隐式地指示第一SRS资源配置信息用于第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准。In another possible implementation manner, the symbol type corresponding to the time domain resource information included in the first SRS resource configuration information is a downlink symbol. Since an OFDM symbol may include three types: downlink symbols, uplink symbols and flexible symbols, uplink symbols can only be used for uplink transmission, and downlink symbols can only be used for downlink transmission. That is to say, when the symbol type corresponding to the time domain resource information included in the first SRS resource configuration information is a downlink symbol, it can indicate that the first SRS resource configuration information is used to receive SRS, and then implicitly indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information is used for receiving SRS. Phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices.
可选地,网络设备可以通过系统消息或者RRC信令向第一终端设备发送第一SRS资源配置信息。相应地,第一终端设备可以通过系统消息或者RRC信令接收来自网络设备的第一SRS资源配置信息。Optionally, the network device may send the first SRS resource configuration information to the first terminal device through a system message or RRC signaling. Correspondingly, the first terminal device may receive the first SRS resource configuration information from the network device through a system message or RRC signaling.
或者,可选地,本申请实施例中,第一指示信息可以用于激活第一终端设备在第一SRS资源配置信息指示的时频资源上接收SRS。示例性的,第一SRS资源配置信息包括的时域资源信息对应的符号类型可以是灵活符号,第一指示信息可以指示该灵活符号为下行符号,进而可以激活第一终端设备在第一SRS资源配置信息指示的时频资源上接收SRS。Or, optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, the first indication information may be used to activate the first terminal device to receive SRS on the time-frequency resource indicated by the first SRS resource configuration information. Exemplarily, the symbol type corresponding to the time domain resource information included in the first SRS resource configuration information may be a flexible symbol, and the first indication information may indicate that the flexible symbol is a downlink symbol, thereby activating the first terminal device to use the first SRS resource. Receive SRS on the time-frequency resource indicated by the configuration information.
应理解,第一指示信息指示第一终端设备在第一SRS资源配置信息指示的时频资源上接收SRS,可以隐式地指示第一SRS资源配置信息用于第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准。It should be understood that the first indication information instructs the first terminal device to receive SRS on the time-frequency resource indicated by the first SRS resource configuration information, and may implicitly indicate that the first SRS resource configuration information is used between the first terminal device and other terminal devices. phase calibration.
可选地,本申请实施例中,承载第一指示信息的信令可以包括第一RRC信令,或者第一媒体访问控制(media access control,MAC)层信令,或者第一DCI信令,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, the signaling carrying the first indication information may include first RRC signaling, or first media access control (media access control, MAC) layer signaling, or first DCI signaling, The embodiments of the present application do not specifically limit this.
可以理解,第一RRC信令或第一MAC层信令或第一DCI信令可以不包括第一SRS资源配置信息。It can be understood that the first RRC signaling, the first MAC layer signaling, or the first DCI signaling may not include the first SRS resource configuration information.
可选地,本申请实施例中,第一指示信息与第一SRS资源配置信息可以分开传输。Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, the first indication information and the first SRS resource configuration information may be transmitted separately.
可选地,本申请实施例中,第一指示信息可以作为一个整体一起发送,也可以分成多个子信息分开发送,而且这些子信息的发送周期和/或发送时机可以相同,也可以不同。具体发送方法本申请不进行限定。其中,这些子信息的发送周期和/或发送时机可以是预先定义的,例如根据协议预先定义的,也可以是网络设备通过向终端设备发送配置信息来配置的。Optionally, in the embodiment of the present application, the first indication information can be sent together as a whole, or can be divided into multiple sub-information and sent separately, and the sending period and/or sending timing of these sub-information can be the same or different. The specific sending method is not limited in this application. The sending period and/or sending timing of these sub-information may be predefined, for example, based on a protocol, or may be configured by the network device by sending configuration information to the terminal device.
可选地,本申请实施例中,第一指示信息可以通过一条消息进行发送,也可以通过多条消息进行发送,本申请实施例对此不作限定。Optionally, in the embodiment of the present application, the first indication information may be sent through one message or through multiple messages, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
应理解,本申请实施例中,在进行第一指示信息发送时所涉及的三种信令中:物理层信令也称为第一层(layer1,L1)信令,其通常可以由物理层帧中的控制部分来承载。L1信令的典型例子是LTE标准中定义的PDCCH中承载的DCI。在一些情况下,L1信令也可以由物理层帧中的数据部分来承载。不难看出,L1信令的发送周期或者信令周期通常为物理层帧的周期,因此这种信令通常用于实现一些动态的控制,以传递一些变化频繁的信息,例如,可以通过物理层信令传送本申请实施例中的第一信令。MAC层信令属于第二层(layer2,L2)信令,其通常可以由,例如但不限于,第二层帧的帧头来承载。上述帧头中还可能携带,例如但不限于,源地址和目的地址等信息。除帧头外,第二层帧通常还包含帧体。在一些情况下,L2信令也可以由第二层帧的帧体来承载。第二层信令的典型例子是802.11系列标准中MAC帧的帧头中的帧控制(frame control)字段中携带的信令,或者一些通信协议中定义的MAC控制实体(control entity,MAC-CE)。第二层帧通常可以携带在物理层帧的数据部分。RRC信令属于第三层(layer 3)信令,其通常是一些控制消息,L3信令通常可以携带在第二层帧的帧体中。本段仅仅描述了物理层信令、MAC层信令、RRC信令、第一层信令、第二层信令和第三层信令的原理性描述,有关三种信令的具体细节可以参考现有技术, 在此不再赘述。It should be understood that in the embodiment of the present application, among the three types of signaling involved in sending the first indication information: physical layer signaling is also called first layer (layer1, L1) signaling, which can usually be represented by the physical layer The control part of the frame is carried. A typical example of L1 signaling is the DCI carried in the PDCCH defined in the LTE standard. In some cases, L1 signaling may also be carried by the data portion of the physical layer frame. It is not difficult to see that the sending cycle or signaling cycle of L1 signaling is usually the cycle of the physical layer frame. Therefore, this signaling is usually used to implement some dynamic control to transmit some frequently changing information. For example, it can be transmitted through the physical layer. The signaling transmits the first signaling in the embodiment of this application. MAC layer signaling belongs to layer 2 (layer 2, L2) signaling, which can usually be carried by, for example but not limited to, a frame header of a layer 2 frame. The above frame header may also carry information such as, but not limited to, source address and destination address. In addition to the frame header, layer 2 frames usually contain a frame body. In some cases, L2 signaling may also be carried by the frame body of the Layer 2 frame. Typical examples of second-layer signaling are the signaling carried in the frame control (frame control) field in the frame header of the MAC frame in the 802.11 series of standards, or the MAC control entity (MAC-CE) defined in some communication protocols. ). Layer 2 frames can usually carry the data portion of the physical layer frame. RRC signaling belongs to the third layer (layer 3) signaling, which is usually some control messages. L3 signaling can usually be carried in the frame body of the second layer frame. This paragraph only describes the principle description of physical layer signaling, MAC layer signaling, RRC signaling, layer 1 signaling, layer 2 signaling and layer 3 signaling. The specific details of the three signaling can be With reference to existing technology, I won’t go into details here.
可以理解,本申请实施例中,第一SRS资源配置信息包括SRS的时频域位置,该SRS的时频域位置可以是其他终端设备向网络设备发送的SRS所在的时频域位置。示例性的,以第一终端设备与第二终端设备进行聚合传输为例,该第一SRS资源配置信息中的SRS的时频域位置可以是第二终端设备向网络设备发送的第一SRS所在的时频域位置。也就是说,第一终端设备可以根据第一SRS资源配置信息中的SRS的时频域位置确定第二终端设备向网络设备发送的第一SRS的时频域位置。It can be understood that in this embodiment of the present application, the first SRS resource configuration information includes the time-frequency domain location of the SRS. The time-frequency domain location of the SRS may be the time-frequency domain location of the SRS sent by other terminal devices to the network device. For example, taking the first terminal device and the second terminal device performing aggregate transmission as an example, the time-frequency domain location of the SRS in the first SRS resource configuration information may be the location of the first SRS sent by the second terminal device to the network device. time-frequency domain position. That is to say, the first terminal device can determine the time-frequency domain position of the first SRS sent by the second terminal device to the network device according to the time-frequency domain position of the SRS in the first SRS resource configuration information.
可选地,本申请实施例中,网络设备可以通过系统消息或者RRC信令向第二终端设备发送关于第一SRS的SRS资源配置信息。相应地,第二终端设备可以通过系统消息或者RRC信令接收来自网络设备的关于第一SRS的SRS资源配置信息。其中,关于第一SRS的SRS资源配置信息可以包括一个或多个SRS资源集。一个SRS资源集可以包括一个或多个SRS资源。一个或多个SRS资源用于第二终端设备发送一个或多个SRS。该一个或多个SRS可以包括第一SRS。第二终端设备可以根据来自网络设备的关于第一SRS的SRS资源配置信息发送第一SRS。Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, the network device may send the SRS resource configuration information about the first SRS to the second terminal device through a system message or RRC signaling. Correspondingly, the second terminal device may receive SRS resource configuration information about the first SRS from the network device through a system message or RRC signaling. The SRS resource configuration information about the first SRS may include one or more SRS resource sets. An SRS resource set may include one or more SRS resources. One or more SRS resources are used by the second terminal device to send one or more SRS. The one or more SRSs may include a first SRS. The second terminal device may send the first SRS according to the SRS resource configuration information about the first SRS from the network device.
可选地,本申请实施例中,网络设备可以在向第一终端设备发送第一指示信息(步骤S902)之前或之后向第二终端设备发送关于第一SRS的SRS资源配置信息,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, the network device may send the SRS resource configuration information about the first SRS to the second terminal device before or after sending the first indication information to the first terminal device (step S902). This application implements The example does not specifically limit this.
S903、第二终端设备发送第一SRS。相应地,第一终端设备根据第一指示信息在第一SRS资源配置信息指示的时频资源上接收来自第二终端设备的第一SRS。S903. The second terminal device sends the first SRS. Correspondingly, the first terminal device receives the first SRS from the second terminal device on the time-frequency resource indicated by the first SRS resource configuration information according to the first indication information.
可以理解,本申请实施例中,第二终端设备还可以向网络设备发送第一SRS。相应地,网络设备接收来自第二终端设备的第一SRS。其中,网络设备可以根据该第一SRS进行CSI测量,以获得第二终端设备在发送第一SRS时刻对应的CSI。It can be understood that in this embodiment of the present application, the second terminal device may also send the first SRS to the network device. Correspondingly, the network device receives the first SRS from the second terminal device. The network device may perform CSI measurement based on the first SRS to obtain the CSI corresponding to the moment when the second terminal device sends the first SRS.
S904、第一终端设备对第一SRS进行测量获得第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的相位差信息和/或频偏信息。其中,相位差信息和/或频偏信息用于补偿第一终端设备与第二终端设备发送第一信号时对应的相位差和/或频偏。S904. The first terminal device measures the first SRS to obtain phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the first terminal device and the second terminal device. The phase difference information and/or frequency offset information are used to compensate the corresponding phase difference and/or frequency offset when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal.
应理解,第一信号为第一终端设备与第二终端设备进行相干聚合传输时用于同时发送协作数据的信号。其中,第一终端设备发送的第一信号承载的数据或者TB可以与第二终端设备发送的第一信号承载的数据或者TB相同,具体可以参见具体实施方式前序部分“第八,多终端设备协作传输”中的相关描述,在此不再赘述。It should be understood that the first signal is a signal used to simultaneously send cooperation data when the first terminal device and the second terminal device perform coherent aggregation transmission. Wherein, the data or TB carried by the first signal sent by the first terminal device may be the same as the data or TB carried by the first signal sent by the second terminal device. For details, please refer to "Eighth, Multi-Terminal Devices" in the preamble of the detailed description. The relevant descriptions in "Cooperative Transmission" will not be repeated here.
可选地,本申请实施例中,第一终端设备可以向第二终端设备发送协作数据。相应地,第二终端设备接收来自第一终端设备的协作数据。其中,第一终端设备可以称为SUE,第二终端设备可以称为CUE。Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, the first terminal device may send collaboration data to the second terminal device. Correspondingly, the second terminal device receives the collaboration data from the first terminal device. The first terminal device may be called SUE, and the second terminal device may be called CUE.
或者,可选地,第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送协作数据。相应地,第一终端设备接收来自第二终端设备的协作数据。其中,第一终端设备可以称为CUE,第二终端设备可以称为SUE。Or, optionally, the second terminal device sends collaboration data to the first terminal device. Correspondingly, the first terminal device receives collaboration data from the second terminal device. Wherein, the first terminal device may be called CUE, and the second terminal device may be called SUE.
下面对本申请实施例的相干聚合传输方式进行介绍。The coherent aggregation transmission method in the embodiment of the present application is introduced below.
应理解,基于具体实施方式前序部分关于CJT的介绍,本申请实施例中,相干聚合传输可以根据CSI测量时刻的预编码矩阵是否补偿了相位差和/或频偏分为两种方式。其中,在介绍本申请实施例中的两种相干聚合传输方式之前,首先介绍相干聚合传输中涉及的“第一时刻”和“第二时刻”。It should be understood that based on the introduction about CJT in the preamble of the detailed description, in the embodiments of the present application, coherent aggregation transmission can be divided into two methods according to whether the precoding matrix at the CSI measurement time compensates for the phase difference and/or frequency offset. Before introducing the two coherent aggregation transmission methods in the embodiments of the present application, the "first moment" and the "second moment" involved in coherent aggregation transmission are first introduced.
可选地,本申请实施例中,第一时刻为第一终端设备确定的CSI测量时刻,第二时刻为第一终端设备向网络设备发送第一信号的时刻。其中,CSI测量时刻可以是指发送用于CSI测量的参考信号的时刻。该参考信号可以是码本传输方式下用于上行信道测量的SRS,还可以是非码本传输方式下用于下行信道测量的CSI-RS。Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, the first time is the CSI measurement time determined by the first terminal device, and the second time is the time when the first terminal device sends the first signal to the network device. The CSI measurement time may refer to the time when the reference signal for CSI measurement is sent. The reference signal may be an SRS used for uplink channel measurement in a codebook transmission mode, or may be a CSI-RS used for downlink channel measurement in a non-codebook transmission mode.
可选地,本申请实施例中,第一终端设备可以根据SRS资源配置信息中的usage确定使用码本传输方式发送第一信号,或者使用非码本传输方式发送第一信号。示例性的,参见具体实施方式前序部分关于SRS资源的usage说明,在SRS配置信息中的usage配置为“码本”的情况下,该SRS资源配置用于码本传输方案的上行信道信息获取;在SRS资源配置信息中的usage配置为“非码本”的情况下,该SRS资源配置信息用于非码本传输方案的上行信道信息获取;或者,第 一终端设备还可以通过高层参数txconfig确定是否使用码本传输方式发送第一信号,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, the first terminal device may determine according to the usage in the SRS resource configuration information to use the codebook transmission method to send the first signal, or to use the non-codebook transmission method to send the first signal. For example, refer to the usage description of SRS resources in the preamble of the specific embodiments. When the usage in the SRS configuration information is configured as "codebook", the SRS resource configuration is used to obtain the uplink channel information of the codebook transmission scheme. ; When the usage in the SRS resource configuration information is configured as "non-codebook", the SRS resource configuration information is used to obtain uplink channel information for the non-codebook transmission scheme; or, A terminal device may also determine whether to use the codebook transmission mode to send the first signal through the high-level parameter txconfig, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
可选地,本申请实施例中,相干聚合传输可以是如下两种方式。Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, coherent aggregation transmission can be performed in the following two ways.
相干聚合传输方式一:在第一时刻确定的预编码矩阵已经补偿了第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间在第一时刻的相位差和/或频偏(例如CJT中联合确定的预编码矩阵)的情况下,补偿第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间在第二时刻与第一时刻之间的相位差和/或频偏。Coherent aggregation transmission method 1: The precoding matrix determined at the first moment has compensated for the phase difference and/or frequency offset between the first terminal device and the second terminal device at the first moment (for example, the precoding matrix determined jointly in CJT matrix), compensate the phase difference and/or frequency offset between the first terminal device and the second terminal device between the second time and the first time.
可选地,本申请实施例中,第一终端设备与第二终端设备发送第一信号时对应的相位差包括第一相位差与第二相位差之间的差值。其中,第一相位差为第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间在第一时刻的相位差,第二相位差为第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间在第二时刻的相位差。也就是说,第一终端设备使用相位差信息和/或频偏信息补偿第一终端设备发送第一信号时第一相位差与第二相位差之间的差值。Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, the corresponding phase difference when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal includes the difference between the first phase difference and the second phase difference. The first phase difference is the phase difference between the first terminal device and the second terminal device at the first time, and the second phase difference is the phase difference between the first terminal device and the second terminal device at the second time. That is to say, the first terminal device uses the phase difference information and/or the frequency offset information to compensate the difference between the first phase difference and the second phase difference when the first terminal device sends the first signal.
可以理解,在相干聚合传输方式一中,第一终端设备使用在第一时刻确定的预编码矩阵发送第一信号时已经补偿第一相位差,然而在第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间相位变化不一致时,第二相位差与第一相位差不相同,进而第一终端设备需要根据相位差信息和/或频偏信息补偿第一相位差与第二相位差之间的差值。示例性的,假设在第一时刻时第一相位差为10°,在第二时刻时第二相位差为30°,由于在第一时刻确定的预编码矩阵已经补偿10°的相位差,因此第一终端设备还需要补偿20°的相位差。It can be understood that in coherent aggregation transmission mode 1, the first terminal device has compensated for the first phase difference when sending the first signal using the precoding matrix determined at the first moment. However, between the first terminal device and the second terminal device When the phase changes are inconsistent, the second phase difference is different from the first phase difference, and the first terminal device needs to compensate the difference between the first phase difference and the second phase difference according to the phase difference information and/or the frequency offset information. For example, assume that the first phase difference is 10° at the first moment and the second phase difference is 30° at the second moment. Since the precoding matrix determined at the first moment has compensated for the phase difference of 10°, therefore The first terminal equipment also needs to compensate for the phase difference of 20°.
可选地,本申请实施例中,第一终端设备与第二终端设备发送第一信号时对应的频偏包括第一频偏与第二频偏之间的差值。其中,第一频偏为第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间在第一时刻的频偏,第二频偏为第一终端设备与第二终端设备在第二时刻的频偏。可以理解,第一终端设备使用在第一时刻确定的预编码矩阵发送第一信号时已经补偿第一相位差,即补偿了第一频偏引起的相位差。然而在第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间频偏变化不一致时,第二频偏与第一频偏不相同,进而第一终端设备需要根据频偏信息补偿第一频偏与第二频偏之间的差值。示例性的,假设在第一时刻时第一频偏引起的相位差为10°,在第二时刻时第二频偏引起的相位差为30°,由于在第一时刻确定的预编码矩阵已经补偿10°的相位差,因此第一终端设备还需要补偿20°的相位差。Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, the corresponding frequency offset when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal includes a difference between the first frequency offset and the second frequency offset. The first frequency offset is the frequency offset between the first terminal device and the second terminal device at the first time, and the second frequency offset is the frequency offset between the first terminal device and the second terminal device at the second time. It can be understood that when the first terminal device sends the first signal using the precoding matrix determined at the first moment, the first phase difference has been compensated, that is, the phase difference caused by the first frequency offset has been compensated. However, when the frequency offset changes between the first terminal device and the second terminal device are inconsistent, the second frequency offset is different from the first frequency offset, and the first terminal device needs to compensate the first frequency offset and the second frequency offset according to the frequency offset information. The difference between deviations. For example, assume that the phase difference caused by the first frequency offset is 10° at the first moment, and the phase difference caused by the second frequency offset at the second moment is 30°. Since the precoding matrix determined at the first moment has To compensate for the phase difference of 10°, the first terminal device also needs to compensate for the phase difference of 20°.
相干聚合传输方式二:在第一时刻确定的预编码矩阵未补偿第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间在第一时刻的相位差和/或频偏的情况下,补偿第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间在第二时刻的相位差和/或频偏。Coherent aggregation transmission method 2: When the precoding matrix determined at the first moment does not compensate for the phase difference and/or frequency offset between the first terminal device and the second terminal device at the first moment, compensate the first terminal device and the second terminal device. The phase difference and/or frequency offset between the second terminal devices at the second moment.
可选地,本申请实施例中,第一终端设备与第二终端设备发送第一信号时对应的相位差包括第二相位差。Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, the corresponding phase difference when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal includes a second phase difference.
可以理解,在相干聚合传输方式二中,第一终端设备使用在第一时刻确定的预编码矩阵发送第一信号时未补偿第一相位差,进而第一终端设备仅需要根据相位差信息和/或频偏信息补偿第二相位差。示例性的,假设在第一时刻时第一相位差为10°,在第二时刻时第二相位差为30°,由于第一时刻确定的预编码矩阵未补偿10°的相位差,因此第一终端设备需要补偿30°的相位差。It can be understood that in the coherent aggregation transmission method 2, the first terminal device does not compensate for the first phase difference when sending the first signal using the precoding matrix determined at the first moment, and the first terminal device only needs to calculate the signal according to the phase difference information and/or Or the frequency offset information compensates for the second phase difference. For example, assume that the first phase difference is 10° at the first moment and the second phase difference is 30° at the second moment. Since the precoding matrix determined at the first moment does not compensate for the phase difference of 10°, the second phase difference is 10°. A terminal device needs to compensate for a phase difference of 30°.
应理解,本申请实施例中,“时刻”对应于信号的时域资源,或者对应于信号时域资源中的第一个符号或者最后一个符号。示例性的,在码本传输方式下,第一时刻可以是终端设备发送用于CSI测量的SRS的时域资源对应的第一个符号;或者,在非码本传输方式下,第一时刻可以是网络设备发送CSI-RS的时域资源对应的第一个符号。第二时刻可以是发送第一信号的时域资源的第一个符号。It should be understood that in the embodiment of the present application, "moment" corresponds to the time domain resource of the signal, or corresponds to the first symbol or the last symbol in the time domain resource of the signal. For example, in the codebook transmission mode, the first moment may be the first symbol corresponding to the time domain resource of the SRS sent by the terminal device for CSI measurement; or, in the non-codebook transmission mode, the first moment may be It is the first symbol corresponding to the time domain resource of the CSI-RS sent by the network device. The second moment may be the first symbol of the time domain resource that transmits the first signal.
由于第一时刻与CSI测量有关,而CSI测量可以分为码本传输方式中对SRS的测量和非码本传输方式中对CSI-RS的测量,下面根据SRS的发送时刻和CSI-RS的发送时刻对第一时刻进行说明。Since the first moment is related to CSI measurement, and CSI measurement can be divided into measurement of SRS in codebook transmission mode and measurement of CSI-RS in non-codebook transmission mode, the following is based on the transmission time of SRS and the transmission of CSI-RS. Moment explains the first moment.
可选地,本申请实施例中,在第一终端设备确定使用码本传输方式发送第一信号的情况下,第一终端设备确定的CSI测量时刻为第一终端设备向网络设备发送第二SRS的时刻,第二SRS用于上行信道的CSI测量。Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, when the first terminal device determines to use the codebook transmission method to send the first signal, the CSI measurement time determined by the first terminal device is when the first terminal device sends the second SRS to the network device. At the moment, the second SRS is used for CSI measurement of the uplink channel.
或者,可选地,第一终端设备确定的CSI测量时刻为第二终端设备向网络设备发送第三SRS 的时刻,其中,第二终端设备向网络设备发送第三SRS的时刻是由网络设备指示给第一终端设备的,第三SRS用于上行信道的CSI测量。Or, optionally, the CSI measurement time determined by the first terminal device is when the second terminal device sends the third SRS to the network device. time, wherein the time when the second terminal device sends the third SRS to the network device is indicated to the first terminal device by the network device, and the third SRS is used for CSI measurement of the uplink channel.
可以理解,本申请实施例中,第一终端设备发送第二SRS的时刻可以早于第二终端设备发送第三SRS的时刻。或者,第一终端设备发送第二SRS的时刻可以晚于第二终端设备发送第三SRS的时刻。其中,在第一终端设备发送第二SRS的时刻与第二终端设备发送第三SRS的时刻不相同的情况下,第一终端设备可以选择两者中的最大值或最小值作为CSI测量时刻,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。It can be understood that in this embodiment of the present application, the time at which the first terminal device sends the second SRS may be earlier than the time at which the second terminal device sends the third SRS. Alternatively, the time at which the first terminal device sends the second SRS may be later than the time at which the second terminal device sends the third SRS. Wherein, when the time when the first terminal device sends the second SRS is different from the time when the second terminal device sends the third SRS, the first terminal device may select the maximum value or the minimum value between the two as the CSI measurement time, The embodiments of the present application do not specifically limit this.
示例性的,以图10所示的第一终端设备与第二终端设备使用码本传输方式进行聚合传输时的测量时刻示意图为例,如图10所示,第一时刻为第一终端设备发送第二SRS的时刻,第二SRS用于上行信道的CSI测量;或者,第一时刻为第二终端设备发送第三SRS的时刻,第三SRS用于上行信道的CSI测量。可以理解,第二终端设备发送第三SRS的时刻可以是在第二终端设备发送第一SRS的时刻之前或之后;或者,第三SRS可以是第一SRS;或者,第一终端设备发送第二SRS的时刻可以是在第二终端设备发送第一SRS的时刻之前或之后,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。For example, taking the schematic diagram of the measurement time when the first terminal device and the second terminal device use the codebook transmission method to perform aggregated transmission as shown in Figure 10, as shown in Figure 10, the first time is when the first terminal device sends At the time of the second SRS, the second SRS is used for CSI measurement of the uplink channel; or, the first time is the time when the second terminal device sends the third SRS, and the third SRS is used for CSI measurement of the uplink channel. It can be understood that the time when the second terminal device sends the third SRS may be before or after the time when the second terminal device sends the first SRS; or the third SRS may be the first SRS; or the first terminal device sends the second SRS. The time of the SRS may be before or after the time when the second terminal device sends the first SRS, which is not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
应理解,本申请实施例中,第二终端设备在向网络设备发送第一SRS之前或之后可以向网络设备发送一个或多个SRS;或者,第二终端设备可以在向网络设备发送第一SRS之前未向网络设备发送过SRS,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。It should be understood that in this embodiment of the present application, the second terminal device may send one or more SRSs to the network device before or after sending the first SRS to the network device; or, the second terminal device may send the first SRS to the network device. The SRS has not been sent to the network device before, and the embodiment of this application does not specifically limit this.
可以理解,在第二终端设备向网络设备发送第一SRS之前未向网络设备发送过SRS的情况下,第三SRS可以是第一SRS。也就是说,第一终端设备确定的CSI测量时刻为发送第三SRS的时刻。It can be understood that, in the case where the second terminal device has not sent an SRS to the network device before sending the first SRS to the network device, the third SRS may be the first SRS. That is to say, the CSI measurement time determined by the first terminal device is the time when the third SRS is sent.
可选地,本申请实施例中,在第一终端设备确定使用非码本传输方式发送第一信号的情况下,第一终端设备确定的CSI测量时刻为第一终端设备接收来自网络设备的CSI-RS的时刻。也就是说,在第一终端设备确定使用非码本传输发送第一信号的情况下,第一时刻为第一终端设备接收来自网络设备的CSI-RS的时刻。Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, when the first terminal device determines to use a non-codebook transmission method to send the first signal, the CSI measurement time determined by the first terminal device is when the first terminal device receives the CSI from the network device. -RS moment. That is to say, in the case where the first terminal device determines to use non-codebook transmission to send the first signal, the first time is the time when the first terminal device receives the CSI-RS from the network device.
应理解,第一终端设备接收来自网络设备的CSI-RS的时刻可以是在第二终端设备发送第一SRS之前或之后,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。It should be understood that the time when the first terminal device receives the CSI-RS from the network device may be before or after the second terminal device sends the first SRS, which is not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
下面对本申请实施中的相位差信息、频偏信息、以及计算方法进行介绍。The phase difference information, frequency offset information, and calculation method used in the implementation of this application are introduced below.
可选地,本申请实施例中,第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的相位差信息包括第一终端设备测量第一SRS获得的第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的相位差。其中,该相位差包括第一终端设备和第二终端之间的频偏引起的相位差以及其他因素引起的相位差,具体可以参见具体实施方式前序部分“8.1.2、频偏”的相关说明,此处不再赘述。Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, the phase difference information between the first terminal device and the second terminal device includes the phase difference between the first terminal device and the second terminal device obtained by the first terminal device measuring the first SRS. . The phase difference includes the phase difference caused by the frequency offset between the first terminal device and the second terminal and the phase difference caused by other factors. For details, please refer to the relevant section "8.1.2, Frequency Offset" in the preamble of the specific implementation. Description will not be repeated here.
可选地,本申请实施例中,第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的频偏信息包括第一终端设备测量第一SRS获得的第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的频偏。Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, the frequency offset information between the first terminal device and the second terminal device includes the frequency offset between the first terminal device and the second terminal device obtained by the first terminal device measuring the first SRS. .
可选地,本申请实施例中,第二终端设备可以在多个时刻发送第一SRS。相应地,第一终端设备可以在多个时刻接收来自第二终端设备的第一SRS,并对该多个时刻的第一SRS进行测量获得不同时刻对应的第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的相位差和/或频偏。也就是说,本申请实施例中的,第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的相位差信息可以包括不同发送第一SRS时刻对应的第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的相位差,第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的频偏信息包括不同发送第一SRS时刻对应的第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的频偏。Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, the second terminal device may send the first SRS at multiple times. Correspondingly, the first terminal device can receive the first SRS from the second terminal device at multiple times, and measure the first SRS at the multiple times to obtain the relationship between the first terminal device and the second terminal device corresponding to different times. phase difference and/or frequency offset between them. That is to say, in the embodiment of the present application, the phase difference information between the first terminal device and the second terminal device may include the phase difference between the first terminal device and the second terminal device corresponding to different sending times of the first SRS. , the frequency offset information between the first terminal device and the second terminal device includes the frequency offset between the first terminal device and the second terminal device corresponding to different sending times of the first SRS.
示例性的,以图10所示的发送第一SRS的两个不同时刻为第三时刻和第四时刻,并且第三时刻在第四时刻之前为例,第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的相位差信息包括第三时刻对应的第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的相位差为Δψc_s(t3),第四时刻对应的第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的相位差为Δψc_s(t4),在第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间在第三时刻与第四时刻之间的频偏为Δfc_s。其中,t3表示第三时刻,t4表示第四时刻。For example, taking the two different moments of sending the first SRS shown in Figure 10 as the third moment and the fourth moment, and the third moment being before the fourth moment, as an example, between the first terminal device and the second terminal device The phase difference information between includes the phase difference between the first terminal device and the second terminal device corresponding to the third moment, which is Δψ c_s (t3), and the phase difference between the first terminal device and the second terminal device corresponding to the fourth moment. The difference is Δψ c_s (t4), and the frequency offset between the first terminal device and the second terminal device between the third time and the fourth time is Δf c_s . Among them, t3 represents the third moment, and t4 represents the fourth moment.
示例性的,本申请实施例中可以通过以下方式获得Δfc_s、Δψc_s(t3)、以及Δψc_s(t4)。具体方式如下:Illustratively, in the embodiment of the present application, Δf c_s , Δψ c_s (t 3 ), and Δψ c_s (t 4 ) can be obtained in the following manner. The specific methods are as follows:
第一终端设备根据在t3和t4时刻接收来自第二终端设备的第一SRS,通过信道估计(例如SVD) 得到t3时刻的总相位θc_s(t3)和t4时刻的总相位θc_s(t4)。其中,θc_s(t3)可以用公式(9)表示,θc_s(t4)可以用公式(10)表示,并且θc_s(t3)和θc_s(t4)为已知量。
θc_s(t3)=2πΔfc_s·t3+Δψc_s(t3)                      公式(9)
θc_s(t4)=2πΔfc_s·t4+Δψc_s(t3)                      公式(10)
The first terminal device uses channel estimation (such as SVD) based on receiving the first SRS from the second terminal device at times t3 and t4 . The total phase θ c_s (t 3 ) at time t 3 and the total phase θ c_s (t 4 ) at time t 4 are obtained. Among them, θ c_s (t 3 ) can be expressed by formula (9), θ c_s (t 4 ) can be expressed by formula (10), and θ c_s (t 3 ) and θ c_s (t 4 ) are known quantities.
θ c_s (t 3 )=2πΔf c_s ·t 3 +Δψ c_s (t 3 ) Formula (9)
θ c_s (t 4 )=2πΔf c_s ·t 4 +Δψ c_s (t 3 ) Formula (10)
公式(9)和公式(10)联立做减法可以得到Δfc_s,Δfc_s可以由公式(11)计算得到。
Δfc_s=(θc_s(t4)-θc_s(t3))/(2π(t4-t3)))                公式(11)
Δf c_s can be obtained by subtracting formula (9) and formula (10) simultaneously, and Δf c_s can be calculated from formula (11).
Δf c_s =(θ c_s (t 4 )-θ c_s (t 3 ))/(2π(t 4 -t 3 ))) Formula (11)
根据公式(11)以及公式(9)或公式(10),即可计算得到Δψc_s(t3)。其中,在Δψc_s(t3)和Δfc_s为已知的情况下,可以根据公式(12)计得到Δψc_s(t4)。
Δψc_s(t4)=2π(Δfc_s·(t4-t3))+Δψc_s(t3)                   公式(12)
According to formula (11) and formula (9) or formula (10), Δψ c_s (t 3 ) can be calculated. Among them, when Δψ c_s (t 3 ) and Δf c_s are known, Δψ c_s (t 4 ) can be calculated according to formula (12).
Δψ c_s (t 4 )=2π(Δf c_s ·(t 4 -t 3 ))+Δψ c_s (t 3 ) Formula (12)
在公式(12)中,2π(Δfc_s·(t4-t3))表示第四时刻与第三时刻之间对应的由第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的频偏引起的相位差。In formula (12), 2π(Δf c_s ·(t 4 -t 3 )) represents the corresponding phase between the fourth time and the third time caused by the frequency offset between the first terminal device and the second terminal device. Difference.
应理解,再次参见图10,第四时刻可以早于第二时刻,第一时刻可以早于第三时刻。或者,第三时刻可以等于第一时刻;或者,第一时刻与第四时刻可以相同;或者,第一时刻还可以在第四时刻之后,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。It should be understood that, referring to FIG. 10 again, the fourth moment may be earlier than the second moment, and the first moment may be earlier than the third moment. Alternatively, the third moment may be equal to the first moment; or the first moment and the fourth moment may be the same; or the first moment may be after the fourth moment, which is not specifically limited in the embodiments of the present application.
可选地,本申请实施例中,第一终端设备可以根据在两个不同时刻接收的第一SRS分别确定该两个不同时刻分别对应的第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的相位差和/或频偏,并根据该两个不同时刻分别对应的第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的相位差和/或频偏,估计第一终端设备与第二终端设备发送第一信号时对应的相位差。Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, the first terminal device may determine the phase difference between the first terminal device and the second terminal device corresponding to the two different times based on the first SRS received at two different times. and/or frequency offset, and based on the phase difference and/or frequency offset between the first terminal equipment and the second terminal equipment corresponding to the two different times, it is estimated that the first terminal equipment and the second terminal equipment send the first signal corresponding phase difference.
下面结合图10所示的第三时刻和第四时刻,对第一终端设备估计第一终端设备与第二终端设备发送第一信号时对应的相位差的方式进行说明。The following describes the method in which the first terminal device estimates the corresponding phase difference when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal in conjunction with the third moment and the fourth moment shown in FIG. 10 .
方式一:第一终端设备可以根据公式(13)估计第一终端设备与第二终端设备发送第一信号时对应的相位差。
Δψc_s(t2)=2π(Δfc_s·(t2-t4))+Δψc_s(t4)                   公式(13)
Method 1: The first terminal device can estimate the corresponding phase difference when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal according to formula (13).
Δψ c_s (t 2 )=2π(Δf c_s ·(t 2 -t 4 ))+Δψ c_s (t 4 ) Formula (13)
在公式(13)中,t2表示第二时刻,Δψc_s(t2)表示第一终端设备与第二终端设备发送第一信号时对应的相位差,2π(Δfc_s·(t2+t4))表示第二时刻与第四时刻之间对应的由第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的频偏引起的相位差。其中,Δψc_s(t4)可以由公式(12)确定。In formula (13), t 2 represents the second time, Δψ c_s (t 2 ) represents the corresponding phase difference when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal, 2π(Δf c_s ·(t 2 +t 4 )) represents the corresponding phase difference between the second time and the fourth time caused by the frequency offset between the first terminal device and the second terminal device. Among them, Δψ c_s (t 4 ) can be determined by formula (12).
由公式(13)和公式(12)可以得到公式(14)。其中,通过公式(14)可以得到Δψc_s(t2)。也就是说,通过第一终端设备与所述第二终端设备之间的相位差信息和频偏信息可以补偿第一终端设备与第二终端设备发送第一信号时对应的相位差和/或频偏。
Δψc_s(t2)=2π(Δfc_s·(t2-t3))+Δψc_s(t3)               公式(14)
Formula (14) can be obtained from formula (13) and formula (12). Among them, Δψ c_s (t 2 ) can be obtained through formula (14). That is to say, the phase difference and/or frequency offset information between the first terminal device and the second terminal device can be used to compensate for the corresponding phase difference and/or frequency when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal. Partial.
Δψ c_s (t 2 )=2π(Δf c_s ·(t 2 -t 3 ))+Δψ c_s (t 3 ) Formula (14)
可以理解,公式(14)可以用于相干聚合传输方式二中补偿第一终端设备与第二终端设备发送第一信号时对应的相位差。It can be understood that formula (14) can be used in coherent aggregation transmission mode 2 to compensate for the corresponding phase difference when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal.
方式二、由于在相干聚合传输方式一中,第一时刻对应的相位差已经由预编码矩阵补偿,因此第一终端设备可以仅补偿第一终端设备与第二终端设备发送第一信号时对应的频偏引起的相位差。其中,第一终端设备可以根据第三时刻和第四时刻获得的第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的频偏Δfc_s估计第一终端设备与第二终端设备发送第一信号时对应的频偏引起的相位差。第一终端设备与第二终端设备发送第一信号时对应的频偏引起的相位差可以根据公式(15)得到。
Δψc_s(t2)=2π(Δfc_s·(t2-t1))                     公式(15)
Method 2: Since in the coherent aggregation transmission method 1, the phase difference corresponding to the first moment has been compensated by the precoding matrix, the first terminal device can only compensate the phase difference corresponding to when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal. Phase difference caused by frequency offset. Wherein, the first terminal device can estimate the corresponding frequency when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal based on the frequency offset Δf c_s between the first terminal device and the second terminal device obtained at the third moment and the fourth moment. Phase difference caused by frequency offset. The phase difference caused by the corresponding frequency offset when the first terminal device and the second terminal device transmit the first signal can be obtained according to formula (15).
Δψ c_s (t 2 )=2π(Δf c_s ·(t 2 -t 1 )) Formula (15)
在公式(15)中,t1表示第一时刻,2π(Δfc_s·(t2-t1))表示第二时刻与第一时刻之间对应的由第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的频偏引起的相位差。In formula (15), t 1 represents the first time, and 2π(Δf c_s ·(t 2 -t 1 )) represents the relationship between the first terminal device and the second terminal device corresponding to the second time and the first time. The phase difference caused by the frequency offset between.
可以理解,相干聚合传输方式一中,在第一终端设备与第二终端设备使用码本传输的方式发送第一信号的情况下,t1表示的第一时刻为发送SRS的时刻(例如第一终端设备发送的第二SRS,或者第二终端设备发送的第三SRS)。在第一终端设备与第二终端设备使用非码本传输的方式发送第一信号的情况下,t1表示的第一时刻为网络设备发送CSI-RS的时刻。It can be understood that in coherent aggregation transmission mode 1, when the first terminal device and the second terminal device use codebook transmission to send the first signal, the first time represented by t 1 is the time when the SRS is sent (for example, the first The second SRS sent by the terminal device, or the third SRS sent by the second terminal device). When the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal using a non-codebook transmission method, the first time indicated by t 1 is the time when the network device sends the CSI-RS.
可以理解,通过第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的相位差信息和/或频偏信息可以计算得到公式(14)或公式(15)中的Δψc_s(t2),即可以补偿第一终端设备与第二终端设备发送第一信号时对应的相位差和/或频偏。 It can be understood that Δψ c_s (t 2 ) in Formula (14) or Formula (15) can be calculated through the phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the first terminal device and the second terminal device, that is, the first terminal device can be compensated. The corresponding phase difference and/or frequency offset when a terminal device and a second terminal device send the first signal.
由于本申请实施例中,第一指示信息指示第一终端设备接收的第一SRS资源配置信息用于第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准,使得第一终端设备可以接收来自第二终端设备的第一SRS,并对该第一SRS进行测量获得第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的相位差信息和/或频偏信息,通过该相位差信息和/或频偏信息可以补偿第一终端设备与第二终端设备同时发送第一信号时由于第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的相位变化和/或频偏变化不一致造成的相位差,进而可以提高第一终端设备和第二终端设备聚合传输的信号之间的相干性,以提升多路信号同向叠加的功率增益。因此,基于本申请实施例提供的相位校准方法,可以在多个终端设备之间相位变化和/或频偏变化不一致时提高聚合传输的多路信号的相干性以提升多路信号同向叠加的功率增益。In this embodiment of the present application, the first indication information indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information received by the first terminal device is used for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices, so that the first terminal device can receive data from the second terminal device. The first SRS of the terminal equipment, and measuring the first SRS to obtain the phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the first terminal equipment and the second terminal equipment, through which the phase difference information and/or the frequency offset information can be Compensating for the phase difference caused by inconsistent phase changes and/or frequency offset changes between the first terminal device and the second terminal device when the first terminal device and the second terminal device transmit the first signal at the same time, thereby improving the performance of the first terminal device and the second terminal device to aggregate the coherence between the transmitted signals to improve the power gain of co-directional superposition of multi-channel signals. Therefore, based on the phase calibration method provided by the embodiments of the present application, when the phase changes and/or frequency offset changes among multiple terminal devices are inconsistent, the coherence of the aggregated and transmitted multi-channel signals can be improved to improve the co-directional superposition of the multi-channel signals. Power gain.
其中,上述步骤S901至S904中的网络设备的动作可以由图6所示的通信装置600中的处理器601调用存储器603中存储的应用程序代码以指令该网络设备执行,上述步骤S901至S904中的第一终端设备的动作可以由图6所示的通信装置600中的处理器601调用存储器603中存储的应用程序代码以指令该第一终端设备执行,本申请实施例对此不作任何限制。Among them, the actions of the network device in the above steps S901 to S904 can be executed by the processor 601 in the communication device 600 shown in FIG. 6 by calling the application code stored in the memory 603 to instruct the network device to execute. The action of the first terminal device can be executed by the processor 601 in the communication device 600 shown in FIG. 6 by calling the application code stored in the memory 603 to instruct the first terminal device. This embodiment of the present application does not impose any limitation on this.
可选地,本申请实施例中,在网络设备向第一终端设备发送第一指示信息(步骤S902)之前,还包括:Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, before the network device sends the first indication information to the first terminal device (step S902), it also includes:
网络设备向第一终端设备发送第三指示信息。相应地,第一终端设备接收来自网络设备的第三指示信息。其中,第三指示信息指示第一终端设备接收的M个SRS资源配置信息为候选的用于第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准的SRS资源配置信息,M为大于1的正整数。第一指示信息还用于指示M个SRS资源配置信息中的N个SRS资源配置信息为第一SRS资源配置信息,N为小于或等于M的正整数。也就是说,第一终端设备根据第三指示信息可以获取多个用于第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准的SRS资源,进而第一终端设备可以在多个时频资源上接收多个不同的SRS进行相位校准,从而提高相位校准的效率。The network device sends third indication information to the first terminal device. Correspondingly, the first terminal device receives the third indication information from the network device. The third indication information indicates that the M pieces of SRS resource configuration information received by the first terminal device are candidate SRS resource configuration information for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices, and M is a positive integer greater than 1. . The first indication information is also used to indicate that the N pieces of SRS resource configuration information among the M pieces of SRS resource configuration information are the first SRS resource configuration information, and N is a positive integer less than or equal to M. That is to say, the first terminal device can obtain multiple SRS resources for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices according to the third indication information, and then the first terminal device can receive signals on multiple time-frequency resources. Multiple different SRSs are used for phase calibration, thereby improving the efficiency of phase calibration.
可选地,M个SRS资源配置信息为候选的SRS资源配置信息可以是指:第一终端设备在接收到该M个SRS资源配置信息中的一个或多个SRS资源配置信息的触发信令后,第一终端设备根据该一个或多个SRS资源配置信息进行相位校准。也就是说,第一指示信息可以用于触发M个SRS资源配置信息中的N个SRS资源配置信息,使得第一终端设备根据该N个SRS资源配置信息进行相位校准。Optionally, the SRS resource configuration information for which the M pieces of SRS resource configuration information are candidates may mean that the first terminal device receives the triggering signaling of one or more SRS resource configuration information among the M pieces of SRS resource configuration information. , the first terminal device performs phase calibration according to the one or more SRS resource configuration information. That is to say, the first indication information can be used to trigger N pieces of SRS resource configuration information among the M pieces of SRS resource configuration information, so that the first terminal device performs phase calibration according to the N pieces of SRS resource configuration information.
示例性的,第三指示信息可以是高层信令,例如RRC信令。其中,第三指示信息可以包括该M个SRS资源配置信息;或者,第三指示信息可以包括该M个SRS资源配置信息的索引信息。For example, the third indication information may be high-layer signaling, such as RRC signaling. The third indication information may include the M pieces of SRS resource configuration information; or the third indication information may include index information of the M pieces of SRS resource configuration information.
可选地,第一指示信息可以是MAC层信令或者DCI信令,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。Optionally, the first indication information may be MAC layer signaling or DCI signaling, which is not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
可选地,本申请实施例中,在第一终端设备对第一SRS进行测量获得第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的相位差信息和/或频偏信息(步骤S904)之后,还包括:Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, after the first terminal device measures the first SRS to obtain phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the first terminal device and the second terminal device (step S904), include:
第一终端设备根据相位差信息和/或频偏信息补偿第一终端设备与第二终端设备发送第一信号时对应的相位差和/或频偏,并向网络设备发送补偿后的第一信号,以及第二终端设备向网络设备发送第一信号。相应地,网络设备接收来自第一终端设备的补偿后的第一信号,以及接收来自第二终端设备的第一信号。其中,第一终端设备根据相位差信息和/或频偏信息对第一信号进行补偿。The first terminal device compensates the corresponding phase difference and/or frequency offset when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal according to the phase difference information and/or the frequency offset information, and sends the compensated first signal to the network device. , and the second terminal device sends the first signal to the network device. Correspondingly, the network device receives the compensated first signal from the first terminal device and receives the first signal from the second terminal device. Wherein, the first terminal device compensates the first signal according to the phase difference information and/or the frequency offset information.
示例性的,以进行预编码之前的第一信号为x1、预编码矩阵为V、以及相位差为上述方式一或方式二中的Δψc_s(t2)=ψ为例,补偿后的第一信号可以表示为e-jψVx1或者eVx1。其中,预编码矩阵是由网络设备指示的,该预编码矩阵为第一时刻对应的预编码矩阵。网络设备指示预编码矩阵的实现方式可以包括:在第一终端设备使用码本传输方式发送第一信号的情况下,网络设备通过TPMI指示该预编码矩阵;或者,在第一终端设备非码本传输方式发送第一信号的情况下,网络设备通过SRI指示该预编码矩阵,该实现方式可以参见具体实施方式前序部分的描述,在此不再赘述。For example, taking the first signal before precoding as x 1 , the precoding matrix as V, and the phase difference as Δψ c_s (t 2 )=ψ in the above-mentioned method one or method two, the compensated first signal A signal can be expressed as e -jψ Vx 1 or e Vx 1 . The precoding matrix is indicated by the network device, and the precoding matrix is the precoding matrix corresponding to the first moment. The implementation of the network device indicating the precoding matrix may include: when the first terminal device uses the codebook transmission mode to send the first signal, the network device indicates the precoding matrix through TPMI; or, when the first terminal device is not codebook When the first signal is sent in the transmission mode, the network device indicates the precoding matrix through the SRI. For this implementation, please refer to the description in the preamble of the specific embodiments, which will not be described again here.
应理解,在第一终端设备根据相位差信息和/或频偏信息补偿第一终端设备与第二终端设备发送第一信号时对应的相位差和/或频偏的情况下,第二终端设备可以不用对第一信号进行补偿。It should be understood that when the first terminal device compensates the corresponding phase difference and/or frequency offset when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal according to the phase difference information and/or the frequency offset information, the second terminal device There is no need to compensate the first signal.
应理解,在码本传输的方式下,第一时刻对应的预编码矩阵可以是指网络设备根据终端设备发送的SRS进行CSI测量确定的预编码矩阵。在非码本传输的方式下,第一时刻对应的预编码矩 阵可以是指终端设备根据网络设备发送的CSI-RS进行CSI测量确定的预编码矩阵。It should be understood that in the codebook transmission mode, the precoding matrix corresponding to the first moment may refer to the precoding matrix determined by the network device based on the CSI measurement based on the SRS sent by the terminal device. In non-codebook transmission mode, the precoding moment corresponding to the first moment The matrix may refer to a precoding matrix determined by CSI measurement performed by the terminal device based on the CSI-RS sent by the network device.
可以理解,根据码本传输、非码本传输、相干聚合传输方式一、以及相干聚合传输方式二,本申请实施例提供的相位校准方法可以应用于以下四个场景。It can be understood that according to codebook transmission, non-codebook transmission, coherent aggregation transmission mode 1, and coherent aggregation transmission mode 2, the phase calibration method provided by the embodiment of the present application can be applied to the following four scenarios.
场景一、使用码本传输和相干聚合传输方式一Scenario 1. Using codebook transmission and coherent aggregation transmission method 1
在场景一中,第一终端设备需要在接收第一SRS(步骤S903)之前,或者在步骤S903与第一终端设备发送补偿后的第一信号之间,向网络设备发送用于信道测量的SRS。相应地,网络设备可以根据第一终端设备与第二终端设备各自发送的SRS进行信道测量,联合确定第一时刻下第一终端设备和第二终端设备各自对应的预编码矩阵,并向第一终端设备发送上行调度许可信息。其中,网络设备通过上行调度许可信息中的TPMI指示第一终端设备对应的预编码矩阵,进而第一终端设备可以发送补偿后的第一信号。In scenario one, the first terminal device needs to send the SRS for channel measurement to the network device before receiving the first SRS (step S903), or between step S903 and the first terminal device sending the compensated first signal. . Correspondingly, the network device may perform channel measurement based on the SRSs sent by the first terminal device and the second terminal device respectively, jointly determine the precoding matrices corresponding to the first terminal device and the second terminal device at the first time, and provide the information to the first terminal device. The terminal device sends uplink scheduling permission information. Wherein, the network device indicates the precoding matrix corresponding to the first terminal device through the TPMI in the uplink scheduling grant information, and then the first terminal device can send the compensated first signal.
场景二、使用码本传输和相干聚合传输方式二Scenario 2: Using codebook transmission and coherent aggregation transmission method 2
场景二中与场景一相似,区别在于网络设备是根据第一终端设备与第二终端设备各自发送的SRS进行信道测量,分别独立确定第一时刻下第一终端设备和第二终端设备各自对应的预编码矩阵。其中,分别独立确定的第一终端设备对应的预编码矩阵和第二终端设备对应的预编码矩阵,未补偿第一终端设备与第二终端设备的第一相位差和/或第一频偏引起的相位差。Scenario 2 is similar to scenario 1. The difference is that the network device performs channel measurement based on the SRS sent by the first terminal device and the second terminal device respectively, and independently determines the corresponding SRS of the first terminal device and the second terminal device at the first moment. precoding matrix. Wherein, the precoding matrix corresponding to the first terminal device and the precoding matrix corresponding to the second terminal device are independently determined, and the first phase difference and/or the first frequency offset caused by the first terminal device and the second terminal device are not compensated. phase difference.
场景三、使用非码本传输和相干聚合传输方式二Scenario 3: Using non-codebook transmission and coherent aggregation transmission method 2
在场景三中,网络设备需要分别向第一终端设备和第二终端设备发送CSI-RS。相应地,第一终端设备和第二终端设备分别接收来自网络设备的CSI-RS,并根据非码本传输流程,分别向网络设备发送经过预编码矩阵预编码的SRS以获得各自对应的预编码向量,具体可以参见具体实施方式前序部分“7.2、非码本传输”的相关说明。In scenario three, the network device needs to send CSI-RS to the first terminal device and the second terminal device respectively. Correspondingly, the first terminal device and the second terminal device respectively receive the CSI-RS from the network device, and according to the non-codebook transmission process, respectively send the SRS precoded by the precoding matrix to the network device to obtain their corresponding precoding. Vector, for details, please refer to the relevant description of "7.2. Non-codebook transmission" in the preamble of the specific implementation.
可以理解,在场景三中,网络设备可以在步骤S903之前,或者在步骤S903与第一终端设备发送补偿后的第一信号之间,向第一终端设备和第二终端设备发送CSI-RS。It can be understood that in scenario three, the network device may send the CSI-RS to the first terminal device and the second terminal device before step S903, or between step S903 and the first terminal device sending the compensated first signal.
场景四、使用非码本传输和相干聚合传输方式一Scenario 4: Using non-codebook transmission and coherent aggregation transmission method 1
场景四与场景三类似,区别在于第一终端设备与第二终端设备需要共享信道信息以实现联合确定预编码矩阵。Scenario 4 is similar to scenario 3, except that the first terminal device and the second terminal device need to share channel information to jointly determine the precoding matrix.
下面对场景四的具体实施方式进行介绍。The specific implementation of scenario four is introduced below.
可选地,如图11所示,本申请实施例提供的相位校准方法中,在步骤S904之后,还包括如下步骤:Optionally, as shown in Figure 11, the phase calibration method provided by the embodiment of the present application further includes the following steps after step S904:
步骤S905、网络设备向第二终端设备发送第三指示信息。相应地,第二终端设备接收来自网络设备的第三指示信息。其中,第三指示信息用于指示第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送第一信道信息。其中,第一信道信息包括第二终端设备对CSI-RS进行测量获得的信道矩阵。该第一信道矩阵为第二终端设备与网络设备之间下行信道的信道矩阵。Step S905: The network device sends third instruction information to the second terminal device. Correspondingly, the second terminal device receives the third indication information from the network device. The third instruction information is used to instruct the second terminal device to send the first channel information to the first terminal device. Wherein, the first channel information includes a channel matrix obtained by measuring CSI-RS by the second terminal device. The first channel matrix is a channel matrix of a downlink channel between the second terminal device and the network device.
示例性的,第二终端设备可以接收来自网络设备的CSI-RS,并对CSI-RS进行测量获得第一信道信息。其中,该第一信道信息包括第二终端设备对CSI-RS测量得到的第一信道矩阵。For example, the second terminal device may receive the CSI-RS from the network device and measure the CSI-RS to obtain the first channel information. Wherein, the first channel information includes a first channel matrix obtained by measuring CSI-RS by the second terminal device.
可以理解,第二终端设备可以通过高层信令配置的CSI-RS资源配置信息接收来自网络设备的CSI-RS。It can be understood that the second terminal device can receive the CSI-RS from the network device through the CSI-RS resource configuration information configured by high-layer signaling.
可选地,本申请实施例中,第三指示信息包括第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间传输信息的第一资源配置信息。其中,资源配置信息包括时频资源、调制方式、码率、或者RV。Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, the third indication information includes first resource configuration information for transmitting information between the first terminal device and the second terminal device. The resource configuration information includes time-frequency resources, modulation mode, code rate, or RV.
可选地,本申请实施例中,第三指示信息还包括第二资源配置信息,该第二资源配置信息用于指示第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送第一信道信息的粒度。其中,第一信道信息的粒度指的是第二终端设备对CSI-RS进行测量获得的信道矩阵对应的频域资源的粒度。频域资源的粒度可以配置为宽带(即整个带宽)、子带、以及子载波。可以理解,在信道矩阵对应的频域资源的粒度配置为宽带的情况下,第一信道信息包括对应整个带宽的一个信道矩阵。在信道矩阵对应的频域资源的粒度配置为子带的情况下,第一信道信息可以包括整个带宽中每个子带对应的信道矩阵。在信道矩阵对应的频域资源的粒度配置为子载波的情况下,第一信道信息可以包括整个带宽中每个子载波对应的信道矩阵。Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, the third indication information also includes second resource configuration information, and the second resource configuration information is used to instruct the second terminal device to send the first channel information to the first terminal device at a granularity. The granularity of the first channel information refers to the granularity of frequency domain resources corresponding to the channel matrix obtained by measuring the CSI-RS by the second terminal device. The granularity of frequency domain resources can be configured as broadband (ie, the entire bandwidth), subbands, and subcarriers. It can be understood that when the granularity of the frequency domain resources corresponding to the channel matrix is configured as wideband, the first channel information includes a channel matrix corresponding to the entire bandwidth. When the granularity of the frequency domain resources corresponding to the channel matrix is configured as subbands, the first channel information may include the channel matrix corresponding to each subband in the entire bandwidth. When the granularity of the frequency domain resources corresponding to the channel matrix is configured as subcarriers, the first channel information may include the channel matrix corresponding to each subcarrier in the entire bandwidth.
S906、网络设备向第一终端设备发送第二指示信息。相应地,第一终端设备接收来自网络设 备的第二指示信息。其中,第二指示信息用于指示第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送第一预编码矩阵。第一预编码矩阵为第一终端设备确定使用非码本传输方式发送第一信号的情况下第一时刻对应的预编码矩阵。S906. The network device sends the second instruction information to the first terminal device. Correspondingly, the first terminal device receives the message from the network device Second instruction information for the device. The second instruction information is used to instruct the first terminal device to send the first precoding matrix to the second terminal device. The first precoding matrix is a precoding matrix corresponding to the first moment when the first terminal device determines to use a non-codebook transmission method to send the first signal.
可选地,本申请实施例中,第二指示信息还可以包括第三资源配置信息和第四资源配置信息。其中,第三资源配置信息与第一资源配置信息类似,用于第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的传输资源配置。第四资源配置信息与第二资源配置信息类似,用于指示信道矩阵对应的频域资源的粒度,具体可以参见关于第一资源配置信息和第二资源配置信息的相关说明,在此不再赘述。Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, the second indication information may also include third resource configuration information and fourth resource configuration information. The third resource configuration information is similar to the first resource configuration information and is used for transmission resource configuration between the first terminal device and the second terminal device. The fourth resource configuration information is similar to the second resource configuration information and is used to indicate the granularity of the frequency domain resources corresponding to the channel matrix. For details, please refer to the relevant description of the first resource configuration information and the second resource configuration information, which will not be described again here. .
应理解,本申请实施例中,步骤S905和步骤S906之间没有必然的执行先后顺序,可以是先执行步骤S905,再执行步骤S906;也可以是先执行步骤S906,再执行步骤S905;还可以是同时执行上述步骤S905和步骤S906,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。It should be understood that in this embodiment of the present application, there is no necessary order of execution between step S905 and step S906. Step S905 may be executed first, and then step S906 may be executed; step S906 may be executed first, and then step S905 may be executed; or step S905 may be executed first, and then step S905 may be executed. The above step S905 and step S906 are executed at the same time, and this is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
S907、第二终端设备根据第三指示信息向第一终端设备发送第一信道信息。相应地,第一终端设备接收来自第二终端设备的第一信道信息。也就是说,第二终端设备通过向第一终端设备发送第一信道信息,可以使得第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间共享第二终端设备与网络设备之间的下行信道的信道矩阵。S907. The second terminal device sends the first channel information to the first terminal device according to the third instruction information. Correspondingly, the first terminal device receives the first channel information from the second terminal device. That is to say, by sending the first channel information to the first terminal device, the second terminal device can share the channel matrix of the downlink channel between the second terminal device and the network device between the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
S908、第一终端设备根据第一信道信息以及第一终端设备对CSI-RS进行测量获得的第二信道信息确定第一预编码矩阵。其中,第一终端设备可以接收来自网络设备的CSI-RS,并对CSI-RS进行测量获得第二信道信息。该第二信道信息可以包括第二信道矩阵,该第二信道矩阵为第一终端设备与网络设备之间下行信道的信道矩阵。S908. The first terminal device determines the first precoding matrix according to the first channel information and the second channel information obtained by measuring the CSI-RS by the first terminal device. Wherein, the first terminal device may receive the CSI-RS from the network device, and measure the CSI-RS to obtain the second channel information. The second channel information may include a second channel matrix, and the second channel matrix is a channel matrix of a downlink channel between the first terminal device and the network device.
可选地,本申请实施例中,第一终端设备可以联合第一信道矩阵和第二信道矩阵,按照CJT的方式联合确定第一预编码矩阵。Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, the first terminal device may combine the first channel matrix and the second channel matrix to jointly determine the first precoding matrix in a CJT manner.
可选地,本申请实施例中,第一预编码矩阵包括第一终端设备对应的预编码矩阵和第二终端设备对应的预编码矩阵。Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, the first precoding matrix includes a precoding matrix corresponding to the first terminal device and a precoding matrix corresponding to the second terminal device.
可选地,本申请实施例中,在第一终端设备对第一SRS进行测量获得第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的相位差信息和/或频偏信息(步骤S903)之后,第一终端设备根据第一信道信息以及第一终端设备对CSI-RS进行测量获得的第二信道信息确定第一预编码矩阵(步骤S908),包括:第一终端设备根据相位差信息和/或频偏信息、第一信道信息以及第二信道信息确定第一预编码矩阵。也就是说,第一终端设备在确定第一预编码矩阵时可以将步骤S903获得的相位差信息和/或频偏信息补偿在第一预编码矩阵中。Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, after the first terminal device measures the first SRS to obtain phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the first terminal device and the second terminal device (step S903), A terminal device determines the first precoding matrix according to the first channel information and the second channel information obtained by measuring the CSI-RS by the first terminal device (step S908), including: the first terminal device determines the first precoding matrix according to the phase difference information and/or frequency The bias information, the first channel information and the second channel information determine the first precoding matrix. That is to say, when determining the first precoding matrix, the first terminal device may compensate the phase difference information and/or frequency offset information obtained in step S903 in the first precoding matrix.
可选地,本申请实施例中,第一终端设备将相位差信息和/或频偏信息补偿在第二信道矩阵上,并根据第一信道信息中的第一信道矩阵和补偿后的第二信道矩阵确定补偿后的第一预编码矩阵。Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, the first terminal device compensates the phase difference information and/or frequency offset information on the second channel matrix, and based on the first channel matrix in the first channel information and the compensated second The channel matrix determines the compensated first precoding matrix.
或者,可选地,第一终端设备根据第一信道信息第二信道信息确定第一预编码矩阵,并将相位差信息和/或频偏信息补偿在第一预编码矩阵中的第一终端设备对应的预编码矩阵上。示例性的,第一预编码矩阵包括第一终端设备对应的预编码矩阵V1和第二终端设备对应的预编码矩阵V2,第一终端设备将上述方式一或方式二中的Δψc_s(t2)=ψ补偿在预编码矩阵V1上,可以表示为e-jψV1或者eV1Or, optionally, the first terminal device determines the first precoding matrix according to the first channel information and the second channel information, and compensates the first terminal device in the first precoding matrix with the phase difference information and/or frequency offset information. on the corresponding precoding matrix. Exemplarily, the first precoding matrix includes a precoding matrix V 1 corresponding to the first terminal device and a precoding matrix V 2 corresponding to the second terminal device. The first terminal device converts Δψ c_s ( t 2 )=ψ compensation is on the precoding matrix V 1 and can be expressed as e -jψ V 1 or e V 1 .
S909、第一终端设备根据第二指示信息向第二终端设备发送第一预编码矩阵。相应地,第二终端设备接收来自第一终端设备的第一预编码矩阵。也就是说,第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送第一预编码矩阵,可以使得第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间共享第一预编码矩阵。S909. The first terminal device sends the first precoding matrix to the second terminal device according to the second instruction information. Correspondingly, the second terminal device receives the first precoding matrix from the first terminal device. That is to say, the first terminal device sends the first precoding matrix to the second terminal device, so that the first terminal device and the second terminal device can share the first precoding matrix.
可以理解,在第一终端设备和第二终端设备分别确定对应的预编码矩阵之后,可以根据各自对应的预编码矩阵对SRS进行预编码,并向网络设备发送经过预编后的SRS,之后网络设备通过向第一终端设备和第二终端设备发送各自对应的SRI,以指示第一终端设备和第二终端设备各自对应的预编码向量,具体可以参见具体实施方式前序部分“7.1.2、非码本传输”的相关说明,在此不再赘述。It can be understood that after the first terminal device and the second terminal device respectively determine the corresponding precoding matrix, the SRS can be precoded according to the corresponding precoding matrix, and the precoded SRS can be sent to the network device, and then the network The device indicates the corresponding precoding vectors of the first terminal device and the second terminal device by sending respective corresponding SRIs to the first terminal device and the second terminal device. For details, please refer to "7.1.2. The relevant instructions for "non-codebook transmission" will not be repeated here.
可选地,本申请实施例中,步骤S905~S909还可以在步骤S903之前执行。Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, steps S905 to S909 may also be executed before step S903.
可选地,如图11所示,本申请实施例中,在步骤S909之后,还包括:Optionally, as shown in Figure 11, in this embodiment of the present application, after step S909, it also includes:
S910、第一终端设备根据第一预编码矩阵中对应第一终端设备的预编码矩阵对第一信号进行预编码,以及根据第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的相位差信息和/或频偏信息对第一信号进行 补偿,并向网络设备发送经过预编码和补偿后的第一信号。相应地,网络设备接收来自第一终端设备的经过预编码和补偿后的第一信号。S910. The first terminal device precodes the first signal according to the precoding matrix corresponding to the first terminal device in the first precoding matrix, and according to the phase difference information between the first terminal device and the second terminal device and/or The frequency offset information is applied to the first signal compensation, and sends the precoded and compensated first signal to the network device. Correspondingly, the network device receives the precoded and compensated first signal from the first terminal device.
可以理解,若在步骤S908中第一终端设备对第一预编码矩阵进行相位补偿,则在步骤S910中,第一终端设备可以不需要根据第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的相位差信息和/或频偏信息对第一信号进行补偿。It can be understood that if the first terminal device performs phase compensation on the first precoding matrix in step S908, then in step S910, the first terminal device may not need to perform phase compensation according to the phase difference between the first terminal device and the second terminal device. The first signal is compensated by the information and/or the frequency offset information.
S911、第二终端设备根据第一预编码矩阵中对应第二终端设备的预编码矩阵对第一信号进行预编码,并向网络设备发送经过预编码的第一信号。相应地,网络设备接收来自第二终端设备的第一信号。S911. The second terminal device precodes the first signal according to the precoding matrix corresponding to the second terminal device in the first precoding matrix, and sends the precoded first signal to the network device. Correspondingly, the network device receives the first signal from the second terminal device.
由于本申请实施例中,第一指示信息指示第一终端设备接收的第一SRS资源配置信息用于第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准,因此第一终端设备可以接收来自第二终端设备的第一SRS,并对该第一SRS进行测量获得第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的相位差信息和/或频偏信息,通过该相位差信息和/或频偏信息可以补偿第一终端设备与第二终端设备同时发送第一信号时由于第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的相位变化和/或频偏变化不一致造成的相位差,进而可以提高第一终端设备和第二终端设备聚合传输的信号之间的相干性,以提升多路信号同向叠加的功率增益。因此,基于本申请实施例提供的相位校准方法,可以在多个终端设备之间相位变化和/或频偏变化不一致时提高聚合传输的多路信号的相干性以提升多路信号同向叠加的功率增益。Since in the embodiment of the present application, the first indication information indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information received by the first terminal device is used for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices, the first terminal device can receive the first SRS resource configuration information from the second terminal device. The first SRS of the terminal equipment, and measuring the first SRS to obtain the phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the first terminal equipment and the second terminal equipment, through which the phase difference information and/or the frequency offset information can be Compensating for the phase difference caused by inconsistent phase changes and/or frequency offset changes between the first terminal device and the second terminal device when the first terminal device and the second terminal device transmit the first signal at the same time, thereby improving the performance of the first terminal device and the second terminal device to aggregate the coherence between the transmitted signals to improve the power gain of co-directional superposition of multi-channel signals. Therefore, based on the phase calibration method provided by the embodiments of the present application, when the phase changes and/or frequency offset changes among multiple terminal devices are inconsistent, the coherence of the aggregated and transmitted multi-channel signals can be improved to improve the co-directional superposition of the multi-channel signals. Power gain.
其中,上述步骤S901至S911中的网络设备的动作可以由图6所示的通信装置600中的处理器601调用存储器603中存储的应用程序代码以指令该网络设备执行,上述步骤S901至S911中的第一终端设备的动作可以由图6所示的通信装置600中的处理器601调用存储器603中存储的应用程序代码以指令该第一终端设备执行,本申请实施例对此不作任何限制。Among them, the actions of the network device in the above steps S901 to S911 can be executed by the processor 601 in the communication device 600 shown in FIG. 6 by calling the application code stored in the memory 603 to instruct the network device to execute. The action of the first terminal device can be executed by the processor 601 in the communication device 600 shown in FIG. 6 by calling the application code stored in the memory 603 to instruct the first terminal device. This embodiment of the present application does not impose any limitation on this.
应理解,上述方案仅以第一终端设备与第二终端设备聚合传输为例说明本申请的相位校准方法,上述方案还适用于三个或更多个终端设备进行聚合传输的场景。It should be understood that the above solution only takes the aggregation transmission of the first terminal device and the second terminal device as an example to illustrate the phase calibration method of the present application. The above solution is also applicable to the scenario where three or more terminal devices perform aggregation transmission.
示例性的,以三个终端设备包括第一终端设备、第二终端设备和第三终端设备为例,第一终端设备接收来自网络设备的指示信息,该指示信息指示第一终端设备接收的第一SRS资源配置信息用于第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准;以及第二终端设备接收来自网络设备的指示信息,该指示信息用于指示第二终端设备接收的第二SRS资源配置信息用于第二终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准;以及第三终端设备接收网络设备的指示信息,该指示信息指示第三终端设备接收的第三SRS资源配置信息用于第三终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准,之后第一终端设备或第二终端设备或第三终端设备分别接收各自SRS,并测量获得第一终端设备、第二终端设备、以及第三终端之间的相位差信息和/或频偏信息。其中,第一终端设备、第二终端设备、以及第三终端之间的相位差信息和/或频偏信息用于补偿第一终端设备、第二终端设备、以及第三终端设备之间的相位差和/或频偏。For example, taking three terminal devices including a first terminal device, a second terminal device, and a third terminal device, the first terminal device receives indication information from the network device, and the indication information indicates the third terminal device received by the first terminal device. An SRS resource configuration information is used for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices; and the second terminal device receives indication information from the network device, the indication information is used to indicate the second SRS resource received by the second terminal device The configuration information is used for phase calibration between the second terminal equipment and other terminal equipment; and the third terminal equipment receives indication information from the network equipment, the indication information indicates that the third SRS resource configuration information received by the third terminal equipment is used for the third Phase calibration between the terminal equipment and other terminal equipment, and then the first terminal equipment, the second terminal equipment, or the third terminal equipment respectively receive their respective SRS, and measure and obtain the relationship between the first terminal equipment, the second terminal equipment, and the third terminal equipment. phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between Wherein, the phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the first terminal equipment, the second terminal equipment and the third terminal equipment are used to compensate the phase between the first terminal equipment, the second terminal equipment and the third terminal equipment. difference and/or frequency offset.
可以理解的是,以上各个实施例中,由网络设备实现的方法和/或步骤,也可以由可用于网络设备的部件(例如芯片或者电路)实现;由终端设备实现的方法和/或步骤,也可以由可用于终端设备的部件(例如芯片或者电路)实现。It can be understood that in the above embodiments, the methods and/or steps implemented by the network device can also be implemented by components (such as chips or circuits) that can be used in the network device; the methods and/or steps implemented by the terminal device, It can also be implemented by components (such as chips or circuits) that can be used in terminal devices.
上述主要从各个网元之间交互的角度对本申请实施例提供的方案进行了介绍。相应的,本申请实施例还提供了通信装置,该通信装置用于实现上述各种方法。该通信装置可以为上述方法实施例中的终端设备,或者包含上述终端设备的装置,或者为可用于终端设备的部件;或者,该通信装置可以为上述方法实施例中的网络设备,或者包含上述网络设备的装置,或者为可用于网络设备的部件可以理解的是,该通信装置为了实现上述功能,其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,本申请能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。The above mainly introduces the solution provided by the embodiment of the present application from the perspective of interaction between various network elements. Correspondingly, embodiments of the present application also provide a communication device, which is used to implement the above various methods. The communication device may be the terminal device in the above method embodiment, or a device including the above terminal device, or a component that can be used in the terminal device; or the communication device may be a network device in the above method embodiment, or include the above It can be understood that the device of a network device, or a component that can be used in a network device, is that in order to implement the above functions, the communication device includes corresponding hardware structures and/or software modules that perform each function. Persons skilled in the art should easily realize that, with the units and algorithm steps of each example described in conjunction with the embodiments disclosed herein, the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is performed by hardware or computer software driving the hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Skilled artisans may implement the described functionality using different methods for each specific application, but such implementations should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
本申请实施例可以根据上述方法实施例中对通信装置进行功能模块的划分,例如,可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块,也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成 的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。应理解,本申请实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。Embodiments of the present application can divide the communication device into functional modules according to the above method embodiments. For example, each functional module can be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions can be integrated into one processing module. The above integration The modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or software function modules. It should be understood that the division of modules in the embodiment of the present application is schematic and is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
比如,以通信装置为上述方法实施例中的第一终端设备为例,图12示出了一种第一终端设备120的结构示意图。该第一终端设备120包括收发模块1201和处理模块1202。收发模块1201,也可以称为收发单元用以实现收发功能,例如可以是收发电路,收发机,收发器或者通信接口。For example, taking the communication device as the first terminal device in the above method embodiment, FIG. 12 shows a schematic structural diagram of the first terminal device 120. The first terminal device 120 includes a transceiver module 1201 and a processing module 1202. The transceiver module 1201, which may also be called a transceiver unit, is used to implement the transceiver function. For example, it may be a transceiver circuit, a transceiver, a transceiver, or a communication interface.
其中,收发模块1201,用于接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示第一终端设备接收的第一SRS资源配置信息用于第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准;收发模块1201,还用于根据第一指示信息在第一SRS资源配置信息指示的时频资源上接收来自第二终端设备的第一SRS;处理模块1202,用于对第一SRS进行测量获得第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的相位差信息和/或频偏信息。其中,相位差信息和/或频偏信息用于补偿第一终端设备与第二终端设备发送第一信号时对应的相位差和/或频偏。Among them, the transceiver module 1201 is used to receive first indication information from the network device. The first indication information is used to instruct the first terminal device to receive the first SRS resource configuration information for use between the first terminal device and other terminal devices. phase calibration; the transceiver module 1201 is also configured to receive the first SRS from the second terminal device on the time-frequency resource indicated by the first SRS resource configuration information according to the first indication information; the processing module 1202 is configured to perform the first SRS Measurement is performed to obtain phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the first terminal device and the second terminal device. The phase difference information and/or frequency offset information are used to compensate the corresponding phase difference and/or frequency offset when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal.
在一些实施例中,第一终端设备与第二终端设备发送第一信号时对应的相位差和/或频偏包括第一相位差与第二相位差之间的差值,第一相位差为第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间在第一时刻的相位差,第二相位差为第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间在第二时刻的相位差。其中,第一时刻为第一终端设备确定的CSI测量时刻,第二时刻为第一终端设备向网络设备发送第一信号的时刻。In some embodiments, the corresponding phase difference and/or frequency offset when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal include the difference between the first phase difference and the second phase difference, and the first phase difference is The phase difference between the first terminal device and the second terminal device at the first time, and the second phase difference is the phase difference between the first terminal device and the second terminal device at the second time. The first time is the CSI measurement time determined by the first terminal device, and the second time is the time when the first terminal device sends the first signal to the network device.
在一些实施例中,第一终端设备与第二终端设备发送第一信号时对应的频偏包括第一频偏与第二频偏之间的差值。其中,第一频偏为第一终端设备与第二终端设备在第一时刻的频偏,第二频偏为第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间在第二时刻的频偏。第一时刻为第一终端设备确定的CSI测量时刻,第二时刻为第一终端设备向网络设备发送第一信号的时刻。In some embodiments, the corresponding frequency offset when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal includes a difference between the first frequency offset and the second frequency offset. The first frequency offset is the frequency offset between the first terminal device and the second terminal device at the first time, and the second frequency offset is the frequency offset between the first terminal device and the second terminal device at the second time. The first time is the CSI measurement time determined by the first terminal device, and the second time is the time when the first terminal device sends the first signal to the network device.
在一些实施例中,第一指示信息包括第一SRS资源配置信息,该第一SRS资源配置信息包括usage。其中,usage指示第一SRS资源配置信息用于第一终端设备接收SRS;或者,usage指示第一SRS资源配置信息用于第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准。In some embodiments, the first indication information includes first SRS resource configuration information, and the first SRS resource configuration information includes usage. Wherein, usage indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information is used for the first terminal device to receive SRS; or usage indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information is used for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices.
在一些实施例中,第一指示信息包括第一SRS资源配置信息,该第一SRS资源配置信息包括的时域资源信息对应的符号类型为下行符号。In some embodiments, the first indication information includes first SRS resource configuration information, and the symbol type corresponding to the time domain resource information included in the first SRS resource configuration information is a downlink symbol.
在一些实施例中,在第一终端设备确定使用非码本传输方式发送第一信号的情况下,第一终端设备确定的CSI测量时刻为第一终端设备接收来自网络设备的CSI-RS的时刻。In some embodiments, when the first terminal device determines to use a non-codebook transmission method to send the first signal, the CSI measurement time determined by the first terminal device is the time when the first terminal device receives the CSI-RS from the network device. .
在一些实施例中,收发模块1201,还用于接收来自网络设备的第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于指示第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送第一预编码矩阵,该第一预编码矩阵为第一终端设备确定使用非码本传输方式发送第一信号的情况下第一时刻对应的预编码矩阵;收发模块1201,还用于接收来自第二终端设备的第一信道信息,该第一信道信息包括第二终端设备对CSI-RS进行测量获得的信道矩阵;处理模块1202,还用于根据第一信道信息以及第一终端设备对CSI-RS进行测量获得的第二信道信息确定第一预编码矩阵;收发模块1201,还用于向第二终端设备发送第一预编码矩阵。In some embodiments, the transceiver module 1201 is also configured to receive second indication information from the network device. The second indication information is used to instruct the first terminal device to send the first precoding matrix to the second terminal device. The first The precoding matrix is the precoding matrix corresponding to the first moment when the first terminal device determines to use a non-codebook transmission method to send the first signal; the transceiver module 1201 is also used to receive the first channel information from the second terminal device, The first channel information includes a channel matrix obtained by measuring the CSI-RS by the second terminal device; the processing module 1202 is also used to obtain the second channel information based on the first channel information and the first terminal device by measuring the CSI-RS. Determine the first precoding matrix; the transceiving module 1201 is also used to send the first precoding matrix to the second terminal device.
在一些实施例中,在第一终端设备确定使用码本传输方式发送第一信号的情况下,第一终端设备确定的CSI测量时刻为第一终端设备向网络设备发送第二SRS的时刻,该第二SRS用于上行信道的CSI测量;或者,第一终端设备确定的CSI测量时刻为第二终端设备向网络设备发送第三SRS的时刻。其中,第二终端设备向网络设备发送第三SRS的时刻是由网络设备指示给第一终端设备的,该第三SRS用于上行信道的CSI测量。In some embodiments, when the first terminal device determines to use the codebook transmission method to send the first signal, the CSI measurement time determined by the first terminal device is the time when the first terminal device sends the second SRS to the network device. The second SRS is used for CSI measurement of the uplink channel; or, the CSI measurement time determined by the first terminal device is the time when the second terminal device sends the third SRS to the network device. Wherein, the time when the second terminal device sends the third SRS to the network device is instructed by the network device to the first terminal device, and the third SRS is used for CSI measurement of the uplink channel.
在一些实施例中,收发模块1201,还用于在接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息之前,向网络设备发送能力信息,该能力信息用于指示第一终端设备具备获得第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的相位差信息和/或频偏信息的能力。In some embodiments, the transceiver module 1201 is also configured to send capability information to the network device before receiving the first indication information from the network device. The capability information is used to indicate that the first terminal device is capable of obtaining the first terminal device and the third terminal device. Capability of phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between two terminal devices.
在一些实施例中,收发模块1201,还用于在接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息之前,接收来自网络设备的第三指示信息。其中,第三指示信息指示第一终端设备接收的M个SRS资源配置信息为候选的用于第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准的SRS资源配置信息,M为大于1的正整数。第一指示信息还用于指示M个SRS资源配置信息中的N个SRS资源配置信息为第一SRS资源配置信息,N为小于或等于M的正整数。 In some embodiments, the transceiving module 1201 is also configured to receive third indication information from the network device before receiving the first indication information from the network device. The third indication information indicates that the M pieces of SRS resource configuration information received by the first terminal device are candidate SRS resource configuration information for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices, and M is a positive integer greater than 1. . The first indication information is also used to indicate that the N pieces of SRS resource configuration information among the M pieces of SRS resource configuration information are the first SRS resource configuration information, and N is a positive integer less than or equal to M.
其中,上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述,在此不再赘述。All relevant content of each step involved in the above method embodiments can be quoted from the functional description of the corresponding functional module, and will not be described again here.
在本申请实施例中,该第一终端设备120以采用集成的方式划分各个功能模块的形式来呈现。这里的“模块”可以指特定ASIC,电路,执行一个或多个软件或固件程序的处理器和存储器,集成逻辑电路,和/或其他可以提供上述功能的器件。在一个简单的实施例中,本领域的技术人员可以想到该第一终端设备120可以采用图6所示的通信装置600的形式。In this embodiment of the present application, the first terminal device 120 is presented in the form of dividing various functional modules in an integrated manner. A "module" here may refer to a specific ASIC, circuit, processor and memory that executes one or more software or firmware programs, integrated logic circuits, and/or other devices that may provide the above functions. In a simple embodiment, those skilled in the art can imagine that the first terminal device 120 may take the form of the communication device 600 shown in FIG. 6 .
比如,图6所示的通信装置600中的处理器601可以通过调用存储器603中存储的计算机执行指令,使得通信装置600执行上述方法实施例中的相位校准方法。For example, the processor 601 in the communication device 600 shown in FIG. 6 can cause the communication device 600 to execute the phase calibration method in the above method embodiment by calling the computer execution instructions stored in the memory 603.
具体的,图12中的收发模块1201和处理模块1202的功能/实现过程可以通过图6所示的通信装置600中的处理器601调用存储器603中存储的计算机执行指令来实现。或者,图12中的处理模块1202的功能/实现过程可以通过图6所示的通信装置600中的处理器601调用存储器603中存储的计算机执行指令来实现,图12中的收发模块1201的功能/实现过程可以通过图6中所示的通信装置600中的通信接口604来实现。Specifically, the functions/implementation processes of the transceiver module 1201 and the processing module 1202 in Figure 12 can be implemented by the processor 601 in the communication device 600 shown in Figure 6 calling the computer execution instructions stored in the memory 603. Alternatively, the function/implementation process of the processing module 1202 in Figure 12 can be realized by the processor 601 in the communication device 600 shown in Figure 6 calling the computer execution instructions stored in the memory 603. The function of the transceiver module 1201 in Figure 12 /The implementation process can be implemented through the communication interface 604 in the communication device 600 shown in FIG. 6 .
由于本申请实施例提供的第一终端设备120可执行上述相位校准方法,因此其所能获得的技术效果可参考上述方法实施例,在此不再赘述。Since the first terminal device 120 provided by the embodiment of the present application can perform the above-mentioned phase calibration method, the technical effect it can obtain can be referred to the above-mentioned method embodiment, which will not be described again here.
或者,比如,以通信装置为上述方法实施例中的网络设备为例,图13示出了一种网络设备130的结构示意图。该网络设备130包括收发模块1301和处理模块1302。收发模块1301,也可以称为收发单元用以实现收发功能,例如可以是收发电路,收发机,收发器或者通信接口。Or, for example, taking the communication device as the network device in the above method embodiment, FIG. 13 shows a schematic structural diagram of a network device 130. The network device 130 includes a transceiver module 1301 and a processing module 1302. The transceiver module 1301, which may also be called a transceiver unit, is used to implement the transceiver function. For example, it may be a transceiver circuit, a transceiver, a transceiver, or a communication interface.
其中,处理模块1302,用于获取第一指示信息,该第一指示信息指示第一终端设备接收的第一SRS源配置信息用于第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准;收发模块1301,用于向第一终端设备发送第一指示信息。Among them, the processing module 1302 is used to obtain the first indication information, which indicates that the first SRS source configuration information received by the first terminal device is used for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices; the transceiver module 1301, used to send first indication information to the first terminal device.
在一些实施例中,第一指示信息包括第一SRS资源配置信息,该第一SRS资源配置信息包括usage。其中,usage指示第一SRS资源配置信息用于第一终端设备接收SRS;或者,usage指示第一SRS资源配置信息用于第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准。In some embodiments, the first indication information includes first SRS resource configuration information, and the first SRS resource configuration information includes usage. Wherein, usage indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information is used for the first terminal device to receive SRS; or usage indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information is used for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices.
在一些实施例中,第一指示信息包括第一SRS资源配置信息,该第一SRS资源配置信息包括的时域资源信息对应的符号类型为下行符号。In some embodiments, the first indication information includes first SRS resource configuration information, and the symbol type corresponding to the time domain resource information included in the first SRS resource configuration information is a downlink symbol.
在一些实施例中,收发模块1301,还用于向第一终端设备发送第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于指示第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送第一预编码矩阵,该第一预编码矩阵为第一终端设备确定使用非码本传输方式发送第一信号的情况下第一时刻对应的预编码矩阵,该第一时刻为第一终端设备接收来自网络设备的CSI-RS的时刻。In some embodiments, the transceiver module 1301 is also configured to send second indication information to the first terminal device. The second indication information is used to instruct the first terminal device to send the first precoding matrix to the second terminal device. A precoding matrix is a precoding matrix corresponding to the first time when the first terminal device determines to use a non-codebook transmission method to send the first signal. The first time is when the first terminal device receives the CSI-RS from the network device. time.
在一些实施例中,处理模块1302用于获取第一指示信息包括:通过收发模块1301接收来自第一终端设备的能力信息,该能力信息用于指示第一终端设备具备获得第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的相位差信息和/或频偏信息的能力;根据该能力信息确定第一指示信息。In some embodiments, the processing module 1302 is used to obtain the first indication information including: receiving capability information from the first terminal device through the transceiver module 1301. The capability information is used to indicate that the first terminal device is capable of obtaining the first terminal device and the first terminal device. The capability of the phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the two terminal devices; the first indication information is determined based on the capability information.
示例性的,收发模块1301,还用于在向第一终端设备发送第一指示信息之前,向第一终端设备发送第三指示信息。其中,第三指示信息指示第一终端设备接收的M个SRS资源配置信息为候选的用于第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准的SRS资源配置信息,M为大于1的正整数。第一指示信息还用于指示M个SRS资源配置信息中的N个SRS资源配置信息为第一SRS资源配置信息,N为小于或等于M的正整数。Exemplarily, the transceiving module 1301 is also configured to send third indication information to the first terminal device before sending the first indication information to the first terminal device. The third indication information indicates that the M pieces of SRS resource configuration information received by the first terminal device are candidate SRS resource configuration information for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices, and M is a positive integer greater than 1. . The first indication information is also used to indicate that the N pieces of SRS resource configuration information among the M pieces of SRS resource configuration information are the first SRS resource configuration information, and N is a positive integer less than or equal to M.
在本申请实施例中,该网络设备130以采用集成的方式划分各个功能模块的形式来呈现。这里的“模块”可以指特定ASIC,电路,执行一个或多个软件或固件程序的处理器和存储器,集成逻辑电路,和/或其他可以提供上述功能的器件。在一个简单的实施例中,本领域的技术人员可以想到该网络设备130可以采用图6所示的通信装置600的形式。In this embodiment of the present application, the network device 130 is presented in the form of dividing various functional modules in an integrated manner. A "module" here may refer to a specific ASIC, circuit, processor and memory that executes one or more software or firmware programs, integrated logic circuits, and/or other devices that may provide the above functions. In a simple embodiment, those skilled in the art can imagine that the network device 130 may take the form of the communication device 600 shown in FIG. 6 .
比如,图6所示的通信装置600中的处理器601可以通过调用存储器603中存储的计算机执行指令,使得通信装置600执行上述方法实施例中的相位校准方法。For example, the processor 601 in the communication device 600 shown in FIG. 6 can cause the communication device 600 to execute the phase calibration method in the above method embodiment by calling the computer execution instructions stored in the memory 603.
具体的,图13中的收发模块1301和处理模块1302的功能/实现过程可以通过图6所示的通信装置600中的处理器601调用存储器603中存储的计算机执行指令来实现。或者,图13中的处理模块1302的功能/实现过程可以通过图6所示的通信装置600中的处理器601调用存储器603 中存储的计算机执行指令来实现,图13中的收发模块1301的功能/实现过程可以通过图6中所示的通信装置600中的通信接口604来实现。Specifically, the functions/implementation processes of the transceiver module 1301 and the processing module 1302 in Figure 13 can be implemented by the processor 601 in the communication device 600 shown in Figure 6 calling the computer execution instructions stored in the memory 603. Alternatively, the function/implementation process of the processing module 1302 in Figure 13 can be used to call the memory 603 through the processor 601 in the communication device 600 shown in Figure 6 The function/implementation process of the transceiver module 1301 in Figure 13 can be implemented through the communication interface 604 in the communication device 600 shown in Figure 6 .
由于本实施例提供的网络设备130可执行上述相位校准方法,因此其所能获得的技术效果可参考上述方法实施例,在此不再赘述。Since the network device 130 provided in this embodiment can perform the above-mentioned phase calibration method, the technical effects it can obtain can be referred to the above-mentioned method embodiments, which will not be described again here.
应理解,以上模块或单元的一个或多个可以软件、硬件或二者结合来实现。当以上任一模块或单元以软件实现的时候,软件以计算机程序指令的方式存在,并被存储在存储器中,处理器可以用于执行程序指令并实现以上方法流程。该处理器可以内置于SoC(片上系统)或ASIC,也可是一个独立的半导体芯片。该处理器内处理用于执行软件指令以进行运算或处理的核外,还可进一步包括必要的硬件加速器,如现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA)、PLD(可编程逻辑器件)、或者实现专用逻辑运算的逻辑电路。It should be understood that one or more of the above modules or units may be implemented in software, hardware, or a combination of both. When any of the above modules or units is implemented in software, the software exists in the form of computer program instructions and is stored in the memory. The processor can be used to execute the program instructions and implement the above method flow. The processor can be built into an SoC (System on a Chip) or ASIC, or it can be an independent semiconductor chip. In addition to the core used to execute software instructions for calculation or processing, the processor can further include necessary hardware accelerators, such as field programmable gate array (FPGA), PLD (programmable logic device) , or a logic circuit that implements dedicated logic operations.
当以上模块或单元以硬件实现的时候,该硬件可以是CPU、微处理器、数字信号处理(digital signal processing,DSP)芯片、微控制单元(microcontroller unit,MCU)、人工智能处理器、ASIC、SoC、FPGA、PLD、专用数字电路、硬件加速器或非集成的分立器件中的任一个或任一组合,其可以运行必要的软件或不依赖于软件以执行以上方法流程。When the above modules or units are implemented in hardware, the hardware can be a CPU, a microprocessor, a digital signal processing (DSP) chip, a microcontroller unit (MCU), an artificial intelligence processor, an ASIC, Any one or any combination of SoC, FPGA, PLD, dedicated digital circuits, hardware accelerators or non-integrated discrete devices, which can run the necessary software or not rely on software to perform the above method flow.
可选的,本申请实施例还提供了一种通信装置(例如,该通信装置可以是芯片或芯片系统),该通信装置包括处理器,用于实现上述任一方法实施例中的方法。在一种可能的设计中,该通信装置还包括存储器。该存储器,用于保存必要的程序指令和数据,处理器可以调用存储器中存储的程序代码以指令该通信装置执行上述任一方法实施例中的方法。当然,存储器也可以不在该通信装置中。该通信装置是芯片系统时,可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。Optionally, the embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device (for example, the communication device may be a chip or a chip system). The communication device includes a processor and is used to implement the method in any of the above method embodiments. In a possible design, the communication device further includes a memory. The memory is used to store necessary program instructions and data. The processor can call the program code stored in the memory to instruct the communication device to execute the method in any of the above method embodiments. Of course, the memory may not be in the communication device. When the communication device is a chip system, it may be composed of a chip or may include a chip and other discrete devices, which is not specifically limited in the embodiments of the present application.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件程序实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式来实现。该计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行计算机程序指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例的流程或功能。计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或者数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line,DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可以用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带),光介质(例如,DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘(solid state disk,SSD))等。In the above embodiments, it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented using a software program, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When computer program instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, processes or functions according to embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part. The computer may be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device. Computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, e.g., computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server or data center via a wired (e.g. Coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) means to transmit to another website, computer, server or data center. Computer-readable storage media can be any available media that can be accessed by a computer or include one or more data storage devices such as servers and data centers that can be integrated with the media. Available media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disk, hard disk, tape), optical media (eg, DVD), or semiconductor media (eg, solid state disk (SSD)), etc.
尽管在此结合各实施例对本申请进行了描述,然而,在实施所要求保护的本申请过程中,本领域技术人员通过查看附图、公开内容、以及所附权利要求书,可理解并实现公开实施例的其他变化。在权利要求中,“包括”(comprising)一词不排除其他组成部分或步骤,“一”或“一个”不排除多个的情况。单个处理器或其他单元可以实现权利要求中列举的若干项功能。相互不同的从属权利要求中记载了某些措施,但这并不表示这些措施不能组合起来产生良好的效果。Although the present application has been described herein in connection with various embodiments, in practicing the claimed application, those skilled in the art can understand and implement the disclosure by reviewing the drawings, the disclosure, and the appended claims. Other variations of the embodiment. In the claims, the word "comprising" does not exclude other components or steps, and "a" or "an" does not exclude a plurality. A single processor or other unit may perform several of the functions recited in the claims. The mere fact that certain measures are recited in mutually different dependent claims does not mean that a combination of these measures cannot be combined to advantageous effects.
尽管结合具体特征及其实施例对本申请进行了描述,显而易见的,在不脱离本申请的精神和范围的情况下,可对其进行各种修改和组合。相应地,本说明书和附图仅仅是所附权利要求所界定的本申请的示例性说明,且视为已覆盖本申请范围内的任意和所有修改、变化、组合或等同物。显然,本领域的技术人员可以对本申请进行各种改动和变型而不脱离本申请的精神和范围。这样,倘若本申请的这些修改和变型属于本申请权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内,则本申请也意图包含这些改动和变型在内。 Although the present application has been described in conjunction with specific features and embodiments thereof, it will be apparent that various modifications and combinations may be made without departing from the spirit and scope of the application. Accordingly, the specification and drawings are intended to be merely illustrative of the application as defined by the appended claims and are to be construed to cover any and all modifications, variations, combinations or equivalents within the scope of the application. Obviously, those skilled in the art can make various changes and modifications to the present application without departing from the spirit and scope of the present application. In this way, if these modifications and variations of the present application fall within the scope of the claims of the present application and equivalent technologies, the present application is also intended to include these modifications and variations.

Claims (25)

  1. 一种相位校准方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A phase calibration method, characterized in that the method includes:
    第一终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息指示所述第一终端设备接收的第一探测参考信号SRS资源配置信息用于所述第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准;The first terminal device receives first indication information from the network device. The first indication information indicates that the first sounding reference signal SRS resource configuration information received by the first terminal device is used for the first terminal device and other terminal devices. phase calibration between;
    所述第一终端设备根据所述第一指示信息在所述第一SRS资源配置信息指示的时频资源上接收来自第二终端设备的第一SRS,并对所述第一SRS进行测量获得所述第一终端设备与所述第二终端设备之间的相位差信息和/或频偏信息,所述相位差信息和/或频偏信息用于补偿所述第一终端设备与所述第二终端设备发送第一信号时对应的相位差和/或频偏。The first terminal device receives the first SRS from the second terminal device on the time-frequency resource indicated by the first SRS resource configuration information according to the first indication information, and measures the first SRS to obtain the result. Phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the first terminal equipment and the second terminal equipment, the phase difference information and/or frequency offset information are used to compensate the first terminal equipment and the second terminal equipment. The corresponding phase difference and/or frequency offset when the terminal device sends the first signal.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一终端设备与所述第二终端设备发送第一信号时对应的相位差包括第一相位差与第二相位差之间的差值,所述第一相位差为所述第一终端设备与所述第二终端设备之间在第一时刻的相位差,所述第二相位差为所述第一终端设备与所述第二终端设备之间在第二时刻的相位差,其中,所述第一时刻为所述第一终端设备确定的信道状态信息CSI测量时刻,所述第二时刻为所述第一终端设备向所述网络设备发送所述第一信号的时刻。The method of claim 1, wherein the phase difference corresponding to when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal includes the difference between the first phase difference and the second phase difference. , the first phase difference is the phase difference between the first terminal device and the second terminal device at the first moment, and the second phase difference is the phase difference between the first terminal device and the second terminal device. The phase difference between devices at a second time, wherein the first time is the channel state information CSI measurement time determined by the first terminal device, and the second time is the first terminal device transmitting data to the network The moment when the device sends the first signal.
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一终端设备与所述第二终端设备发送第一信号时对应的频偏包括第一频偏与第二频偏之间的差值,所述第一频偏为所述第一终端设备与所述第二终端设备在第一时刻的频偏,所述第二频偏为所述第一终端设备与所述第二终端设备之间在第二时刻的频偏,其中,所述第一时刻为所述第一终端设备确定的CSI测量时刻,所述第二时刻为所述第一终端设备向所述网络设备发送所述第一信号的时刻。The method according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that, when the first terminal device and the second terminal device send the first signal, the corresponding frequency offset includes the difference between the first frequency offset and the second frequency offset. The difference value, the first frequency offset is the frequency offset between the first terminal equipment and the second terminal equipment at the first moment, the second frequency offset is the frequency offset between the first terminal equipment and the second terminal equipment The frequency offset between devices at a second time, wherein the first time is the CSI measurement time determined by the first terminal device, and the second time is the time the first terminal device sends to the network device. The moment of the first signal.
  4. 根据权利要求1-3任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息包括所述第一SRS资源配置信息,所述第一SRS资源配置信息包括用途指示usage,所述usage指示所述第一SRS资源配置信息用于所述第一终端设备接收SRS;或者,所述usage指示所述第一SRS资源配置信息用于所述第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, characterized in that the first indication information includes the first SRS resource configuration information, the first SRS resource configuration information includes a usage indication, and the usage Indicate that the first SRS resource configuration information is used for the first terminal device to receive SRS; or, the usage indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information is used for the phase between the first terminal device and other terminal devices. calibration.
  5. 根据权利要求1-3任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息包括所述第一SRS资源配置信息,所述第一SRS资源配置信息包括的时域资源信息对应的符号类型为下行符号。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, characterized in that the first indication information includes the first SRS resource configuration information, and the first SRS resource configuration information includes time domain resource information corresponding to The symbol type is descending symbol.
  6. 根据权利要求2-5任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第一终端设备确定使用非码本传输方式发送所述第一信号的情况下,所述第一终端设备确定的CSI测量时刻为所述第一终端设备接收来自所述网络设备的信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS的时刻。The method according to any one of claims 2 to 5, characterized in that, when the first terminal device determines to use a non-codebook transmission method to send the first signal, the first terminal device determines The CSI measurement time is the time when the first terminal device receives the channel state information reference signal CSI-RS from the network device.
  7. 根据权利要求1-6任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-6, characterized in that the method further includes:
    所述第一终端设备接收来自所述网络设备的第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一终端设备向所述第二终端设备发送第一预编码矩阵,所述第一预编码矩阵为所述第一终端设备确定使用非码本传输方式发送所述第一信号的情况下所述第一时刻对应的预编码矩阵;The first terminal device receives second indication information from the network device, and the second indication information is used to instruct the first terminal device to send a first precoding matrix to the second terminal device. A precoding matrix is a precoding matrix corresponding to the first moment when the first terminal device determines to use a non-codebook transmission method to transmit the first signal;
    所述第一终端设备接收来自所述第二终端设备的第一信道信息,所述第一信道信息包括所述第二终端设备对CSI-RS进行测量获得的信道矩阵;The first terminal device receives first channel information from the second terminal device, where the first channel information includes a channel matrix obtained by measuring CSI-RS by the second terminal device;
    所述第一终端设备根据所述第一信道信息以及所述第一终端设备对CSI-RS进行测量获得的第二信道信息确定所述第一预编码矩阵;The first terminal device determines the first precoding matrix according to the first channel information and the second channel information obtained by measuring the CSI-RS by the first terminal device;
    所述第一终端设备向所述第二终端设备发送所述第一预编码矩阵。The first terminal device sends the first precoding matrix to the second terminal device.
  8. 根据权利要求2-5任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第一终端设备确定使用码本传输方式发送所述第一信号的情况下,所述第一终端设备确定的CSI测量时刻为所述第一终端设备向所述网络设备发送第二SRS的时刻,所述第二SRS用于上行信道的CSI测量;或者,所述第一终端设备确定的CSI测量时刻为所述第二终端设备向所述网络设备发送第三SRS的时刻,其中,所述第二终端设备向所述网络设备发送所述第三SRS的时刻是由所述网络设备指示给所述第一终端设备的,所述第三SRS用于上行信道的CSI测量。The method according to any one of claims 2 to 5, characterized in that, when the first terminal device determines to use a codebook transmission method to send the first signal, the CSI determined by the first terminal device The measurement time is the time when the first terminal device sends the second SRS to the network device, and the second SRS is used for CSI measurement of the uplink channel; or, the CSI measurement time determined by the first terminal device is the The moment when the second terminal device sends the third SRS to the network device, wherein the moment when the second terminal device sends the third SRS to the network device is indicated by the network device to the first terminal equipment, the third SRS is used for CSI measurement of the uplink channel.
  9. 根据权利要求1-8任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第一终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息之前,所述方法还包括: The method according to any one of claims 1 to 8, characterized in that, before the first terminal device receives the first indication information from the network device, the method further includes:
    所述第一终端设备接收来自所述网络设备的第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息指示所述第一终端设备接收的M个SRS资源配置信息为候选的用于所述第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准的SRS资源配置信息,M为大于1的正整数;The first terminal device receives third indication information from the network device, and the third indication information indicates that the M pieces of SRS resource configuration information received by the first terminal device are candidates for the first terminal device. SRS resource configuration information for phase calibration with other terminal equipment, M is a positive integer greater than 1;
    所述第一指示信息还用于指示所述M个SRS资源配置信息中的N个SRS资源配置信息为所述第一SRS资源配置信息,N为小于或等于M的正整数。The first indication information is also used to indicate that N pieces of SRS resource configuration information among the M pieces of SRS resource configuration information are the first SRS resource configuration information, and N is a positive integer less than or equal to M.
  10. 根据权利要求1-9任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第一终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 9, characterized in that, before the first terminal device receives the first indication information from the network device, the method further includes:
    所述第一终端设备向所述网络设备发送能力信息,所述能力信息用于指示所述第一终端设备具备获得所述第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位差信息和/或频偏信息的能力。The first terminal device sends capability information to the network device, where the capability information is used to indicate that the first terminal device is capable of obtaining phase difference information and/or frequency between the first terminal device and other terminal devices. The ability to bias information.
  11. 一种相位校准方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A phase calibration method, characterized in that the method includes:
    网络设备获取第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息指示第一终端设备接收的第一探测参考信号SRS资源配置信息用于所述第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准;The network device obtains first indication information, the first indication information indicates that the first sounding reference signal SRS resource configuration information received by the first terminal device is used for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices;
    所述网络设备向所述第一终端设备发送所述第一指示信息。The network device sends the first indication information to the first terminal device.
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息包括所述第一SRS资源配置信息,所述第一SRS资源配置信息包括用途指示usage,所述usage指示所述第一SRS资源配置信息用于所述第一终端设备接收SRS;或者,所述usage指示所述第一SRS资源配置信息用于所述第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准。The method of claim 11, wherein the first indication information includes the first SRS resource configuration information, the first SRS resource configuration information includes a usage indication, and the usage indicates the first The SRS resource configuration information is used for the first terminal device to receive SRS; or the usage indicates that the first SRS resource configuration information is used for phase calibration between the first terminal device and other terminal devices.
  13. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息包括所述第一SRS资源配置信息,所述第一SRS资源配置信息包括的时域资源信息对应的符号类型为下行符号。The method according to claim 11, characterized in that the first indication information includes the first SRS resource configuration information, and the symbol type corresponding to the time domain resource information included in the first SRS resource configuration information is a downlink symbol. .
  14. 根据权利要求11-13任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 11-13, characterized in that the method further includes:
    所述网络设备向所述第一终端设备发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送第一预编码矩阵,所述第一预编码矩阵为所述第一终端设备确定使用非码本传输方式发送第一信号的情况下第一时刻对应的预编码矩阵,所述第一时刻为所述第一终端设备接收来自所述网络设备的信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS的时刻。The network device sends second indication information to the first terminal device. The second indication information is used to instruct the first terminal device to send a first precoding matrix to the second terminal device. The first precoding matrix The matrix is the precoding matrix corresponding to the first moment when the first terminal device determines to use a non-codebook transmission method to send the first signal, and the first moment is when the first terminal device receives a signal from the network device. The time of the channel state information reference signal CSI-RS.
  15. 根据权利要求11-14任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述网络设备获取第一指示信息,包括:The method according to any one of claims 11-14, characterized in that the network device obtains the first indication information, including:
    所述网络设备接收来自所述第一终端设备的能力信息,所述能力信息用于指示所述第一终端设备具备获得所述第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位差信息和/或频偏信息的能力;The network device receives capability information from the first terminal device, and the capability information is used to indicate that the first terminal device is capable of obtaining phase difference information between the first terminal device and other terminal devices and/or Capability of frequency offset information;
    所述网络设备根据所述能力信息确定所述第一指示信息。The network device determines the first indication information according to the capability information.
  16. 根据权利要求11-15任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述网络设备向第一终端设备发送第一指示信息之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 11 to 15, characterized in that, before the network device sends the first indication information to the first terminal device, the method further includes:
    所述网络设备向所述第一终端设备发送第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息指示所述第一终端设备接收的M个SRS资源配置信息为候选的用于所述第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准的SRS资源配置信息,M为大于1的正整数;The network device sends third indication information to the first terminal device, and the third indication information indicates that the M pieces of SRS resource configuration information received by the first terminal device are candidates for use between the first terminal device and the first terminal device. SRS resource configuration information for phase calibration between other terminal devices, M is a positive integer greater than 1;
    所述第一指示信息还用于指示所述M个SRS资源配置信息中的N个SRS资源配置信息为所述第一SRS资源配置信息,N为小于或等于M的正整数。The first indication information is also used to indicate that N pieces of SRS resource configuration information among the M pieces of SRS resource configuration information are the first SRS resource configuration information, and N is a positive integer less than or equal to M.
  17. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,所述通信装置用于执行如权利要求1-10中任一项所述的相位校准方法。A communication device, characterized in that the communication device is used to perform the phase calibration method according to any one of claims 1-10.
  18. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,所述通信装置用于执行如权利要求11-16中任一项所述的相位校准方法。A communication device, characterized in that the communication device is configured to perform the phase calibration method according to any one of claims 11-16.
  19. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, characterized by including:
    处理器,所述处理器与存储器耦合;a processor coupled to a memory;
    所述处理器,用于执行所述存储器中存储的计算机程序,使得所述通信装置执行如权利要求1-10中任一项所述的相位校准方法,或者使得所述通信装置执行如权利要求11-16中任一项所述的相位校准方法。The processor is configured to execute a computer program stored in the memory, so that the communication device executes the phase calibration method as claimed in any one of claims 1-10, or the communication device executes the phase calibration method as claimed in any one of the claims. The phase calibration method described in any one of 11-16.
  20. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, characterized by including:
    处理器和接口电路;其中, Processor and interface circuit; where,
    所述接口电路,用于接收代码指令并传输至所述处理器;The interface circuit is used to receive code instructions and transmit them to the processor;
    所述处理器用于运行所述代码指令,使得所述通信装置执行如权利要求1-10中任一项所述的相位校准方法,或者使得所述通信装置执行如权利要求11-16中任一项所述的相位校准方法。The processor is configured to run the code instructions, so that the communication device performs the phase calibration method according to any one of claims 1-10, or causes the communication device to perform the phase calibration method according to any one of claims 11-16. The phase calibration method described in the item.
  21. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,所述通信装置包括处理器和收发器,所述收发器用于所述通信装置和其他通信装置之间进行信息交互,所述处理器执行程序指令,使得所述通信装置执行如权利要求1-10中任一项所述的相位校准方法,或者使得所述通信装置执行如权利要求11-16中任一项所述的相位校准方法。A communication device, characterized in that the communication device includes a processor and a transceiver, the transceiver is used for information exchange between the communication device and other communication devices, and the processor executes program instructions so that the The communication device performs the phase calibration method according to any one of claims 1-10, or causes the communication device to perform the phase calibration method according to any one of claims 11-16.
  22. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述计算机可读存储介质包括计算机程序或指令,当所述计算机程序或指令在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1-10中任一项所述的相位校准方法,或者使得所述计算机执行如权利要求11-16中任一项所述的相位校准方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that the computer-readable storage medium includes a computer program or instructions, and when the computer program or instructions are run on a computer, the computer is caused to execute as claimed in claims 1-10 The phase calibration method according to any one of claims 11-16, or causing the computer to perform the phase calibration method according to any one of claims 11-16.
  23. 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序或指令,当所述计算机程序或指令在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1-10中任一项所述的相位校准方法,或者使得所述计算机执行如权利要求11-16中任一项所述的相位校准方法。A computer program product, characterized in that the computer program product includes a computer program or instructions that, when the computer program or instructions are run on a computer, cause the computer to execute the steps as claimed in any one of claims 1-10. or causing the computer to perform the phase calibration method as described in any one of claims 11-16.
  24. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method includes:
    网络设备获取第一指示信息;The network device obtains the first instruction information;
    所述网络设备向第一终端设备发送所述第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息指示所述第一终端设备接收的第一探测参考信号SRS资源配置信息用于所述第一终端设备与其他终端设备之间的相位校准;The network device sends the first indication information to the first terminal device, and the first indication information indicates that the first sounding reference signal SRS resource configuration information received by the first terminal device is used for the first terminal device and the first terminal device. Phase calibration between other end devices;
    所述第一终端设备接收来自所述网络设备的第一指示信息;The first terminal device receives first indication information from the network device;
    所述第一终端设备根据所述第一指示信息在所述第一SRS资源配置信息指示的时频资源上接收来自第二终端设备的第一SRS,并对所述第一SRS进行测量获得所述第一终端设备与所述第二终端设备之间的相位差信息和/或频偏信息,所述相位差信息和/或频偏信息用于补偿所述第一终端设备与所述第二终端设备发送第一信号时对应的相位差和/或频偏。The first terminal device receives the first SRS from the second terminal device on the time-frequency resource indicated by the first SRS resource configuration information according to the first indication information, and measures the first SRS to obtain the result. Phase difference information and/or frequency offset information between the first terminal equipment and the second terminal equipment, the phase difference information and/or frequency offset information are used to compensate the first terminal equipment and the second terminal equipment. The corresponding phase difference and/or frequency offset when the terminal device sends the first signal.
  25. 一种通信系统,其特征在于,所述通信系统包括:第一终端设备和网络设备;其中,所述第一终端设备用于执行如权利要求1-10中任一项所述的相位校准方法,所述网络设备用于执行如权利要求11-16中任一项所述的相位校准方法。 A communication system, characterized in that the communication system includes: a first terminal device and a network device; wherein the first terminal device is used to perform the phase calibration method according to any one of claims 1-10 , the network device is configured to perform the phase calibration method according to any one of claims 11-16.
PCT/CN2023/102948 2022-08-24 2023-06-27 Phase calibration method and communication apparatus WO2024041171A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202211021005.3A CN117640312A (en) 2022-08-24 2022-08-24 Phase calibration method and communication device
CN202211021005.3 2022-08-24

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2024041171A1 true WO2024041171A1 (en) 2024-02-29

Family

ID=90012370

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2023/102948 WO2024041171A1 (en) 2022-08-24 2023-06-27 Phase calibration method and communication apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN117640312A (en)
WO (1) WO2024041171A1 (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2020155849A1 (en) * 2019-01-31 2020-08-06 华为技术有限公司 Method and apparatus for sending and receiving instructions
CN113285741A (en) * 2020-02-19 2021-08-20 华为技术有限公司 Signal transmission method and related equipment
US20210274578A1 (en) * 2020-02-27 2021-09-02 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method of and apparatus for transmitting data based on channel state in device-to-device communication
CN114286444A (en) * 2020-09-28 2022-04-05 华为技术有限公司 Correlation method of uplink reference signals and communication device

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2020155849A1 (en) * 2019-01-31 2020-08-06 华为技术有限公司 Method and apparatus for sending and receiving instructions
CN113285741A (en) * 2020-02-19 2021-08-20 华为技术有限公司 Signal transmission method and related equipment
US20210274578A1 (en) * 2020-02-27 2021-09-02 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method of and apparatus for transmitting data based on channel state in device-to-device communication
CN114286444A (en) * 2020-09-28 2022-04-05 华为技术有限公司 Correlation method of uplink reference signals and communication device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN117640312A (en) 2024-03-01

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US10804993B2 (en) Method and apparatus for downlink and uplink CSI acquisition
US9979446B2 (en) Method for WiFi beamforming, feedback, and sounding (WiBEAM)
WO2019010404A1 (en) Multi channel multiple input multiple output beamforming training in millimeter wave systems
CN112751592B (en) Method and communication device for reporting channel state information
CN115023906A (en) Dynamic interference measurement for multiple TRP CSI
JP7238167B2 (en) Precoding matrix display and determination method, and communication device
CN115413402A (en) Improved precoding
CN114902593A (en) Uplink grant downlink control information for frequency domain compressed uplink precoding
WO2021223211A1 (en) Signaling design for type ii csi-rs spatial domain and frequency domain basis configuration
CN112751598B (en) Method for processing precoding matrix and communication device
CN111757382B (en) Method for indicating channel state information and communication device
CN114600527A (en) Uplink sub-band precoding via sounding reference signals with frequency domain based precoding
CN114600384B (en) Channel measurement method and communication device
US20230013510A1 (en) Method for indicating channel state information csi measurement and communication apparatus
CN111756422A (en) Method for indicating channel state information and communication device
WO2024041171A1 (en) Phase calibration method and communication apparatus
WO2023245533A1 (en) Power scaling and splitting for uplink high resolution tpmi
WO2022227976A1 (en) Communication method and communication device
WO2022147709A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
US20230113496A1 (en) Co-polarized transmission and port selection
CN117478179A (en) Method for determining aggregation level of downlink control channel and communication device
WO2024057140A1 (en) Unified channel state information codebook
WO2022220711A1 (en) Baseband unit, radio unit and methods in a wireless communications network
WO2024069543A2 (en) Csi report with cqi values
WO2024079727A1 (en) Reference value reporting for artificial intelligence enabled channel state information reporting framework

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23856262

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1